JP6692384B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachi-slot machine”).

Conventionally, when a game ball is accepted into the starting winning opening (starting opening) as a winning opening, after a random number value is acquired, a decorative design for informing a lottery result (win / win) based on the random value is variably displayed. When the variable display game in which the display is stopped is performed, and the lottery result (combination of decorative patterns) displayed by the variable display game is a winning combination, normally, the normally closed prize winning opening or special winning opening is formed in a predetermined pattern. Mainstream is a gaming machine that opens and closes to create an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which a player has an advantage by increasing the chances of receiving a game medium into a special winning opening. (For example, see Patent Document 1) .

JP, 2013-102908, A

However, in the game machine described in Patent Document 1, if the game medium spills, the game ball may be caught between the outer frame and the main body frame.

Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to reduce the possibility that a game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame and the main body frame.

The gaming machine according to [Solution 1],
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame and a main body frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, wherein a game is played using a game ball,
The outer frame is
A lower member that is provided at a lower portion and includes a curtain plate on which the main body frame is mounted in a state where the main body frame is closed with respect to an outer frame;
A hinge member that is provided on the left side of the outer frame and that supports the main body frame in an openable and closable manner,
Have at least
A game ball discharge area for discharging game balls to the rear surface side of the curtain plate, which is formed at a position retracted rearward on the side where the hinge member is provided,
A standing wall portion that is erected horizontally long including the rear of the game ball discharge area,
Equipped with
The game ball discharge area is formed at a position where the whole is retracted rearward from the rear surface of the curtain plate, and is formed on the right side of at least the rotation shaft when the main body frame is opened and closed ,
On the left side of the game ball discharge area and in front of the standing wall portion, the game ball rolling from the front side to the rear side on the hinge member in a state where the main body frame is open to the outer frame. An acceptable flat plate is formed,
Game ball is configured to be guided along the vertical wall portion from said flat portion to the game ball discharge region,
Front wall surface of the portion located behind the said plate of said vertical wall portion, the located rearwardly spaced at least one minute ball game from the main body frame lower end rear surface when the front Stories body frame is closed,
When the body frame is closed, the lower surface of the body frame, characterized in that so as not located above the entire area of the game balls discharged areas.

According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame and the main body frame .

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the outer frame side upper hinge member portion of the outer frame seen from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. .. FIG. 7A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. 1A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with a door frame with respect to an outer frame in FIG. (A) is explanatory drawing shown in the state which provided the main body frame with respect to an outer frame with the guidance blade provided in the site | part of the outer frame side lower hinge member, and (b) is an outer frame in the embodiment of (a). On the other hand, it is an explanatory view showing the main body frame in a closed state, and (c) is a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame by providing the guide vanes of the embodiment different from (a) and (b). It is explanatory drawing, (d) is explanatory drawing shown in the state which closed the main body frame with respect to the outer frame in embodiment of (c). It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of a door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of a dish unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production | operation production unit for every main member, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembles the production operation unit for each main member and is viewed from below. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the installation base unit of the production operation unit and was seen from above. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit and was seen from above. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from above. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the production | operation operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the production | operation operation unit in the CC cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right production unit of a plate unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the lower right door effect unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower right door effect unit seen from the rear. It is DD sectional drawing in the door lower right production unit of FIG.43 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door lower right production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower right door production unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled | disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled | disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the lower right door rotating body of the lower right door effect unit facing forward, and (b) is a front view of the lower right door rotating body facing rearward. (A) is a perspective view of the dish unit as viewed from the front with the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base, and (b) is shown from the rear with the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper dish ball removal unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper dish ball removal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the lower dish ball removing unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower dish ball removing unit as seen from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payment unit for every main structure and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guide unit. (A) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the delivery apparatus and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball removal passage by the ball removal movable piece in a dispensing apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball removal passage by the ball removal movable piece. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the delivery blade in a delivery apparatus. (A) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit in a payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower tank ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower filled tank path | route unit and was seen from back. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state where a taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower tank ball path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the taxiway opening / closing door is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the taxiway opening / closing door of a form different from FIG. 76 thru | or FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view seen from the front which shows only the front component member and the game panel in the game board. It is the perspective view seen from the back which shows only the front component member and the game panel in the game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the table unit of the game board from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit of the front unit from the front upper side, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit from the back lower side. (A) is a perspective view of the side unit of the front unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the side unit seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the attacker unit of the front unit seen from the front upper side, (b) is a perspective view of the attacker unit seen from the upper back, and (c) is a perspective view of the attacker unit seen from the lower back. It is a figure. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory of a front unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory of a front unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper movable production unit in a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the back upper movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable production unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable production unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back decoration unit of the back movable production unit and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed the back decoration unit of the back movable production unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back upper sub-decoration body in a back upper movable decoration body unit. It is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism when the back side decorative body unit of the back side movable effect unit is in the retracted position. It is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism when the back decoration unit of the back movable production unit is in the first appearance position. It is a front view showing a state of the internal mechanism when the back decoration unit of the back movable production unit is in the second appearance position. (A) is a front view which shows a part of internal mechanism of a back-and-back movable production unit, (b) is a perspective view which looked at a part different from (a) in an internal mechanism from the front, and (c). [Fig. 3] is a perspective view of (b) viewed from the rear. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part of movement of the internal mechanism of a back side movable production unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the main member which comprises the internal mechanism in a retracted position, (b) is a 1st transmission member rotating from the state of (a) to a 1st to-be-transmitted member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the transmission of the rotation was started. FIG. 113C shows a state in which the first transmitted member and the first transmitted member further rotate from the state of FIG. 113B, and the back decorative body unit is descending from the retracted position to the first appearance position. FIG. 7D is an explanatory diagram, in which the first transmitted member and the first transmitted member are further rotated from the state of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which reached one appearance position. (E) is a state in which the second transmission member of the transmission mechanism that has been rotating together with the first transmission member from the state of FIG. 114 (d) is further rotated and transmission of rotation to the second transmitted member is started. FIG. 6F is an explanatory view showing the rear decorative body unit descending from the first appearance position to the second appearance position by rotating the second transmission member and the second transmitted member from the state of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which is rotating. (G) shows a state in which the second transmitted member rotates together with the second transmission member from the state of (f) of FIG. 115, and the back decorative body unit is further descending toward the second appearance position and is rotating. FIG. 7 (h) is an explanatory view showing the state of (g), in which the second transmitted member further rotates together with the second transmitted member, transmission of rotation to the second transmitted member ends, and the back decorative body unit is It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which reached | attained to the 2nd appearance position by making a half rotation, descending from the state of the 1st appearance position. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front movable production unit of the back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front movable production unit of the back unit from the back. (A) is an explanatory view showing the front lower back front decorative body and the front lower back front decorative body of the front lower back movable effect unit from the front in the state of a normal retracted position, and (b) is the front lower back It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front the back front lower decoration and the back lower front second decoration of a movable production unit in the state of an appearance position. (A) is a perspective view of the back right movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back right movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the back. (A) is a front view of the back right movable effect unit shown in a state where the first decorative surface of the back right rotation decorative body is directed to the front, and (b) is a shutter of the back right rotation decorative body opened in (a). It is a front view of the back right movable production unit shown in a state where (c) is a front view of the back right movable production unit shown in a state where the second decorative surface of the back right rotating decorative body is directed to the front, ) Is a front view of the back right movable effect unit shown with the third decorative surface of the back right rotation decorative body facing the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the back. (A) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit shown in the state where the first decorative surface of the back left rotating decorative body is directed to the front, and (b) shows the second decorative surface of the back left rotating decorative body in front. It is a front view of the back left movable production unit shown in a state of facing, and (c) is a front view of the back left movable production unit shown in a state where the third decorative surface of the back left rotating decorative body is faced to the front, FIG. 9D is a front view of the back left movable effect unit showing a state where the back left protruding decoration of the back left rotating decoration is set to the appearance position in the state of FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG. 122 (a). (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower back movable production unit of a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower rear movable production unit of a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the raising / lowering unit of the back lower back movable production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering unit of the back lower back movable production unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a raising / lowering unit from the front when a back lower back rotation decoration unit is in a falling end position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a raising / lowering unit from a front when a back lower back rotation decoration unit is a raising end position. (A) is a front view of the back lower back movable effect unit, (b) is a perspective view of the back lower rear movable effect unit seen from the front, and (c) is a back lower part. It is the perspective view which looked at the back underside of the back movable production unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled | disassembled the back underside back decoration body unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back underside back decoration body unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line in FIG. 129 (a). (A) is a front view showing a state where the back-bottom rear-rotating decorative body of the back-bottom rear-rotating decorative unit is stopped rotating, and (b) is a front-bottom rear-rotating decorative body in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which is rotating, (c) is a front view which shows the state just before a back decoration is opened and a rotating decorative body is opened, and it rotates in the clockwise direction in a front view, (d) is a back bottom. It is a front view showing the state where the back rotation ornamental object is rotating in the clockwise direction by front view. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the drive mechanism which concerns on the back lower back rotation decoration motor in a back lower rear rotation decoration body unit, (b) is a differential mechanism which concerns on a rotary damper in a back lower back rotation decoration body unit. FIG. 6C is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a coupling mechanism that couples the drive mechanism related to the back lower rear rotation drive motor and the differential mechanism related to the rotary damper in the back lower rear rotating decorative body unit. FIG. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when a back lower back rotating ornament is closed and rotation is stopped, (b) is a back lower rear rotating ornament rotating in the counterclockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism at the time of doing. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state of the coupling mechanism when the rotating decorative body is closed and rotation is stopped after the underside of the back, and (b) is a coupling ring of the drive mechanism rotated in the clockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when a lower back rotation decoration body is opening, (c) shows the connection ring of a drive mechanism further rotating in the clockwise direction, and a back lower back rotation decoration body is completely. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism at the time of opening, (d) is a connection mechanism at the time of the back lower back rotation decoration body of the open state rotating in the clockwise direction with the connection mechanism of a drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows a state. It is the perspective view which looked at the back four corner movable production unit of a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back four corners movable production unit of a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back four corner 1st unit in a back four corner movable production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable production unit, and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back four corner second unit in the back four corner movable production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back four corner second unit in the back four corner movable production unit, and was seen from the back. (A) is a front view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable production unit in the state of the normal retreat position, (b) is the back four corner first in the state of the back four corner first decorative body appearing position, It is a front view of a unit, and (c) is a front view of a back four corner first unit in a state where a back four corner second decorative body is in an appearance position. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the drive mechanism from the left side when the back four corner first decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit, and (b) is the back four corner first in the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a drive mechanism in the middle of a decoration body going from an evacuation position to an appearance position, (c) is a drive mechanism when a back four corners 1st decoration body is an appearance position in a back four corners 1st unit. It is an explanatory view showing the state of from the left side. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the drive mechanism from the left side when the back four corner second decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit, and (b) is the back four corner second in the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a drive mechanism in the middle of a decoration body going to an appearance position from a retracted position, (c) is a drive mechanism when a back four corners second decoration body is an appearance position in a back four corners 1st unit. It is an explanatory view showing the state of from the left side. It is a front view of the game board which shows the movement of the movable front decoration of the movable front unit in the center accessory. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state where the back decoration of the back movable production unit in the back unit is in the first appearance position. A state in which the back decoration of the back movable production unit in the back unit is at the second appearance position, and the first back decoration before the back and the second decoration before the back of the movement production unit before the back are at the appearance position It is a front view of the game board showing. The first decoration of the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable effect unit, while the pair of shutters are opened with the first decorative surface of the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable effect unit facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state where the back left protruding decorative body is in the appearance position with the surface facing forward. It is the front view of the game board which shows the back right rotation decoration body of the back right movable production unit and the back left rotation decoration body of the back left movable production unit in the back unit, with their respective second decorative surfaces facing forward. It is the front view of the game board which shows the back right rotation decoration body of the back right movable production unit and the back left rotation decoration body of the back left movable production unit in the back unit with the respective third decorative surfaces facing forward. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state where the back lower back rotary decoration body of the back lower back movable production unit in the back unit is rotated in the counterclockwise direction from the front at the rising end position. Movable back under the back unit in the rear unit Rotating the underneath rear decorative body of the unit at the rising end position in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and at the same time the second decorative body at the back four corners of the back four corner movable direction unit appears. It is a front view of the game board showing the state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back four corner first decorative body of the back four corner movable effect unit in the back unit in the state of the appearance position. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, and (b) shows interrupt processing periodically executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the special design process processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the big hit judging processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used in the lottery process for the big hit, (B) is a symbol determination table used in the lottery process for the big hit. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the 1st special design stop design setting processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol change processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about sub main processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16ms regular processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a timing chart of battle production. It is a timing chart of battle production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle production. It is the front view of the game board which cut the front component and the front unit in the center of the front and back direction inside the game territory. 174 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the right part in the game area in FIG. 174, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing only the main part by cutting along the line H-H in (a). It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the upper special winning opening vicinity in FIG. 174. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold number display on the display panel of a central liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold change effect using the hold number display on the display panel of a central liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example as a continuation of the suspension change production of FIG. 178. It is a figure which shows an example as a continuation of the suspension change production of FIG. 179. The pending change effect of this example, a change in the display color of the pending image that is the target of the effect, and the display color of the pending image that is the target of the effect that changes the display position as the holding storage is exhausted are schematically represented. It is a time chart. It is a flow chart which shows each processing which peripheral control MPU performs as related processing among reservation control processing of Step S602 of Drawing 168, concerning pending storage. It is a flow chart which shows a subroutine of the number of reservations designation command processing which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 183. It is a flow chart which shows the subroutine of the reservation change production decision processing which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a flow chart which shows the subroutine of the reservation change production processing which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a flow chart which shows a subroutine of a reservation image shift processing which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a figure which shows each table, a storage area, and a process operation required in order that peripheral control MPU may perform each process regarding pending storage. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a first starting opening passage processing (second embodiment) executed by the main control MPU of the main control board instead of the first starting opening passage processing of FIG. 157. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the 2nd starting opening passage processing (2nd Embodiment) which the main control MPU of a main control board replaces with the 2nd starting opening passage processing of FIG. 158. It is a flow chart which shows the subroutine of the pre-reading judgment processing which main control MPU performs. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used at the time of a big hit, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used at the time of a miss reach. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table used at the time of leaving. It is a time chart that schematically shows the pseudo-reciprocal fluctuation due to the decorative pattern and the notice effect accompanying the pseudo-reciprocal fluctuation. It is a figure showing an example of notice production, and is a figure showing an example of notice production using a display panel of a central liquid crystal display. It is a figure which shows the high or low reliability of the notice (serif) in the notice production, and the notice production lottery distribution table used for the determination of the notice (serif) in the notice production. FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing each process executed by the peripheral control MPU in relation to the pseudo continuous fluctuation as each process of the effect control process of step S602 of FIG. 168. FIG. 16B is a flowchart showing each process executed by the peripheral control MPU in relation to the pseudo continuous fluctuation as each process as the second embodiment of the effect control process of step S602 of FIG. 168. FIG. 16C is a flowchart showing a process executed by the peripheral control MPU in association with updating the random number for advance notice determination as one process of the random number updating process in step S606 of FIG. 168 in the third embodiment. (D) is a diagram showing an example of a number-of-times determination table stored in a ROM (not shown). It is a flow chart which shows a subroutine of notice production decision processing 1 which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a flow chart which shows the subroutine of the notice decision processing which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a flow chart which shows the subroutine of the notice production processing which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a figure which shows each random number counter, each table, each memory area, and processing operation required in order that peripheral control MPU may perform each process regarding an announcement production. It is a flow chart which shows a subroutine of notice production decision processing 2 which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a flow chart which shows a subroutine of notice production decision processing 3 which peripheral control MPU performs in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a subroutine of advance notice decision processing 2 which peripheral control MPU performs in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a subroutine of notice production processing 2 which peripheral control MPU performs in a 3rd embodiment.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 9 is a front view of the pachinko machine, a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are vertically separated from each other and extend horizontally, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other, and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the curtain plate member 50. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a square outer shape in front view and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back, and a game attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A dish unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to an upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to a left front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball stored in the upper plate 201 which is attached to the lower right part of the front face of the door frame base unit 100 by penetrating the plate unit 200. The rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player in order to drive into the game area of the game board 5. The foul cover unit 520 which is attached to the part and receives the game ball which is hit in the game area and discharges it to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the game ball of the upper plate 201 which is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A ball feeding unit 540 for sending to the ball launching device 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 for closing the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 for covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560. ing.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are also provided. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached respectively, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to a left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a body frame 4 mounted on the right side surface of the body frame base in front view. , And the door A locking unit 700 that locks between the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4, and an inverted L-shaped payout, which is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front and delivers the game ball to the player side. A unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 such that the rear side of the main body frame base 600 can be opened and closed. And a back cover 980.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball-shaped tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from a box-shaped island facility (not shown), and a game ball inside the ball tank 802 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820. A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and is guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on an instruction from the payout control board housed in the payout control board box 950, a payout device 830 for paying out one by one, and a gaming ball paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 are guided downward. At the same time, depending on the storage state of the game balls on the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200, the upper full tank ball path unit 850 for discharging the game balls from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port, and the payout unit base 801. It is attached to the lower end and guides the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port of the upper tank ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 Lower full tank ball path uni that has a full tank guideway that guides the played game ball to the front and guides it from the front end to the full tank receptacle 530 of the door frame 3. Is provided with a door 860, a.

  The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a bass speaker inside the board unit base 910 attached to the back side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in front view. The speaker unit 920, the power supply board box 930, which is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and accommodates the power supply board inside, and the speaker unit 920, which is mounted on the rear side and internally controls the interface. An interface control board box 940 accommodating a board, a power supply board box 930, and a payout control board box mounted across the interface control board box 940 and accommodating a payout control board for controlling the payout of game balls inside. And 950.

  As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is driven and places the game ball emitted from the ball emitting device 680 at the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100. It has a box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control substrate attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. A table having a main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning openings which are mounted in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and which can receive game balls hit in the game area 5a. A knit (not shown) and a back unit (not shown) having a liquid crystal display device attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 above the board box 1200 and visible to the player through the game panel 1100. I have it.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launching device 680 causes the game to be played with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit in the game area 5a are received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the paying-out device 830 according to the received winning holes. . Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. 10 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a right side view of the outer frame. 12 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. 15A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member of the outer frame viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 15B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the drawing, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extends to the left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending in the direction. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the left and right side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 face the same surface. Has been.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, and a lock member 66 attached to a lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably attached.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is mounted to the front side of the lower frame member 20. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are respectively attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 which is attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the left-right center, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. Is prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (eg, wood, plywood, etc.). The upper frame member 10 is provided with engagement notches 11 that vertically penetrate and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends. Inside the engagement notch 11, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 described later are attached. Further, the upper frame member 10 includes mounting step portions 12 that are recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.). The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. Is formed to be longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with engagement notches 21 that vertically penetrate and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions on the left and right ends that are closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction. Inside the engagement notch 21, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end cutouts 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces of the left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end cutout 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape member such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 20 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetrical shapes in a plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward on a side surface that is an outer side in the left-right direction from a position rearward with respect to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end. The recesses 31 and 41 and the protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surfaces of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow interior are provided. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, inside the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is inserted and attached.

  Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported on an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily gripped by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to improve the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape having an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rearward extending portion 51 extending rearward in the shape of a flat plate near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rearward extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically with a size allowing a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51, The standing wall portion 54 that extends upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and the front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to move rearward as it goes toward.

  The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front side upper surface of the rear extending part 51 and the rear side extending part 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74, which will be described later, of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 when assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 when assembled in the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 (see FIG. 18 and the like).

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rearward extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. And a part 57. On the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the lower surface of the main body frame 3 is placed via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern, so that strength and rigidity are enhanced. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and a rectangular outer fixing portion 61, and a flat plate shape extending forward from a front end of the upper fixing portion 61. Of the front extension portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 toward the center of the front extension portion 62, and penetrating vertically, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61. A plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 15B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to move the body frame 4 by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a strip plate-shaped lock main body 66a extending left and right with a predetermined width in the front-rear direction, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a, and then extending diagonally left front, and a mounting hole vertically extending near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to the lock member 66 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the hanging portion 65 of the portion 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 17).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17). In this state, a space for accommodating a main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operating portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upright from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A rising flat plate-shaped rising part 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal part 71, and a size through which the horizontal part 71 is vertically penetrated so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 for the cage. The outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 on the left side. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to contact the center portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U-shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 has substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 has a horizontal portion 71 that is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51. However, it is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) that penetrate the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the projecting portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is configured such that the outer frame-side lower hinge pin 73 is inserted into a lower-body-frame-side lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame-side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 so that the outer frame-side lower hinge pin 73 is moved upward. The main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance between and is gradually narrowed, rolling is performed to the rear side with a wide interval, so that it can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling rearward of the body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay in the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the upper lateral fixing portion 87 of 86. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 while being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging cutout portion 11 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Further, the front lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32, 42. Further, the lower left lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32, 42 and is screwed from the outer side surface. It is fixed to the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 projects rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32, 42. Furthermore, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right fixing member 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engaging notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. .

[2-9. Outer frame side upper hinge member lock mechanism]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. 16A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state where the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the upper hinge member. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  In the state where the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock main body 66a closes a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V shape, and the tip portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

  In the support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is close to the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 63 are diagonally displaced and opposed to each other. It is in a state.

  In this normal axial support state, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which supports the heavy main body frame 4, is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Little load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock member 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape, and the abutment is made on the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is exerted. F is a component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arcuate front end surface, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. When the force is divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact surface with the inner surface of one side, and the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment that causes the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 to rotate in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 causes the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63. Side Clamped state is maintained between the.

  Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is in the normal axial support state or the action force of the main body frame hinge pin 622 is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c to be prevented, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a comes into contact with the drooping portion 65 and further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extension portion 62.

  Even if the front end surface of the lock main body 66a is not arcuate, the lock member 66 is positioned such that the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 or the front end of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front protrusion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at the position where the rotation moment for rotation is generated, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded, and the lock is performed. Even if the member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extension 62.

  When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the body frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is resisted against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that closed the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is biased by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 is brought into a state of being housed in the space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It will be held (locked) in this state.

  When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member part]
Prevention of ball biting for preventing a game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism in the outer frame 2 lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. 18A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened together with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in FIG. FIG. 19A is an explanatory view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame by providing a guide vane on a portion of the outer frame-side lower hinge member, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing shown in the state which closed the main body frame with respect to a frame, (c) is the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame with the guide blade of embodiment different from (a) and (b). FIG. 4D is an explanatory view showing in a state where the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame in the embodiment of FIG.

  In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being placed on the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the rear side of the body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool contacts the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the illegal tool can be prevented from being inserted further rearward. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the illegal tool that abuts the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the return portion 55 causes the tip of the incorrect tool to be bent. Since it can be folded back further forward, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and a fraudulent act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 18B. When the game ball falls on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) in the state of being present, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. Since it is not carried out, there is a possibility that it may be sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal hole 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which a game ball can pass and a right discharge hole 52. , And the left discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to reduce that the game ball is sandwiched between.

  Therefore, by sandwiching the game ball between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, and the main body frame 4 does not close in a normal state and the outer frame 2 It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being made by using a gap between the main body frame 4 and the gap.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned configuration, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls dropped on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 are discharged from the discharge holes 74 and the like. To facilitate this, as shown in FIG. 19, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 may be provided with guide vanes 95 and 96 for guiding the game balls to the discharge holes 74 and the like.

  More specifically, the guide blade 95 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B has a tip projecting outward from the body frame 4, and a base end side below the rear end of the left side surface of the body frame 4. It is mounted rotatably around an axis extending vertically on the side, and is formed in a rod shape. The guide blade 95 is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to rotate counterclockwise in a plan view. Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (a), the guide vanes 95 are slightly inclined rearward with respect to the left side surface of the main body frame 4 with the front end thereof in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The turning end in the counterclockwise direction is regulated so that it is in a state of protruding to the right. Therefore, from this state, the guide blade 95 can rotate so that the tip end side moves backward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

  When the main body frame 4 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 in a direction in which the main body frame 4 is closed, the tips of the guide blades 95 contact the right side surface of the rising portion 72 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. The guide vanes 95 rotate in the direction in which the tip moves rearward (clockwise in plan view) around the base end side against the biasing force of a spring (not shown). Then, when the main body frame 4 is further rotated in the closing direction, the guide blades 95 are further rotated so as to project rearward from the main body frame 4, so that the guide blades 95 do not interfere with the outer frame 2. The body frame 4 can be closed (see FIG. 19B).

  When the game ball is dropped onto the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 70 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide vanes 95 project diagonally left rearward from the rear end of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be moved to the right side by the left side surface of the main body frame 4 and the guide blades 95, and the game ball is moved to the rear side of the main body frame 4. It is possible to suppress rolling, and to guide the game ball to the right side to guide it to the discharge hole 74, so that the game ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  When the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide vanes 95 are rotated counterclockwise in plan view to the position of FIG. 19A by the urging force of a spring (not shown). . Therefore, the guide blades 95 of the present embodiment rotate (move) as the main body frame 4 opens and closes.

  On the other hand, the guide vanes 96 shown in FIGS. 19C and 19D have both ends attached to the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 as shown in the drawing, and the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The fan-shaped bellows-like bellows-like bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows-shaped bellows bellows, The guide vane 96, like the guide vane 95 described above, moves with the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 4.

  The guide vanes 96 are expanded between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the game ball drops onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 while the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. By the guide vanes 96 that are present, the game balls that have fallen can be rolled and guided to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and from the discharge hole 74 and the right discharge hole 53 that are open on the rear side of the main body frame 4. The game ball can be discharged downward. Therefore, even with this guide blade 96, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  According to the present embodiment, since the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 can be guided to the discharge hole 74 by the guide blades 95 and 96, the game ball is discharged from the discharge hole 74 without enlarging the discharge hole 74. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the strength of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 from decreasing due to the increase of the hole (the discharge hole 74) penetrating the horizontal portion 71. Therefore, even if a tool for performing an illegal act is inserted between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has sufficient strength, and therefore, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. 70 is less likely to be distorted, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed at a portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, and prevent fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 26. 20 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, and FIG. 21 is a rear view of the door frame. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the right front side, FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front side, and FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the back side. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a quadrangular outer shape in a front view, and has a frame shape, a door frame base unit 100, a dish unit 200 attached to a lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to an upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 350, the left side unit 400 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, the right side unit 450 attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower right front part of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 500 is attached so as to penetrate the dish unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a foul cover unit 520 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, a ball feeding unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a vertically long rectangular shape, A tubular handle mounting member 120 for mounting the handle unit 500, which is mounted on the front right lower corner of the front side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. And a door frame side that is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left end side of the reinforcement unit 130 in a front view and protrudes forward to be rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150, and a glass for rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is vertically arranged in rows and bulges forward, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 can store the game balls, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. And a plate-shaped plate unit base 210 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 mounted on the plate unit base 210 on the front side of the upper plate 201 and capable of displaying an image, A production operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 and an upper dish production button 257 that can be operated by the player, a dish unit cover 260 that covers the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202 from the front side, and a right side of the front dish 201 on the front side. The lower right door effect unit 270 having the lower right door rotary member 270A that is arranged and rotates according to the game state, and the lower right door effect unit 270 are covered from the front side. A transparent effect unit cover 300, an upper plate ball removing unit 310 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and for pulling out the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 downward. A lower dish ball removing unit 320, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, An upper plate top decoration member 340, which is attached to the upper part of the plate unit base 210 and is capable of light emission decoration, is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 25, FIG. 26, etc., the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 partially attached to the front side of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side, and a unit base 360 having a light-transmitting property. A front decoration member 370 having a translucent property, which is attached to the front left and right center of the front surface of the 360 and bulges forward, and a top speaker which is installed inside the top decoration member 370 and outputs a sound in a high range ( (Not shown), and a door frame decoration board 380 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 mounted along the left outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a unit. A translucent left side decoration member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decoration member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decoration member 420. 3, a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) attached to the upper left corner of the unit 3, and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface thereof. And a left decorative substrate 440.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 460 mounted along the right outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a unit. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front surface of the right side decorative member 470. 3, a right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) attached to the position of the upper right corner of the unit 3, a unit base 460 and a right side decoration member 470, and a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And a door frame right decoration board (not shown) to which is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 25, FIG. 26, etc., the handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the handle body 502 attached to the handle attachment member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 and the handle body 502. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and that cooperates with the handle body 502 to rotatably support the handle lever 504. And are equipped with. Further, although not shown, the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle body 502 and a handle operation sensor for detecting a rotation angle of the handle lever 504, and a handle unit attached to the handle body 502, which can be operated by a player. A stop button and a contact detection sensor that is mounted in the handle body 502 and detects contact between the player and the handle lever 504 are provided.

  The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. 25, 26, 55 to 57, etc., is a shallow box-shaped unit main body that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and has the front side opened. 522 and a flat plate-shaped lid member 524 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 522 are mainly provided. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates in the front-rear direction in the upper left corner of the front view and connects the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the body frame 4 with the upper pan ball supply port 210a of the pan unit 200. 526, a full tank ball receiving port 528 that is open to the rear on the right side of the through-ball passage 526 when viewed from the front, and is capable of communicating with the full tank guiding path of the lower tank ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A foul that receives a game ball (fal ball) that has been opened upward on the right side of the ball receiving port 528 when viewed from the front and that has not been reached in the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 680 of the body frame 4. The ball receiving port 530 and the game ball received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530, which are open toward the front in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, are discharged and the dish unit 200 is released. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  As shown in FIG. 25, FIG. 26, etc., the ball feeding unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 542, which is a box-shaped unit main body 542 that extends to the left and right and is open on the rear side. A unit cover 544 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side in a front view of the foul cover unit 520 with the front side open, and the upper plate of the dish unit 200 that opens to the front A ball entrance 546 into which the game balls stored in 201 enter, a ball discharge port 548 that is capable of releasing the game balls entering the ball entrance 546 and is open rearward, and a ball entrance A game ball that has entered into 546 can be discharged, and a ball discharge port 550 that is open to the front below the ball entrance 546 is provided. Although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 is a ball feed solenoid for releasing the game balls entered from the ball entry port 546 one by one from the ball release port 548, and the game ball entered from the ball entry port 546. A switching mechanism for switching between the ball discharge port 548 side and the ball discharge port 550 side.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to the frame-shaped unit frame 562 which is larger than the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front and rear sides of the unit frame 562. A pair of glass plates 564 that closes the inside of the cage unit frame 562 are provided.

[3-1. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 27 to 42. FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. 32 is a perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from above, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from below. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit of the performance operation unit as seen from above and FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as seen from below.

  In addition, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the effect operation unit that is disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit that is disassembled and viewed from below. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit as seen from above and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as seen from below. 40 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 41 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a portion of the effect operation unit in the BB section in FIG. 40, and FIG. 42 is an effect operation in the CC section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 43 (a) is a front view of the lower right door rendering unit of the dish unit, (b) is a right side view of the lower right door rendering unit, and FIG. 44 (a) is a lower right door rendering unit. It is the perspective view seen from front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the back. FIG. 45 is a DD sectional view of the lower right door effect unit of FIG. 43 (b). FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit of the lower right door rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 50 (a) is a front view of the lower right door rotating body of the lower right door effect unit facing forward, and FIG. 50 (b) is a front view of the lower right door rotating body facing rearward.

  Further, FIG. 51 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front in a state where the upper dish ball removing unit of the dish unit is attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 51 (b) is the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from back in the state. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 54 (a) is a perspective view of the lower dish ball punching unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower dish ball punching unit as disassembled and seen from the front.

  The dish unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. This plate unit 200 is an upper plate 201 that stores a game ball that is paid out from the payout device 830 and is driven into the game area 5a, and a game that is arranged below the upper plate 201 and that is supplied from the upper plate 201. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls. The dish unit 200 is attached to the flat plate-shaped dish unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to the upper front portion of the dish unit base 210, and the left side is bulged forward from the center in the left and right. And a lower plate body 214 that is attached to the center of the left and right at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 210 and that bulges significantly forward and forms the lower plate 202. .

  Further, the dish unit 200 covers the effect operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper plate body 212 and the front surface of the plate unit base 210, the upper plate body 212, the lower plate body 214, and the front and lower sides of the effect operation unit. Dish unit cover 260 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, lower right door production unit 270 disposed on the right side of the production operation unit 220 and attached to the right front portion of the dish unit base 210, and lower right door production unit Performance unit cover 300 that covers the front side of 270 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, and game balls that are attached to sandwich the dish unit base 210 from the front and back and are stored in the upper dish 201 of the upper dish body 212. Lower plate main body 214 and the lower side of the lower plate body 214 Mounted it includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Further, the dish unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit 220, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, and a plate. The upper plate top decoration member 340, which is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and is capable of emitting light, and the rear side of the plate unit cover 260, which is attached to the left side of the front face of the plate unit base 210, can emit light forward. The plate unit left decorative substrate 345 including a plurality of LEDs and the rear of the rendering unit cover 300 and the lower side of the lower right door rendering unit 270 are attached to the front right side of the dish unit base 210 and are directed forward. The dish unit right decorative substrate 346 having a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light and the dish unit base 210 are attached to the rear side. The decorative plate front plate 233, the decorative plate rear plate 235, the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241, the vibrating device 242, the touch panel 246, the effect button decorative substrate 251, the effect button pressing sensor 258, the door lower right relay substrate 281, which will be described later. The dish unit left decoration board 345, and the dish unit right decoration board 346 and the dish unit relay board 347 that relays the connection between the peripheral control board (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

[3-1a. Plate unit base]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the dish unit base 210 of the dish unit 200 extends to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit base 210 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front and also has an upper dish ball supply port 210a extending cylindrically rearward, and penetrates forward and backward under the upper dish ball supply port 210a. And a speaker slit 210b formed of a plurality of elongated holes extending up and down, a lower dish ball supply port 210c penetrating forward and backward at the lower center of the left and right center in a front view, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a lower dish. An upper plate ball feed port 210d is provided, which penetrates the ball supply port 210c on the upper right side in a front view in the front-rear direction, extends vertically, and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate body 212.

  Further, the dish unit base 210 has a through hole 210e having a quadrangular inner circumference penetrating forward and backward on the left side in a front view of the upper dish ball sending port 210d, and a receiving part projecting forward from the lower side of the through hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the escape port 210g that penetrates the upper dish ball feed port 210d in the front-rear direction on the upper right side in front view, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the lower right corner in front view. Handle insertion opening 210h, a cylinder insertion opening 210i that penetrates the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner in the front view and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and the right side of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply opening 210c in the front view. And a cutout portion 210j that is cut out from the rear end to the front side.

[3-1b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the upper plate main body 212 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right as viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward and backward. ing. The upper plate main body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a which is open to the left and the rear only on the right end side in front view and through which game balls can flow. The upper plate body 212 is inclined such that the bottom surface is generally lower at the right end. More specifically, with the upper plate body 212 attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is from the lower position of the upper plate ball supply port 210a to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. Is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of the. As a result, the game ball emitted forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate body 212, and the received game ball can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the delivery port 210d.

  Further, the upper plate body 212 is provided with a metal ground metal fitting 212b extending from the left and right center to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the earth metal fitting 212b is electrically grounded (earthed), and by contacting the game ball, static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

[3-1c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the lower plate body 214 of the plate unit 200 has a trapezoidal plan view in which the rear end side is longer than the front end side, and is formed in a container shape in which the upper side and the rear side are opened. The lower dish main body 214 has a ball-draining hole 214a that penetrates the bottom face vertically and can be closed by the lower plate ball-draining unit 320. is doing. This lower plate main body 214 can receive and store the game balls discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit base 210, and also downwardly move the game balls to the lower side of the plate unit 200 from the ball hole 214a. Can be discharged.

[3-1d. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the rendering operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A and the attachment base unit 220A attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish body 212 at the center of the left and right when viewed from the front. A touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the attachment base unit 220A on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the attachment base unit 220A. A unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer peripheries of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from the upper side, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end of the attachment base unit 220A in front view.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire circumference at the axial center of the outer peripheral surface. The damper 222 in this embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can alleviate the impact when the touch unit 220B is struck and reduce the load (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220 or the dish unit base 210 side, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the transmission of vibration by the vibrating device 242 to the mounting base unit 220 or the dish unit base 210 side.

[3-1d-1. Mounting base unit]
As shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the mounting base unit 220A of the performance operation unit 220 is a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 that is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and has an open top. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 that is attached and has its rear end attached to the front end of the upper plate body 212 and is capable of accommodating the touch unit 200B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231. A front lens member 232, a front plate front decorative substrate 233 arranged between the front plate front lens member 232 and the unit case 231, and provided with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a unit cover for covering the front side of the front plate front lens member 232. And a translucent upper plate front decoration member 234 attached to 224.

  Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231, and has an upper plate rear decorative substrate 235 having a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward, and an upper plate rear decorative substrate 235 upper side. And a translucent upper plate rear decoration member 236 disposed on the unit cover 224, and sandwiched by the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 from the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235. Linear light-emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light of the above to emit light linearly, a cylindrical button attachment member 238 attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 in front view, and a button attachment member. An upper dish ball removing button 239 that is slidably attached up and down by the 238.

  The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined downward from the front-rear approximate center to the front side, and a mounting side receiving portion 230a that penetrates the mounting side receiving portion 230a and is separated from each other to the left and right. One through-hole 230b and a tubular receiving portion 230c that extends downward from the peripheral edge of the through-hole 230b are provided. The through hole 230b has a quadrangular inner circumference. The tubular receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal tubular shape so as to narrow as it goes downward (see FIG. 42). More specifically, in the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, the inner peripheral wall on the front side extends substantially perpendicularly to the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a, and the inner peripheral wall on the rear side is lower than the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a. As it goes to, it extends so as to be directed forward. In addition, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c extends so that the inner peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined such that the lower ends (tips) thereof are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a.

  The unit case 231 is open upward and accommodates the touch unit 220B. The unit case 231 is spaced apart from the front and rear ends of the bottom surface of the storage recess 231a in the front and rear directions, respectively, and protrudes upward in pairs in a cylindrical shape. A horizontal support pin 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c that protrudes upward in a column shape from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the center of the housing recess 231a on the front and rear ends of the bottom surface. It has a central support protrusion 231d protruding upward, and two receiving protrusions 231e protruding in a pyramid shape so as to be narrowed from the lower side of the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a toward the lower side and separated from each other to the left and right. .

  In addition, the unit case 231 is arranged around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower part of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface, which penetrates vertically in a circular shape on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a in a front view. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends left and right on the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the housing recess 231a and is recessed downward from the upper end are arranged. And a notch portion 231h.

  The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 has a shape in plan view that is a combination of a quadrangle that extends left and right and a trapezoid that protrudes outward from both the left and right sides of the quadrangle. In addition, in the accommodation recess 231a, the bottom surfaces of the quadrangular portions are formed lower than the bottom surfaces of the trapezoidal portions on the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is formed slightly lower than the height (axial length) of the damper 222.

  The four lateral support pins 231b project upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231a, and are formed so as to be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b includes a truncated cone-shaped taper portion 231i on the upper end side, the diameter of which becomes smaller toward the upper end side (see FIG. 41). The lateral support pin 231b has the same distance from the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a to the middle of the tapered portion 231i as the length of the damper 222, and is formed longer than the damper 222 as a whole. The pair of front support pins 231c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222, and are formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d projects to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodation recess 231a. The receiving projection 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a rectangular outer periphery. The two receiving projections 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The receiving projection 231e has a front outer peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicularly to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and a rear outer peripheral wall sloping forward with respect to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. And has been extended. Further, the receiving projection 231e extends so that the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined such that the lower ends (tips) thereof are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the receiving projection 231e has a lower end inserted into the through hole 230a of the mounting base 231, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The front surface of the upper plate front decoration member 234 is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper plate post-decoration substrate 235 includes a plurality of decoration LEDs 235a for making the post-upper plate decoration member 236 emit light and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for making the linear light emitting lens member 237 emit light. .

  The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right than the upper plate post-decoration member 236. And a linear light emitting portion 237b in a flat plate shape which is continuous with and is fitted into the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light emitting lens member 237, the linear light emitting portion 237b is fitted into the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231, so that the front surface of the linear light emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside when the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving portion 237a, and guides the light received by the light receiving portion 237a to the linear light emitting portion 237b to guide the light from the linear light emitting portion 237b. The entire top can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper bowl ball removal button 239 is provided with a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable up and down, and includes an extension piece 239a extending below the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper plate ball removing button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removing unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 (pull out. )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. In addition, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two receiving protrusions 231e protruding downward of the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached, and the mounting base 230 in which the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. Accordingly, when a force (impact) such that the unit case 231 moves downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is stored. The bottom surface of the recess 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends, so that the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

  Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the tubular receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (the surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, part of the force transmitted from the receiving projection 231e to the tubular receiving portion 230c acts in the direction along the bottom surface of the attachment-side receiving portion 230a provided with the tubular receiving portion 230c. To do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the force from the projecting portion 231e (unit case 231) side from being dispersed, and to prevent a large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, making it difficult for the mounting base 230 to be damaged. .

[3-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 having an open upper side, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 mounted in the lower case 240 from the upper side, Inside the lower case 240, a pair of vibrating devices 242 arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241, and a pair of vibrating devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are attached to the lower case 240 while covering the upper side. Of the shallow box-shaped base member 243, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 which is inserted into the base member 243 from the upper side and is capable of displaying an image controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241. A frame-shaped ground metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate that covers the outer circumference, and a transparent touch panel that covers the ground metal fitting 245 and the upper surface of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 at the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 in an assembled state. A waterproof sheet-like waterproof seal 248 that extends over the entire left and right sides of the rear end surface of the case 240 and the like and is attached to the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243 and the upper cover 247 is provided. ing.

  The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 213a of the unit case 231, and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 213a. The lower case 240 has a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending left and right, a flat plate-shaped projecting portion 240b projecting in a trapezoidal shape from both left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and each projecting portion 240b having an outer diameter of the damper 222. And a pair of damper mounting recesses 240c that are vertically penetrated in the same inner shape and partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. And a vibrating device mounting part 240e to which the vibrating device 242 is mounted, which is disposed near the board mounting part 240a between the pair of damper mounting recesses 240c in the projecting part 240b.

  The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in a plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the side where the C shape is open. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided substantially at the upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

  The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with its center of gravity eccentric. The vibrating device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibrating drive motor 242a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a formed in a shallow box shape in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from the upper side, and extending parts 243b extending outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a. A screw hole 243c is formed at the lower end of the screw hole 243c, the screw hole 243c penetrating vertically at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip of the extending portion 243b, and the upper side having a large spot facing. And a tapered chamfered taper portion 243d (see FIG. 41), the diameter of which increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 can pass through the tip end side of the lateral support pin 231b of the unit case 231 rather than the taper portion 231i, and the base end side (lower side) of the taper portion 231i. It is formed so that it cannot pass through.

  The touch panel 246 includes a tempered glass that is resistant to shock and is hard to break, a transparent capacitive sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the tempered glass and the outer periphery of the sensor sheet. ing.

  In the touch unit 220B, the damper 222 can be attached by inserting the damper 222 from the C-shaped open side into the damper attachment recesses 240c provided in pairs on the left and right sides of the lower case 240. At this time, the flange portion 240d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c is inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222. As a result, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. When the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 contacts the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 moves below the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Project.

  In addition, in the touch unit 220B, the vibration driving motors 242a of the pair of vibration devices 242 are sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibrating devices 242 can independently generate vibration.

  Further, the touch unit 220B can visually recognize the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 from the upper side through the touch panel 246. Then, an image such as a button is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 like operating the button of the image.

  Further, the touch unit 220B has a water-proof seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged by the infiltration of the liquid.

[3-1d-3. Button unit]
As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the button unit 220C of the effect operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit body 250 attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g of the unit case 231 of the attachment base unit 220A, and a lower portion of the unit body 250. The effect button decoration substrate 251 arranged on the side and provided with LEDs on the upper surface, and the substrate cover 252 that covers the lower side of the effect button decoration substrate 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250 are provided.

  Further, the button unit 220C is arranged between the button base 253 and the unit body 250, and has a cylindrical button base 253 slidably inserted into the unit body 250 from the upper side to the upper side. A biasing spring member 254, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 upward, and a plurality of minute lights arranged above the light guide member 255. A sheet-shaped diffusing lens member 256 provided with a prism, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffusing lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and an upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251. And a production button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the lower end.

  The unit main body 250 includes three attachment pieces 250a extending outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-shaped shelf 250b extending inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. , And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf portion 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 includes a tubular lower tubular portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf portion 250b, an upper tubular portion 253b having a conical tubular shape whose diameter increases from the upper end of the lower tubular portion 253a upward. A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the tubular portion 253b and has a lower end that can penetrate the through hole 250c of the unit body 250 and that projects outward from the lower end and that can engage (contact) with the lower surface of the unit body 250. And a pair of engaging claw portions 253c, which are radially outwardly shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end from the outer peripheral surface of the upper tubular portion 253b, and the lower end of which can abut the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250. A plurality of flat plate-shaped contact pieces 253d and a detection piece 253e that extends outward from the outer peripheral surfaces of the lower cylinder portion 253a and the upper cylinder portion 253b in a flat plate shape and is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 are provided. There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The lower end of the spring member 254 is in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and the upper end is supported by the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253.

  The light guide member 255 extends from the lower surface of the disc-shaped main body portion 255a, which is fitted onto the upper tubular portion 253b of the button base 253, and the lower end of the lower tubular portion 253a of the button base 253, to the vicinity thereof. And a plurality of cylindrical light guides 255b. The plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and light from the LEDs can be guided and emitted from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

  In this button unit 220C, a button base 253, a light guide member 255, a diffusion lens member 256, and an upper plate effect button body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit body 250 together. it can. In these button bases 253 and the like, the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 projects upward from the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claw portions 253c of the button base 253 has the unit main body. By engaging with the lower surface of 250, the further upward movement is restricted, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the upper end.

  When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button press sensor 258, and The pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 contact the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250, and further lowering is restricted. The upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the lower end.

  In addition, the button unit 220C can make the upper plate effect button 257 emit light by making the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 emit light. The LEDs on the effect button decoration substrate 251 are full-color LEDs, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be illuminated and decorated in various colors.

[3-1d-4. Features of production operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 41, the effect operation unit 220 of the present embodiment, in an assembled state, has a lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper attachment recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B from the lower surface of the lower case 240. Since it also projects downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the tip surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom surface of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and move upward of the touch unit 220B with respect to the horizontal support pins 231b. Movement is restricted by a flat washer on the head of the screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231b and the tapered portion 243d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  In addition, in the effect operation unit 220, as shown in FIG. 42, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the side of the horizontal support pin 231b. It projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted in the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower surface A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240 and the case. A gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with its lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the left and right lateral support pins 231b.

  Further, the effect operation unit 220 is narrowed downward in the unit case 231 in which the touch unit 220B is attached from above in the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the attachment base 230 of the attachment base unit 220A which is narrowed downward. The lower end of the round pyramid-shaped receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. As a result, in a normal state, only the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the central side of the housing recess 231a) floating in the air.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, as shown in FIG. 31 and the like, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 is linear (along the rear side near the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B). It is exposed in a strip). The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting unit 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. The upper plate rear decorative member 236 is arranged on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, an upper plate ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the upper plate rear decorative member 236 in front view. Further, a button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to the game state that changes by hitting a game ball in the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 to entertain the player.

  As an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, an image simulating an operation button is displayed, and the detection of a touch by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 can be accepted, so that the image of the image can be displayed to the player. The operation buttons can be operated, and the effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of presentation using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 in a state of being floated from the unit case 231, the touch unit 220B can be operated by operating the vibrating device 242 according to the gaming state. Can be vibrated. When the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 at the time of presentation using the touch panel 246, the vibration of the vibrating device 242 is applied to the finger or hand of the player in contact with the touch panel 246. By transmitting it, it is possible to make the player feel as if he / she is operating an actual operation button despite operating the operation button of the image, and to be surprised. It is possible to prevent the player from entertaining and deteriorating the interest.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit 220 is provided with the button unit 220C on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front, the player is made to press the upper plate production button 257 in accordance with the game state, and the upper plate production button 257 of You can entertain the operation. More specifically, since the image operation buttons on the touch panel 246 only touch the touch panel 246, they may lack a sense of operation compared to the actual operation buttons, but the upper plate effect button 257 should be actually pressed. Therefore, it is possible to comfortably entertain the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 without giving an uncomfortable feeling to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. .

  Since this effect operation unit 220 is arranged at the portion where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 that is bulging forward, the game is performed even during the time of effect using the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of floating from the lower unit case 231, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 is increased. The force can absorb the impact to some extent. More specifically, when the touch unit 220B is hit or the like and a shock (load) is applied from above, the left and right lateral support pins 231b are transmitted to the inserted damper 222, and the touch unit 220B descends while the damper 222 is descending. Is compressed. The damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b is compressed, so that the shock from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  When the touch unit 220B further descends due to the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 contacts the upper end of the damper 222 into which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B descends. The damper 222 being compressed is compressed downward. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed not only by the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b but also by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c.

  When the touch unit 220B further descends due to the impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces on the left and right sides of the housing recess 231a in the unit case 231 and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B descends, the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a of the unit case 231 is bent by the load from the central support protrusion 231d so that the center moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. By bending the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a, the pair of receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a descend. When the receiving projection 231e further descends due to the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e contacts the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B ejects. The shock is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c are formed in a pyramid shape that narrows downward, respectively, from the receiving protrusion 231e to the tubular receiving portion 230c (mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is distributed and transmitted in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the structure that absorbs the shock applied to the touch unit 220B is transmitted to the mounting base 230 in multiple layers, the shock applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230 and the like are less likely to be damaged by the impact.

  Further, the effect operation unit 220, the linear light emitting portion of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral edge LED 235b of the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 according to the game state. The upper end of 237b can be made to emit light linearly. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, and the like are enjoyed, and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, depending on the game state, the decoration LED 235a of the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 causes the upper plate rear decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (the rear side of the linear light emitting portion 237b) to emit light. be able to. By illuminating and decorating the decorative member 236 after the upper plate, like the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237, the player's interest is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the plate unit cover 260, which will be described later. And a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Accordingly, in the upper plate 201, even if the water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). It is possible to prevent dew condensation water from entering the touch unit 220B, and prevent troubles in the touch unit 220B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, since the upper plate post-decoration substrate 235 for light-emitting decoration of the upper plate post-decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Since the upper plate 201 is not exposed to water droplets that have condensed, it is possible to prevent a defect such as a short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235.

[3-1e. Plate unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 27 to 30, the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 extends in the left-right direction, has a center in the left-right direction bulge forward, and is formed in a shell shape opened rearward. . The plate unit cover 260 has a lower plate opening 261 that is open to the front substantially at the center of the left and right and has a rear end closed by the plate unit base 210, and the top plate side (upper side) of the inner peripheral wall of the lower plate opening 261. Which is formed on the left side of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 that covers the upper plate body 212 and the lower side of the effect operation unit 220 and the lower plate opening 261 when viewed from the front, and the bass sound of the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4. A speaker grill 263 for transmitting sound from the speaker, a plate unit left decorative member 264 disposed above the speaker grill 263 and decorated with light by the plate unit left decorative substrate 345, and arranged on the right side of the lower plate opening 261 in front view. By forming the handle port 265 through which the rear part of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes and the bottom surface of the dish unit cover 260, A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  The lower plate opening 261 is closed by the lower plate body 214 on the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall. The speaker grill 263 and the dish unit left decoration member 264 are made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are provided in a metal plate.

  The dish unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, whereas it has a rugged surface on the right side. In addition, the right side of the front view has translucency almost entirely.

  The dish unit cover 260 is formed in a state in which it can be grasped by one hand between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262 when assembled in the dish unit 200. Accordingly, when the player touches the touch unit 220B, by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, it is possible to stabilize the finger (hand or arm) to be touched, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B. Can be done easily.

  More specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the front end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower cover portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the rear end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the upper plate lower cover portion 262 are reduced. The thickness between the lower surface and the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the front-rear distance from the front end of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 to the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. This allows the player's hand to grip between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262.

[3-1f. Right lower door production unit]
The lower right door production unit 270 of the dish unit 200 is arranged on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the production operation unit 200, as shown in FIGS. 43 to 50, and rotates according to the game state. It is provided with a spherical door lower right rotating body 270A for light emission decoration. The lower right door effect unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 and a unit base 271 that is attached so as to close the escape port 210g on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the lower right door rotator 270A. A door lower right drive motor 272, a drive gear 273 fixed to a rotation shaft of the door lower right drive motor 272, a driven gear 274 engaged with the drive gear 273 and attached to the door lower right rotation body 270A, and a driven gear. And a shaft member 275 attached to the unit base 271 for rotatably supporting the gear 274.

  Further, the lower door right effect unit 270 is attached to the opposite side of the lower right door rotator 270A from the driven gear 274, and the rotor side bearing member 276 rotatably supported by the unit base 271 and the lower right door. A base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the rotator 270A on the side opposite to the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the door lower right rotator 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting a position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the front view left side of the lower right door 270A of the door, and a rear member attached to the front side of the unit base 271. A door lower right base decorative substrate 280 having a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, A detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decorative substrate 280, and a door lower right relay substrate 281 that relays the connection between a door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 described later and a peripheral control substrate (not shown). .

  The lower right door rotary body 270A constitutes an outer shell, and is arranged between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which has a hemispherical shell shape, and between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. And a rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are respectively formed with semicircular cutouts 285a and 286a around the rotation axis. The front outer shell member 285 is a translucent hemispherical shell-shaped surface, and has a belt-like decoration 285b that has a metallic luster and extends in a belt-like shape in the circumferential direction, and a heart shape that is arranged in the center of the belt-like decoration 285b. Heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 includes a band decoration 286b which has a metallic luster and extends in a band shape in the circumferential direction on a translucent hemispherical shell-shaped surface. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are formed so as to be connected.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the rotating body internal unit 290 is a disk-shaped lower door right rotating body decoration substrate 291 provided with a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and a center of the lower door right rotating body decoration substrate 291. The first fixed shaft member 292 and the cylindrical first fixed shaft member 292, which are attached to the right lower rotary body decoration substrate 291 and extend vertically to the surface of the door lower right rotary body decoration substrate 291 and whose front end is attached to the shaft member 275. A cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the lower right door rotating body decoration substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the lower right door rotating body decoration substrate 291 and has its tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. Second fixed shaft member 293 of FIG. Although illustration is omitted, inside the second fixed shaft member 293, a wiring cord for connecting the lower right door relay board 281 and the lower right door rotary body decoration board 291 is inserted.

  Further, the rotary body internal unit 290 is disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotary body decoration substrate 291 and is attached to the insides of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. The first reflector 295, which is attached to the reflector base 294 and has an annular shape and opens outward in the axial direction, and is attached to the reflector base 294 through the inside of the ring of the first reflector 295, and has a hexagonal shape at the center. And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on their surfaces, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of radially extending flat plate-shaped ribs.

  In this rotary body internal unit 290, a door lower right rotary body decoration substrate 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296 are provided. Separated from each other for relative rotation.

  The unit base 271 is a flat plate-shaped member that is located in the rear of the lower right door 270A and has an annular ring portion 271a. Of the first projecting piece 271b, the second projecting piece 271c projecting forward in a flat plate shape from a portion of the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first projecting piece 271b, and the second projecting piece 271c. And a bearing groove 271d into which a U-shaped recess is formed rearward from the front end and into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first projecting piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft penetrates. The driven gear 274 has a larger diameter than the driving gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a that is mounted on the front end of the first protruding piece 271b, and a tubular shaft portion 275b that cylindrically projects from the mounting portion 275a. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the tubular shaft portion 275b, and can non-rotatably support the tip of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner periphery of the tubular shaft portion 275b.

  The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second projecting piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second projecting piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are symmetrically attached to the second protruding piece 271c with the rotation axis of the lower right door 270A in between. The two rotation detection sensors 275 include a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c of the lower right door 270A faces forward (see FIG. 50 (a)) and a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c faces rear (FIG. 50 (b)). And) can be detected respectively.

  The lower right door effect unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the lower right door rotating body 270A by the lower right door driving motor 272 according to the game state, and stops so that the heart decoration 285c faces forward. Whether or not a chance is coming can be suggested to the player depending on whether or not the player is entertained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the lower right door production unit 270, since the lower right door rotating body decoration substrate 291 inside the lower right door rotating body 270A is non-rotatably attached, the right door rotating body 270A is rotated while the lower right door rotating body 270A is rotating. When the lower rotating body decoration substrate 291 (the LED thereof) is caused to emit light, the position of the light emitted from the lower door right rotating body decoration substrate 291 moves as the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates, and at the same time, the first reflector 295 and the first reflector 295 Since the direction of the light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, even if the LED of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 does not blink, the door lower right rotating body 270A emits light as if the light was blinking. By irradiating light of various colors from the LED, the lower right door 270A of the door can be illuminated and decorated in a rainbow color, which can entertain the player.

[3-1 g. Performance unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the rendering unit cover 300 of the dish unit 200 includes a hemispherical transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical lower door right rotating body 270A of the lower right door producing unit 270. The decorative portion 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side of the plate unit cover 260 in front view, and the lower right portion of the rotating body cover portion 301, which penetrates in the front-rear direction, is locked by the locking unit 700. And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The effect unit cover 300 is in the shape of a container with the rear open, and has translucency. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotary body cover section 301 is light-emitted and decorated by the lower right door base decorative board 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotary body cover section 301 is a dish unit right decorative board 346. Decorated with light.

[3-1h. Upper plate ball removing unit]
As shown in FIG. 51 to FIG. 53, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an opening 311a through which the extending piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through hole 210e of the dish unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 attached to a position that is located at the upper left of the front view, a pressure transmission member 313 rotatably supported by the front base member 312 and rotated by pressing the upper bowl ball removing button 239, and a pressure transmission member. And a first spring member 314 for urging the upper plate ball removing button 239 in the upward direction.

  Further, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish ball feed opening 210d of the dish unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member. 315 and the dish unit base 210, and is mounted by the rear base member 315 so as to be able to move up and down, and the upper dish ball removing slider 316 in contact with the pressing transmission member 313 from the upper side, and the upper dish ball removing And a second spring member 317 that biases the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, and has a flat plate-shaped base portion 312a attached to the cover 311, and a pair of extension portions extending in a flat plate shape from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. The projecting piece 312b, a shaft supporting part 312c recessed rearward from the front end of the extending part 312b, and a front end of the base part 312a are provided near the lower end of the front part of the first spring member 314. And a hook-shaped spring locking portion (not shown).

  The pressing force transmitting member 313 has a horizontally elongated cylindrical shaft portion 313a whose both ends are rotatably inserted into the pair of shaft supporting portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rearward extending plate-shaped rearward extending from the shaft portion 313a. An upward extending piece 313c that extends upward from the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface of the extending piece 313b and the rearward extending piece 313b in a flat plate shape so that the lower end of the extending piece 239c of the upper dish ball pulling button 239 can abut. A downwardly extending piece 313d extending downward from the right end in front view on the lower surface of the rearwardly extending piece 313b, and a first spring protruding downward from below the left end in front view in the shaft portion 313a. And a hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downward extension piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it extends rearward, and the lower end thereof is capable of contacting the upper dish ball removing slider 316.

  The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the dish unit base 210 and is provided with a base portion 315a attached to the dish unit base 210 and the front plate of the base portion 315a so as to be laterally separated from each other. The slider support portion 315b slidably supporting the left and right ends of the ball removing slider 316, and the front end is opened at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper dish ball feed port 210d of the dish unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a. It is provided with an upper entrance 315c which opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and through which game balls can flow.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 extends to the rear side of the base portion 315a continuously with the upper inlet 315c, is downwardly opened, is opened rearward, and has a lower end curved rearward, and a first guide path 315d. An L-shaped second guide path 315e that extends downward from the lower side of the first guide path 315d, then extends leftward in front view, has its left end open to the left, and is open rearward as a whole; A plate-shaped passage cover 315f that closes the rear end side of the leftward extending portion of the guide passage 315e and the base portion 315a in the front and rear direction so that two sides are surrounded by the L-shaped second guide passage 315e. An opening 315g penetrating therethrough and a spring locking portion 315h protruding forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and to which the upper end of the second spring member 317 is locked are provided.

  The L-shaped second guide path 315e of the rear base member 315 is inclined such that the portion extending leftward becomes lower as it goes leftward. As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into the notch 210j of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c of the plate unit base 210, and is connected to the second guide path 315e. The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

  The upper dish ball removing slider 316 is a flat plate-shaped slider base 316a whose left and right ends are slidably supported by the slider supporting portions 315b of the rear base member 315, and a plate from the left side to the front side in the front view at the upper end of the slider base 316a. The transmission piece 316b, which extends to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and is in contact with the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d of the pressing transmission member 313, and the slider below the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmission portion 316c that projects rearward from the rear side of the base 316a and a hook-shaped spring member that projects from the front surface of the slider base 316a and locks the lower end of the second spring member 317. And a stop 316d.

  In the upper dish ball removing unit 310, the upper inlet 315c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a of the upper plate body 212 in the front view when the dish unit 200 is assembled. Thereby, the game ball in the upper plate 201 can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 540 from the upper entrance 315c via the first guiding part 315d on the rear side of the base part 315a.

  In addition, when the upper dish ball pulling button 239 is pressed downward, the upper dish ball punching unit 310 causes the pressing transmission member 313 to resist the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extending piece 239 a of the upper dish ball punching button 239. Then, the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d rotates about the shaft portion 313a in a direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the pressure transmitting member 313, the upper dish ball is removed by the transmitting piece 316b of the upper dish ball removing slider 316 with which the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d is in contact. The slider 316 slides downward against the biasing force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper bowl ball removing slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmitting section 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feeding unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feeding unit 540, and the first guide path. The 315d side is in communication with the second taxiway 315e side. Thereby, the game ball in the upper plate 201 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper entrance 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feed unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  It should be noted that when the downward pressing of the upper plate ball removing button 239 is released, the upper plate ball removing slider 316 and the upper plate ball removing button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317. You can return to the original state.

[3-1i. Lower plate ball removing unit]
As shown in FIG. 54 and the like, the lower dish ball removing unit 320 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower dish body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the dish unit cover 260, and is a ball of the lower dish body 214. A flat plate-shaped lower dish ball removing base 321 having an opening 321a that coincides with the hole 214a, and a flat plate-like slide lid 322 capable of sliding left and right on the lower dish ball removing base 321 to close the opening 321a. A knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front surface of the dish unit cover 260; A member 324, and a holding device 325 that holds the slide lid 322 at a position where the opening 321a is opened against the biasing force of the spring member 324, It is provided.

  The opening 321a of the lower dish ball removing base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right side from the center in the left and right as viewed from the front. By attaching the lower dish ball removing base 321 to the lower dish body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported from side to side between the lower dish ball removing base 321 and the lower dish body 212. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322a held by a holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

  The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower dish ball removing base 321, and a pair of holding claws 325b that can open and close from the main body 325a and can hold the holding protrusion 322a. When the holding device 325 inserts the holding protrusion 322a between the pair of open holding claws 325a and presses the holding protrusion 322a toward the main body 325a side, the pair of holding claws 325b closes and holds the holding protrusion 322a, and also the pair of holding The claw 325b is maintained in the closed state. In this state, when the holding protrusion 322a is moved to the main body 325a side, the pair of holding claws 325a is opened and the holding protrusion 322a is released.

  In the lower dish ball removing unit 320, the slide lid 322 is provided between the opening 321a and the ball removing hole 214a of the lower dish main body 214 when the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right when viewed from the front. The game ball in the lower plate 202 is located in the lower plate 202, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be stored in the lower plate 202 without coming out downward from the ball hole 214a.

  From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower plate 202 comes out through the ball removing hole 214a and the opening 321a to the lower side of the plate unit 200, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be removed. At this time, since the holding projections 322a of the slide lid 322 are held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game ball inside.

  To close the slide lid 322, the knob 323 is slightly operated to the left to open the pair of holding claws 325b to release the holding projection 322a, and the slide lid 322 slides to the right by the biasing force of the spring member 324. Then, the ball hole 214a is closed. In this way, by operating the knob portion 323 of the lower plate ball removing unit 320, it is possible to store the game balls in the lower plate 202 or remove the game balls stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-1j. Ball rental operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 29, FIG. 30, etc., the ball lending operation unit 330 of the dish unit 200 has a translucent unit case 331 attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit 220 near the right end in front view, and a unit. A ball lending button 332 that is exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and that can be operated by the player, and a return button 333 that is exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the ball lending button 332 and that can be operated by the player. A display section 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the return button 333 is provided.

  This ball lending operation unit 330, when the cash or prepaid card is inserted into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the ball lending button 332 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the dish unit. It is possible to lend (pay out) to the upper plate 201 of 200, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the balance of the cash inserted and the prepaid card are returned after subtracting the remaining amount of the loan. Further, the display unit 334 displays cash or the remaining number of prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine, an error code when the ball lending machine fails, or the like.

[3-1k. Upper plate top decorative material]
As shown in FIG. 29, FIG. 30, etc., the upper plate top decoration member 340 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the upper left and right center of the upper end of the plate unit base 210 and has a translucent upper plate top lens extending in the left and right bands. 340a, and an upper plate top decorative substrate 340b mounted on the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface.

  The upper plate top decoration member 340 can cause the upper plate top lens 340a to emit light in a band shape by causing the LEDs of the upper plate top decoration substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper plate top decoration member 340 is arranged on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper plate top decoration member is the same as the light emitting decoration such as the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237. By illuminating and decorating 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. be able to.

[3-1l. Characteristic effect of dish unit]
The dish unit 200 of the present embodiment is a touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having the upper dish 201 that stores the game balls on the lower side of the game region 5a, and a game ball in the game region 5a. When an image is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 according to a game state that changes by hitting, a strip shape is formed along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 near the game area 5a. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper plate rear decoration member 236, the upper plate top decoration member 340, and the like can be made to emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (field of view) The light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like entering from the outside of the player can be noticed, and the player's line of sight (interest) can be attracted to the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like, that is, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 side. Can. Therefore, in the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is caused to emit light when an effect such as an image is presented according to the game state, so that the player can use the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to make the presentation of the presentation noticeable, and to make it possible to entertain the presentation by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plate unit 200 is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image in accordance with the game state, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed, it is arranged outside the game area 5a. Since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is displayed indicates the arrival of a chance, the player plays the game in the game area 5a and the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. Both can be cared for. Therefore, by paying attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244), a tight game with a sense of speed can be enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from moving to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 by causing the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like to emit light when displaying an image that suggests the arrival of a chance on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to make the player pay attention, and to surely recognize the arrival of the opportunity to entertain the player. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a may cause the player to be unable to concentrate on either side, which may reduce the interest. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light according to the arrival, it is possible to concentrate in the game area 5a until the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, and entertain the game in the game area 5a. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 when the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, and it is possible to keep the game clear and to prevent getting bored.

  Further, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the plate unit 200 that bulges toward the player side below the game area 5a, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is arranged at a position closer to the player. Become. This makes it easier for the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1 to hide the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, making it difficult for the player to be able to see the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 next to or behind it. The effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unpleasant and deteriorating by being watched by another player, and at the same time, the upper plate liquid crystal display device can be reduced. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light when the effect is displayed by 244, it is possible to make it difficult to overlook the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and entertain the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous as compared with the case of emitting light in a dot shape, and thus the player Even if the consciousness of the above is concentrated in the game area 5a, it is possible to make the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like notice easily, and entertaining the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246, and the like. It is possible to suppress the decrease. Further, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a band shape, a light emission mode different from that of other light-emission decoration bodies and the like can be obtained, and it is possible to reduce erroneous recognition as light-emission of the light-emission decoration body and the like. The light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be surely noticed.

  Further, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at a position on the rear side near the game area 5a on the outer peripheral edge of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, The light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like can be easily made visible to the player, and the light emission from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like can be noticed to entertain the effect of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

  Further, the operation unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 or the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 or the like, and the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is set within the game area 5a. Since the player turns his or her line of sight to check the amount of game balls to be inserted at a certain frequency, when the line of sight is directed to the upper plate 201, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc. It is easy to enter the field of view, and it becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. In addition, since the player turns his or her line of sight to the upper plate 201 with a certain frequency, it is easy to direct the line of sight from within the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244). Therefore, when the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, it is possible to immediately shift the line of sight to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and entertaining the effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, thereby deteriorating the interest. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when the production operation unit 200 is arranged below the game area 5a and the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like is radiated to the player from below, when arranged above the game area 5a. Comparing with the above, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see and to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 etc. It is possible to entertain the effect by the operation unit 200 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect operation unit 200 (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) is arranged at a position corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, the center of the player's line of sight is located at any position in the game area 5a. However, the light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the player can be surely focused on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the effect operation unit 200 can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect operation unit 200 is provided with the touch panel 246, in addition to the effect by the image, the effect of allowing the player to operate the touch panel 246 can be performed, and the player can be entertained with various effects. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to participate in the effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from actively entertaining the effect and deteriorating the interest.

  Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (the linear light emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B moves the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). Along with the guide passage portion 212a for feeding, an upper dish ball removing button 239 for operating the upper dish ball removing unit 310 is arranged between the guide passage portion 212a and the guide passage portion 212a. That is, the linear light emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of the place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, and the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B to produce an effect by the touch unit 220B (an effect image by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a touch panel 246). It is possible to make it easier to notice the timing of touch operation, etc.).

  Further, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the upper surface of the lower plate lower cover portion 262 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231. Since it is arranged at a higher position and a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B, by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201, the upper plate body 212 and the surface of the game ball are exposed. Even if the condensed water (water droplets) flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and thus the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems in.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, since the upper plate post-decoration substrate 235 for light-emitting decoration of the upper plate post-decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Since the upper plate 201 is not exposed to water droplets that have condensed, it is possible to prevent a defect such as a short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200, when the vibrating device 242 vibrates the touch unit 220B including the touch panel 246 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality (two) of touch units 220B are provided. Since the damper 222 is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A in a floating state, the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibrating device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and is transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. This means that the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Accordingly, when the touch device 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242 when the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, only the touch unit 220B is vibrated, and thus the touch panel of the touch unit 220B is presented to the player. The operation feeling of 246 can be sufficiently given, and it is possible to prevent the player from delighting the touch operation of the touch panel 246 and deteriorating the interest.

  Moreover, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibrating device 242, in addition to the operation feeling of the touch panel 246, the player can be surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B or suggest the timing of operating the touch panel 246. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entertainment from being deteriorated by delighting the operation effect on the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 from the lower side, even if the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pressed from the upper side and a shock or a load is applied to the touch unit 220B, the damper 222 is used. Since it is possible to absorb the impact and the like, it is possible to reduce damage to the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A, and the like due to the impact and the like, and the game is interrupted due to the damage of the touch unit 220B and the like. Thus, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being lowered.

  Further, since the touch panel 246 is used as the operation unit of the touch unit 220B, the touch panel 246 is touched for a longer time when the player operates the button than when pressing the button. When the vibration unit 242 vibrates the touch unit 220B when touching the 246, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, the player's finger can vibrate to make the player feel that he or she is operating the touch panel 246, so that a sufficient operation feeling can be given and the player can enjoy the operation of the touch panel 246. It is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing.

  In addition, by changing the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it becomes possible to cope with various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and the interest of the player from decreasing due to various effects. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is provided with the touch panel 246, as compared with the conventional push button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and touch. Various operations such as hold can be performed. As a result, more various operation effects can be performed, and it is possible to suppress entertaining the player and deteriorating the interest.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as not to move upward and to move downward, and the elastic force (biasing force) of the plurality of dampers 222 causes the touch unit 220B. Is pressed against the upper moving end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and the touch panel 246 can be easily operated accurately. Further, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it is possible to make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B, which is thought not to move, is vibrated according to the game state. By vibrating by the device 242, the player can be surprised, and it is possible to suppress the entertaining and deteriorating the interest of the player.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the plurality of vibrating devices 242 separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibrating device 242 at a position close to the part operated by the player on the touch panel 246, the vibrating device is strong. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is informed of the wrong operation. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to perform a correct operation, and it is possible to prevent the operation effect using the touch panel 246 from being enjoyed and prevent the interest from being lowered.

  In addition, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon is generated at an arbitrary position on the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of vibration of each vibration device 242. You can Therefore, by controlling the respective vibrating devices 242 so that the resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further operation feeling or to greatly surprise the player. It is possible to suppress the entertaining of the player and the decrease in interest.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pressed from above and a shock or load is applied to the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the damper 222 and the bending of the touch unit 220B can absorb (attenuate) an impact or the like from the upper side to some extent and transmit the impact to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220B side through the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. It can be widely dispersed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e protruding downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c in which the receiving projection 231e is inserted on the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230. Since the gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall and the inner peripheral wall, the receiving projection 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other after the unit case 231 is bent downward due to the impact or load from the touch unit 220B. The shock or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the shock or the like is further attenuated by the bending of the unit case 231 and is transmitted to the mounting base 230. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving projection 231e and the tubular receiving portion 230c contact each other, the receiving projection 231e (unit case 231) is transmitted in an oblique direction to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the impact and load from the side of the mounting base 230 are perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface As a result, the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward direction) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend becomes smaller and is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pressed from above, the shock and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B and It is possible to prevent the mounting base unit 220A from being damaged.

[3-2. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. 55A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 57 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown, the foul cover unit 520 of the present embodiment is attached to the front side of the unit main body 522 and a shallow box-shaped unit main body 522 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and whose front side is open. And a plate-shaped lid member 524. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates in the front-rear direction in the upper left corner of the front view, and connects the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full-ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 with the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. A passage 526, and a full-bulb ball receiving opening 528 that is open to the rear on the right side of the through-bulb passage 526 when viewed from the front and is capable of communicating with the full-tank guiding passage 862 of the lower full-bulb ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; Is equipped with.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full tank receiving port 528 when viewed from the front side. A foul ball receiving port 530 for receiving a game ball (foul ball), and a game ball received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530, which are open toward the front in the lower right corner of the front view, are released. A ball discharge port 532 that communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit 200 is also provided.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is formed between the full ball receiving port 528, the foul ball receiving port 530, and the ball discharging port 532 by the unit main body 522 and the lid member 524, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 533 having a possible width; a flat plate-shaped movable piece 534 which constitutes a part of an inner wall of the storage passage 533 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 522; A full tank detection sensor 535 that detects rotation of the piece 534 in a direction away from the storage passage 533, and a spring 536 that urges the movable piece 534 toward the center of the storage passage 533 are provided.

  In the foul cover unit 520, if the lower bowl 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game balls and the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 532 to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 520 is stored in the storage passage 533 to some extent. The number of game balls can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the movable piece 534 is rotated so that the upper end of the movable piece 534 moves in the direction away from the storage passage 533 due to the weight of the game balls. The rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full of game balls, and when a full tank detection sensor 535 detects a full tank, further payout of game balls is stopped, and This can be notified to the player or a person in charge at the game hall to urge the lower plate 202 to be filled.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 522 and below the through-ball passage 526, and the guide passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank ball passage unit 860 in the payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening / closing contact portion 537 is provided with which the operating protrusion 863e of 863 can contact (see FIG. 80). The door open / close contact portion 537 is inclined so that the rear surface moves downward as it goes downward. The door opening / closing abutting portion 537 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 863e of the guideway door member 863 comes into contact with the main body frame 4. When the actuating protrusion 863e of the guideway opening / closing part 863 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact part 537, the guideway door member 863 rotates and the downstream ends of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 (front opening). ) Can be opened.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61. 58 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600, a part of which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are also provided. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, to which the lower side hinge members 150 are respectively rotatably attached, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view are provided. .

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a right side surface of the main body frame base when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main frame base 600 are attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side in front view. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out game balls to the player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a main body which is openably and closably attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600 is provided.

[4-1. Body frame base]
The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, as shown in FIGS. 58 to 61. This main body frame base 600 penetrates in the front and rear in a range of a height of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game. A game board placing portion 602 which forms the lower side of the board insertion opening 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and the left and right ends of the lower end of the game board 5 which project upward from the center of the game board placing portion 602 in the left-right direction. And a game board regulation unit 603 that regulates the backward movement.

  In addition, the main body frame 4 is a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting a ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view, and a front and rear side in front view of the launching device mounting portion 604. Cylinder insertion opening 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and the bass speaker of the board unit 900 that penetrates from the center in the front and left of the game board mounting portion 602 to the left and lower side to the front and back. And a circular opening 607 for a speaker, which penetrates forward and backward on the lower left side in a front view of the game board mounting portion 602 and which faces the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 forward. And are equipped with.

  Further, the main body frame 4 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 601 in front view, the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface thereof, and the back cover 980 is rotatably attached to the rear end thereof. The rear extension 608 is provided. Further, the main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions at the left end in front view on the rear surface, and has an upper hinge attachment portion 609 and a lower hinge for attaching the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. A mounting portion 610 is provided.

  In addition, the main body frame 4 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly lower on the left side of the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in a front view, A game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 601 is provided.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member and body frame lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

  The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The main frame upper hinge pin 622 pivotally supported by the cage outer frame upper hinge member 60, and the upper hinge main body 621 penetrates on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 in a front view, and pivotally supports the door frame upper hinge member 140. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame for. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame 4 at a portion of the upper hinge body 621 that is bent downward.

  The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates up and down at a front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and a lower hinge first main body 641 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. An outer frame lower hinge hole (not shown) pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a flat plate that is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641 and extends horizontally. -Shaped plate material is bent upward in an L-shape so as to pass vertically through the lower hinge second main body 643 and the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643. The door frame lower hinge hole 644 for pivotally supporting the door frame and the lower hinge second main body 643 in the horizontally extending portion extend upward from the left end rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 644. And a restriction piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of No. 3, .

  In the lower hinge second main body 643, a horizontally extended portion is spaced above the horizontally extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 by a certain distance, and a portion bent upward is a lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the portion of the main body 641 that is bent upward. The main body side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the main body frame 4 at a portion where the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 are bent upward.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, in the reinforcing frame 660, on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end, the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 is restricted from moving forward and downward. A pair of left positioning members 661 are attached vertically separated from each other.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600, and the inside of the main body frame 4 (game board 5) is passed from the left side between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58, 60 and 61. The ball launching device 680 is a device for driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In the ball launching device 680, the driving strength of the game ball changes according to the turning angle of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is attached to the launching device mounting portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a flat plate-shaped launching base 681. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a batting mallet 683 having a base end attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and a diagonally upward leftward extension from the vicinity of the tip of the batting mallet 683. It is equipped with a launch rail 684 which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and on which a game ball can roll.

  In this ball launching device 680, game balls are supplied from the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the game balls are supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. Then, when the handle lever 504 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting mallet 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 683 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  In addition, when the hit game ball does not reach within the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball or the like, between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). From the above, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 530 of the foul cover unit 520 below, passes through the foul cover unit 520, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4, and can lock the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rearward extending portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 700 projecting forward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. Door frame hooks 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a columnar projecting forward from the lower part of the unit base 701 to the front side. A key cylinder 710 that unlocks the lock of either the door frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703 depending on the direction of rotation of the inserted unlocking key.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73. 62 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. Further, FIG. 66 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the dispensing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 66 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. 68A is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68B is a perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the rear. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 71 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 71 (b) is a sectional view taken along line EE in (a). Further, FIG. 72 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is closed by the ball removing movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 72 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is opened by the ball removing movable piece. Is. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the portion of the payout blade in the payout device.

  Further, FIG. 74 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 74 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 75 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 75 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 76 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 76 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the front, and FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 79 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state where the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower tank ball path unit, and FIG. 79 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the taxiway opening / closing door is opened. .. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing a taxiway opening / closing door of an embodiment different from those of FIGS. 76 to 80. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIG. 62, FIG. 63, etc., the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to an upper portion of the payout unit base 801 and an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. It is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, which stores game balls supplied from the island facility of a game hall (not shown) that extends to the left and right and is opened upward. It is provided with a tank rail 803 that extends left and right to guide the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, while guiding the game balls to the left, they are aligned in two rows in the front and rear by the ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 82) hanging swingably from above.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the upper left side in the front view of the payout unit base 801, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and pays out the game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board housed in the payout control board box 950. , Are provided. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, the game balls are distributed in two rows, and from the payout device 830, the game balls are paid out one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801, guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and plays the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank ball route unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. The normal guiding path 861 that guides the game ball forward to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 from the front end, and guides the game ball discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e to the front side of the door frame 3 The front end openings of the full tank guide path 862 and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 guided to the full tank receiving port 530 are formed in the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has an open rear side, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821, and has a front side open. 821 and the rear case 822, which are mounted between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 to partition the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and a partition plate 823 that penetrates through the partition plate 823 to form front and rear ends in the front case 821 and the rear race 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear 826 that are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are respectively arranged in the front case and the rear case. A ball breakage detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational positions of the pair of movable piece member fronts 825 and the pair of movable piece member rears 826 is provided.

  The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that allows the game balls to pass through in the upper portion of the right side surface, and a ball guide outlet that allows the game balls to pass through at a position to the right of the left-right center of the bottom surface. 821b, a ball guide inlet 821a and a ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c extends obliquely from the ball guide inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height from the guide portion 821d along the left side of the front case 821. It is composed of a detection portion 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 821f that extends in a meandering shape from the detection portion 821d to the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a cutout portion 821g on the wall on the right side in front view of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guide inlet 822a that is open to allow the game balls to pass through in the upper portion of the right side surface, and a ball guide exit that is open to allow the game balls to pass at a position to the right of the center of the bottom surface in the horizontal direction. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 822c extends obliquely from the ball guide inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of the height from the guide portion 822d along the left side of the rear case 822. It is composed of a detection portion 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822f that extends in a meandering shape from the detection portion 822d to the left and right widths of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a cutout portion 822g on the wall on the right side in front view of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. When the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the rear case 822 is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c coincide with each other. There is.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the cutouts 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 has a vertically extending flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a, a shaft hole 825b which penetrates the front and rear at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 825a. An extending portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, connecting the extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a, and extending in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. The connecting portion 825d, the weight attaching portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through hole that penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 825c. It extends outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and extends outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and the detection piece 825f that can be detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. Then, the movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is projected into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is The outer wall of the guide passage 821c (detection unit 821e) is in contact with the outer wall. The stopper piece 825g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, so that the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in front view), the movable piece member front 825 causes the left side surface of the movable piece 825a to move toward the guide passage 821c. It matches the inside. In this state, the detection piece 825f at the front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 becomes non-detection.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a vertically movable flat plate-shaped movable piece 826a, a shaft hole 826b which penetrates in the front and rear at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a, and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a. An extending portion 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, connecting the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a, and extending in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. The connecting portion 826d, the weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and has a through hole that penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 826c. A flat plate extends outward from the right end, and a detection piece 826f that can be detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 and a flat plate outward from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is located immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, when the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a projects into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g is removed. The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 822c (detection unit 822e). The stopper piece 826g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, so that the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction projecting into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction in front view), the movable piece member front 826 causes the left side surface of the movable piece 826a to move to the guide passage 822c. It matches the inside. In this state, the detection piece 826f in front of the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 becomes non-detection.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied in a state in which a plurality of game balls are lined up in a row by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are arranged in a state where the game balls are lined up in a row. By 822, it is possible to guide the dispensing device 830 below in a two-row state (see FIG. 82). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and flow well. You can

  Further, when the game sphere flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guiding unit 820, the game sphere comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are formed. The front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are not detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and it is understood that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 820 pays out the game balls or the like, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c will flow downstream. When the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introducing portions 821d and 822d becomes strong, and the game ball flowing through the introducing portions 821d and 822d is a movable piece above the detecting portions 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game balls, the vibration sandwiches or intrudes between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the cutouts 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust, dirt, and the like, and the movable pieces 825 and 826a can satisfactorily rotate due to their own weight or the like.

  Further, the ball guiding unit 820 is configured to detect the game balls circulating in the respective guiding passages 821c and 822c by the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member front 825. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the one piece member rear 826 is detected by the one ball cut detection sensor 827, when the game sphere in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c disappears, the movable piece member front 825 Or, the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member rear 826 rotate so as to project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. .. Therefore, it is possible to detect the running out of the game ball early, so that the game ball can be quickly replenished, and the time when the game is interrupted is shortened as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, by screwing and attaching metal screws as weights to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the weights of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight are reduced. With the above, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the directions projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached outside the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower ends thereof project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust inside the guide passages 821c and 822c is reduced. No dust or the like adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dust, and the like do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a, and the walls, so that their own weight, etc. With this, it is possible to satisfactorily rotate, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem such that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  In this way, in the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, in the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the lower end side of which is projected into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow due to its own weight. By attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface contacting the game ball, the movable piece 825a is moved by the weight of the weight and the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826. , 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached outside the guide passage 822c so that the lower ends thereof project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dust inside the guide passages 821c and 822c are not formed. Does not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dust, and the like do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a, and the walls, so that their own weight, etc. This allows the movable pieces 825a and 826 (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) to be prevented from rotating, which makes it possible to prevent the malfunction.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes to be attached, even if the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are frequently rotated, the weight is The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (weight attachment portions 825e, 826e) do not come off, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time. .. In addition, the weight can be easily attached to the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 by simply screwing a metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, so that the labor of attaching the weight can be simplified. Therefore, the cost for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the guide passage 821c, 822c, since the movable piece 825a, 825c is provided with an introduction portion 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable piece 825a, 825c, on the upstream side of the site where the movable piece 825a, 825c protrudes inward, As the game ball flows through the passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust, dirt, and the like that are sandwiched between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and that move by their own weight. The front one piece member 825 and the rear one piece member 826 can be rotated favorably.

  Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be rotated favorably, the state (presence or absence) of the game sphere in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game sphere It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to erroneous detection and the like. Further, even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that it is possible to quickly The game balls can be replenished to the player, and the time when the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, so that the interest of the player can be prevented from decreasing.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 73. The payout device 830 has a box shape with an open rear side, and a payout opening 831a in which a game ball is opened in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a game ball is opened in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout exit 831b, a ball removal exit 831c in which a game ball is open near the right end of the bottom surface when viewed from the front, a payout passage 831d that allows the payout entrance 831a and the payout exit 831b to communicate with each other. , And a front box 831 having a ball discharge passage 831e that branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 831c and through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. In the box shape with the front side open, the payout opening 832a is formed in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass, and the game ball is near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. The payout outlet 832b that is openable excessively, the ball removal outlet 832c that is open to allow the game balls to pass near the right end in front view on the bottom surface, and the payout inlet 832a and the payout outlet 832b are in communication with each other and the game balls are distributed. The rear box 832 is provided with a possible payout passage 832d and a payout passage 832d that branches from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 832c and has a ball removal passage 832e through which game balls can flow.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 whose rear side is open, and a rotation shaft which is attached inside the front box 831 and penetrates the front box 831. And a drive gear 835 attached to the rotation shaft of the delivery motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshes with each other, so that the front box 831 and the front cover 833 can rotate. The spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and the driven gear 837 are rotatably pierced so that the front end is attached to the front cover 833 and A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and a shaft member 838 which is rotatably attached through the shaft member 837 and which is attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832. A payout blade 839 disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotating integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 to detect the rotation of the payout blade 839. And are equipped with.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 for partitioning the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. And a rear box 832, which is attached between the payout vane 839 and the payout detection sensor 842 for detecting the game balls discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, and the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passage. 831e and 832e are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832 at a branching point, and the ball-removing movable piece 843 that can close the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e and the front box 831 and the rear box 831. A ball pulling lever 844 that is mounted slidably up and down on the upper right side surface of the box 832 as viewed from the front and that allows the ball pulling movable piece 843 to be rotatable or non-rotatable. It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right in a front view from the payout entrance 831a toward the ball exit 831c, and is downward at a height about 1/3 of the overall height of the front box 831. Bends so as to extend vertically, and bends so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the overall height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the front box 831 from the left end. As described above, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 831b at a height about 1/4 of the bottom of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 831b. The payout vane 839 is arranged at a portion bent in a crank shape in the payout passage 831d.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831e is a form in which the portion of the delivery passage 831d that extends obliquely from the delivery opening 831a to the lower right is further extended, and the height from the upper surface is about 1/3 of the total height of the front box 831. It branches up to the height near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the dispensing outlet 831b in the dispensing passage 831d, and a guiding shelf 831f protruding rearward as it goes downward, and an upper part of the right side surface in front view. And a lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 slidably up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in a front view from the payout entrance 832a toward the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about ⅓ of the total height of the rear box 832. Bends so as to extend vertically, and bends so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the overall height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right width of the rear box 832 from the left end. As described above, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located right above the dispensing outlet 832b at a height about 1/4 of the bottom of the rear box 832 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 832b. The payout vane 839 is arranged in a crank-shaped bent portion in the payout passage 832d.

  On the other hand, the ball-removing passage 832e further extends a portion of the payout passage 832d that extends obliquely from the payout opening 832a to the lower right, and is about 1/3 the height of the rear box 832 from the upper surface. It branches up to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the dispensing outlet 832b in the dispensing passage 832d, and a guide shelf 832f protruding forward as it goes downward, and an upper part of the right side surface in front view. And a lever mounting portion 832g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 slidably up and down.

  The payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the back box 832 are formed in the same shape. The dispensing passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by the partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the dispensing blade 839 is arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. In other words, the game ball that has flowed through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game ball that has flowed through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are located before and after the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. The payout detection sensor 842 is moved to the vicinity of the boundary and detected.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an interval of 60 degrees from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. It is provided with a plurality of detection pieces 837b and a connecting portion 837c projecting rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and having irregularities formed on the peripheral surface at the rear end and capable of being connected to the payout blade 839. ..

  The payout vane 839 extends in the front-rear direction in a cylindrical shape, and protrudes in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a from the front end of the base tubular portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction from the base tubular portion 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted. A plurality of (three) front blades 839b and a plurality of front blades 839b projecting in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so that the front blade 839b is staggered from the rear end. 3) The rear blade 839c and the connected portion that is protruded in a tubular shape from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a to the front and has an unevenness that can be connected to the connecting portion 387c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  Each of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the payout blade 839 is provided at three intervals at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c and the rear blade 839c are arranged so as to be staggered. It is offset at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc depressed toward the center side, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball storage portion 839e capable of storing only one game ball is formed.

  Further, the three front blades 839b and the rear blade 839c are formed such that their outer diameters D1 around the axis of the base tubular portion 839a are 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, a diameter D2 about the axis of the base tubular portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a in the arcuate portion (sphere housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). Is formed to be about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 73). That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer circumferences of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is quadrupled.

  Therefore, about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball can be held by the arc-shaped portion (ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, it is possible to accommodate a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly stored between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (ball storage portion 839e).

  In the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, with the dispensing device 830 assembled, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the trailing blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. In addition, the payout blade 839 is arranged in the payout passages 831d and 832d at a portion that is bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 839 is located immediately below the portion vertically extending downward from the vicinity of the center of the total height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. Then, in the crank-shaped bent portions of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the dispensing blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the dispensing blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 62). In this embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball storage portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. ..

  As a result, the payout device 830 can pass through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d when the game balls flowing down onto the payout blade 839 come into contact with the outer peripheries of the front blades 839b and 839c. Therefore, it is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is housed in the ball housing portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the crank-shaped bent parts of the payout passages 831d and 832d, and from the payout exits 831b and 832b. It is released downward.

  Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer diameter of the game ball is set to 1 by the ball housing portion 839e. Since the depth of / 7 to 1/4 is accommodated, it is possible to shorten the time required for accommodating the game ball while reducing the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout vane 839 is rotated rapidly, the game ball can be stored in the ball storage portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of payouts of the game balls per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time taken to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

  The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends vertically and forward and backward in a plate shape, and a lower portion is bent to be formed in a character shape in a front view, and a main body portion 843a extends forward and backward in a tubular shape at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A shaft cylinder portion 843b, both ends of which are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a projecting portion 843c projecting from an upper portion of an outer surface of the main body portion 843a bent in a V shape, and a main body portion 843c. And a weight attachment portion 843d (see FIG. 72) formed of a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction in a lower portion bent in a V shape.

  In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball-removing movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the shaft cylinder portion 843b at the upper end dispenses the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to rotate at a portion obliquely extending from the payout entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view and at a position outside the wall on the right side in the front view, which is slightly higher than the portion that bends downward. Installed on.

  In the normal state, the dispensing device 830 of the present embodiment is in a state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower part of the ball-pulling lever 844 hits the projecting portion 843c of the ball-pulling movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. Touching. As a result, the ball-removable movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 72A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a of the ball-removable movable piece 843 that is bent in a V shape, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically, and the lower side of the bent portion is the front left oblique lower left. Extending to. The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located in the vicinity of a portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball passage passages 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball-removing movable piece 843 (main body 843a) closes the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e, and the left-side surface of the main body 843a forms part of the walls of the payout passages 831d and 832d. is doing.

  In the normal state, the ball-stripping movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that the center of gravity of the ball-shedding movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front is exerted by it, since the counterclockwise rotation is restricted by the ball pulling lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball removing lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball removing lever 844 is separated from the protruding portion 843c of the ball removing movable piece 843, and the ball removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view. Movement restrictions are lifted. Therefore, the ball-removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located immediately below the shaft tube portion 843b. It should be noted that the ball-removable movable piece 843 should be rotated counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body 843a comes into contact with the left side of the member forming the right side surfaces of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 61 (b)). Thereby, the ball removal passages 831e, 832e are opened, and the game balls that have entered from the payout entrances 831a, 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d, 832d. The ball-removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front to open the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e, flow through the opened ball-removing passages 831e and 832e, and are discharged downward from the ball-removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball-moving movable piece 843 is provided with the weight mounting portion 843d, the weight of the metal screw is screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d to mount the ball-moving lever 844. Then, when the regulation of the counterclockwise rotation in the front view is released, the lower end of the ball-removing movable piece 843 is projected into the ball-removing passages 381e, 832e by the weight of the ball-removing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. Direction (counterclockwise as viewed from the front) can be easily rotated.

  Also, in a normal state in which the ball removing lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball removing passages 831e, 832e, the game balls entering from the payout ports 831a, 832a enter the main body 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843. Since they are in contact with each other, the ball-moving movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to remove dust, dust, or the like that is sandwiched between the lower end of the ball-removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e by the vibration of the ball-removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball-removing movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate due to biting of dust or the like.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed and attached to the weight attachment portion 843d formed as the through hole, even if the ball removing movable piece 843 is frequently rotated, the weight is removed by the ball removing movable piece 843. The ball-removing movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without coming off from the (weight attachment portion 843d). In addition, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-moving movable piece 843 simply by screwing a metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost related to can be reduced.

  By the way, if the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long period of time by the ball removing movable piece 843, fine dust may be attached to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft may be rusted. The removal movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout ports 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball-removing movable piece 843, so the ball-removing movable piece 843 removes the ball-removing passage 831e. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball pulling lever 844 for releasing the closing is slid upward and unlocked, the game ball comes into contact with the ball removing movable piece 843. The ball-removing movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball removal work can be reliably performed. It is possible to improve workability in maintenance and the like.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. The upper tank bulb path unit 850 is attached to a position below the payout device 830 in the payout unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851, and the upper full tank base 851 is attached to the rear side and the front side is opened. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a dispensing device pressing member 853 rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 830 upward are provided.

  Further, the upper tank ball path unit 850 is an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward so that a game ball can pass in a left side portion from the left-right center in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the center in the front view on the upper surface. It is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving opening 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which game balls circulate, a normal discharge opening 850d that opens downward at a position immediately below the upper payout sphere receiving opening 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and the upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e that opens downward at a portion excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d, and a full tank discharge port 850e. And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  In addition, the upper tank ball passage unit 850, the upper ball removal passage 850g that guides the game ball that entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and the upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. And a ball removal outlet 850h. This upper tank full ball path unit 850 has a normal outlet 850d, a tank outlet 850e, and an upper ball outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side in a front view and opens downward. Further, the upper tank full ball path unit 850 includes a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 on the right end of the upper tank base 851.

  In this upper full tank path unit 850, in the state of being assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout port 831b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball removing port 850b is It is located directly below the ball removal outlet 831c of the dispensing device 830. Further, the upper full-ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full-tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are the normal guideways of the lower full-ball path unit 860. Each of 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball removing guide path 865 is opened immediately above the rear end opening (see FIG. 82).

  In the upper tank ball path unit 850, the game balls that are paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlet 831b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In the state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is opened immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d.

  When the upper tray 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and cannot store the game balls, and further, the normal guideway 861 of the lower tank ball path unit 860 is filled with the game balls, it is normally released. The outlet 850d is closed. In this state, when the game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition 850f, the game ball newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c gets over the partition 850f and becomes full. It will be discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower tray 202 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860.

  In this way, the upper tank ball path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 201 according to the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 202.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower tank full ball path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. The lower tank full ball path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper tank ball path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower tank ball path unit 860 is a normal guide path 861 for guiding the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper tank ball path unit 850 forward and guiding it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. And, a full tank guide path 862 that guides the game ball discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper tank ball path unit 850 to the front and guides it from the front end to the full tank receiver 530 of the door frame 3, and normally. A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens / closes front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 in accordance with opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and a guideway opening / closing door 863 that is a normal guideway 861 and a full guide path 862. A closing spring 864 that urges the front end opening of the same in a direction to close the opening.

  In addition, the lower tank full ball path unit 860 guides the game balls discharged from the upper ball exit port 850h of the upper tank ball path unit 850 to the front, and from the center right end in the front-rear direction on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. It is provided with a lower ball guideway 865 for discharging to

  In the lower tank full ball path unit 860, the normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball guide path 865 are sequentially arranged from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball removing guide path 865 have rear ends that open upward. The normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are lined up on the left and right, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side becomes low. Further, the full tank guideway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guideway 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball guide path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that are vertically separable.

  The guide path opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to the front end of the lower case 867 between the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and is rotated clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 864. Being energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower tank ball path unit 860, the full tank guide path 862 opening to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view is one game with respect to the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower by the height of the ball. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and to the left of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-shaped base portion 863a that is rotatably attached, and a first door plate portion 863b that extends in a flat plate shape from the base portion 863a to the upper left side and can close the front end opening of the taxiway path 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending from the base portion 863a to the right side in a flat plate shape and capable of closing the front end opening of the full tank guiding path 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. , And an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end portion of the extending portion 863d and can come into contact with the door opening / closing abutting portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 means that the openings do not have to be closed and the game ball may not pass. The operating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape with the base 863a as the center when viewed from the front, and the front end face is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. is doing.

  The guide path opening / closing door 863 is biased in a clockwise direction in a front view by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is located below the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 at the front end of the lower cover 867. By contacting the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the clockwise rotation is restricted.

  In the lower full ball path unit 860 of the present embodiment, the front end of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 has a through ball passage 526, a full ball receptacle 530, and a door opening / closing member in the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 537 (see FIG. 80). The guideway opening / closing door 863 has no contact with the actuating projection 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the guideway opening / closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Is rotated clockwise in a front view, and the second door plate portion 863c is stopped in a state of being in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 and close the front end openings (FIG. 79). (See (a)). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guide The game ball does not spill out of the path 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing abutting portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operating protrusion 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 to operate. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force acts against the biasing force of the closing spring 864 to rotate the guide path opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction in front view. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 rotate in the direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861. Also, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 79 (b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal guideway 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862. ..

  When the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are open, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank path are full. The penetrating ball passage 526 and the full tank receiving port 528 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide path 862. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 526 and the full-ball receiving port 528 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 are changed by vertically changing the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862, and by rotating the guide path opening / closing door 863. Since it is opened and closed, the operating range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls cannot be discharged to the upper plate 201. When is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guide path 861 of the lower tank ball path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guiding path 861 is filled with the game balls, the game balls are normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition 850f, it will flow to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860, The payout of game balls is automatically switched to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 520. After that, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 202 in addition to the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls and cannot be supplied to the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 520. The game balls are stored in the storage passage 533. When the movable balls 534 are rotated by the game balls being stored in the storage passage 533 and detected by the full tank detection sensor 535, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full of game balls. Is notified and the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is released.

  In addition, the stop of the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 in response to the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 534 is detected in the storage passage 533 of the foul cover unit 520. The number of fillings of the storage passage 533 on the upstream side, the full tank guiding path 862 of the lower tank full ball path unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper tank ball path unit 850 in the state where When the game sphere is paid out, the payout of the game sphere by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, it is possible to store more game balls than the conventional pachinko machine, so in the gaming state where a large number of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are paid out by the game balls being paid out. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being full of game balls, and allow the player to concentrate on the big hit game and entertain.

  As described above, in the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more game balls than the conventional pachinko machine can be stored in the upper tank full ball path unit 850 and the lower tank ball path unit 860. When a lot of game balls are stored in the upper tank full ball path unit 850 and the lower tank full ball path unit 860 when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the frame 4, the load of these game balls is normally guided. This greatly affects the guideway opening / closing door 863 that closes the front end openings of the path 861 and the full tank guideway 862, and the guideway opening / closing door 863 may be easily damaged. Therefore, the guideway opening / closing door 870 of the embodiment as shown in FIG. 81 may be used.

  The guideway opening / closing door 870 shown in FIG. 81 is a disc-shaped base 870a that is rotatably attached, and a first door that extends from the base 870a to the upper left side in a flat plate shape and that can close the front end opening of the normal guideway 861. A plate portion 870b, a second door plate portion 870c extending from the base portion 870a to the right side in a flat plate shape and capable of closing the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862, and an extension extending from the base portion 870a to a diagonally lower left side in a flat plate shape. An extension portion (not shown) and an operation protrusion 870e protruding forward from the front surface of the tip of the extension portion and capable of contacting the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 are provided. ing. Further, the guideway opening / closing door 870 is provided with a plurality of recesses 870 in which a part of the game ball fits on the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c.

  As illustrated, the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c of the taxiway opening / closing door 870 are obliquely inclined so as to move rearward as the distance from the base portion 870a increases. Therefore, when the game ball that has rolled forward in the normal guide path 861 or the full guide path 862 comes into contact with the rear surface of the first door plate portion 870b or the second door plate portion 870c, the rear surface is inclined. By rolling to the base 870a side, it is possible to bring the game balls stored in the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 to the base 870a side. Thereby, the load of the game balls stored in the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 is applied to the base portion 870a attached to the lower case 867 in the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c. Since the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c are made to act in a close position, the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c can be made difficult to be deformed, and the taxiway opening / closing door 870 is made difficult to be damaged, and durability can be improved.

  The plurality of recesses 870d of the guideway opening / closing door 870 are held at the positions where the game balls are close to the base portion 870a on the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c as illustrated. Are arranged as follows. As a result, by fitting the game ball that has flowed through the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 into the recess 870d, the game ball can be reliably positioned closer to the base 870a, and the same as above. It is possible to obtain the action and effect.

  Although not shown, the recess 870d extends in an arc shape around the base 870a so that the guideway opening / closing door 870 can be rotated even when the game ball is fitted.

  In this case, it is desirable that the left and right widths W of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 be different from an integral multiple of the diameter of the game ball. As a result, with respect to the game balls that are brought closer to the base 870a side by the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c, the game balls that abut on the rear side are the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path. When contacting the inner wall on the left and right sides of 862, the direction of the load acting from the game ball on the rear side is directed diagonally forward toward the base portion 870a side, and the load is applied to the base portion 870a side attached to the case 867. Can be made to act in large numbers, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably exhibited.

[4-7. Board unit]
The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61. The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 and a bass speaker inside the body unit base 910, which is attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. The speaker unit 920, the power supply board box 930 in which the power supply board is housed in the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front, and the interface control inside the speaker unit 920 which is installed in the rear side. An interface control board box 940 accommodating a board, a power supply board box 930, and a payout control board box mounted across the interface control board box 940 and accommodating a payout control board for controlling the payout of game balls inside. And 950.

  The payout control board housed in the payout control board box 950 controls the payout device 830.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. FIG. 83 is a front view of the game board. 84 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front left. Also, FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and seen from the front, and FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and seen from the rear. 89 is a front perspective view showing only the front component members and the game panel of the game board, and FIG. 90 is a rear perspective view showing only the front component member and the game panel of the game board.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by the player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and the front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game region 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape in front view, and the rear end of the game region 5a. A partitioning plate-shaped game panel 1100, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 are driven by driving the game balls into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board for controlling game contents. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion that is inside the game area 5a (not shown).

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel 1100. A central liquid crystal display device 1500 that is visibly attached to the rear side from the front side, a peripheral control unit 1600 that is attached to the rear side of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

  The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000 A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

  The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions within the playing area 5a. A first starting opening 2002 that is always open to receive a game ball, a gate unit 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003. The second starting opening 2004 that allows the game balls to be accepted according to the result of the normal drawing that is selected by the first and the first starting opening 2002 or the first drawing that is accepted by the game balls to the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with a lower major prize opening 2005 and an upper major prize opening 2006 that allows the game balls to be accepted in either the special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  Further, a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 attached directly above the out opening 1111 in the center of the technique area 5a in the left-right direction, and an inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front. And a side unit 2200 having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, and a second starting opening that are mounted on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100. 2004 and an attacker unit 2300 having a lower special winning opening 2005, a starter opening unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a frame having an upper special winning opening 2006 attached above the attacker unit 2300. And the center accessory 2500.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-shaped back box 3010 whose front is open, and a lock for attaching the central liquid crystal display device 1500 detachably to the back box 3010. It includes a mechanism 3020, a lower left ball passage unit 3030 attached near the lower left front end of the back box 3010, and a lower right ball passage unit 3040 attached near the lower right front end of the back box 3010.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a lamp drive board 3060 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 to the left of the opening 3010a in rear view, a lamp drive board cover 3061 covering the rear of the lamp drive board 3060, and a back box 3010. A motor drive board 3062 mounted on the rear surface below the rear side of the opening 3010a, a motor drive board cover 3063 covering the rear of the motor drive board 3062, and a rear surface of the back box 3010 mounted on the lower left corner of the rear view. And a panel relay board 3064 that is installed.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back peripheral decoration unit 3080 mounted along the upper side and the left side at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back movable operation unit mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. 3100, a lower back front movable production unit 3200 attached below the opening 3010a near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable production attached to the right of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A unit 3300, a back left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a unit below the opening 3010a and behind the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010. Movable back-down movable effect unit 3500, back-up movable effect unit 3100 and back-under movable operation in the back box 3010 A back corners movable direction unit 3600 attached to the respective left and right sides of the output unit 3500, and a.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in a clockwise direction and extends in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stop part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided. This stop portion 1006 acts as a cushioning member that loosens and relieves the momentum of the game ball that is driven into the game area 5a, and is formed of rubber or the like in this example. The material of the stopper 1006 is not limited to rubber as long as it functions as a cushioning member.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member that is rotated in a rotating direction to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The game panel 1100 holds a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. On the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, an out port 1111 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of mounting openings 1112 (see FIG. 89, FIG. 90, etc.) penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 holds the panel plate 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and a plurality of positioning holes formed on its rear surface.

  In the state where the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding portion 1003, and can be discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper portion and a front portion, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side when assembled on the game board 5. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and are formed on the bottom surface. The discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 87) can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board (not shown) that controls game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board and is attached to the board holder 1200. I have it.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, a trace of opening / closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, the unauthorized opening / closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening / closing, and the deterrence of the unauthorized act on the main control board is enhanced.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator including one LED for displaying a game status, and two for displaying an ordinary lottery result selected by passage of a game ball to a gate portion described later. A normal symbol display consisting of LEDs, a normal holding display consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate part, and a lottery by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening described later. A first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special reservation number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls into the first starting opening. , A second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game balls into the second starting port, which will be described later, and a person accepting the game balls into the second starting port When the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit", etc., the second special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of hold It mainly includes a round indicator including two LEDs for displaying the number of times the opening / closing pattern is repeated (the number of rounds).

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on and off, and turning on and off the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Central liquid crystal display]
Next, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is removably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center. This central liquid crystal display device 1500 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight and can display a still image or a moving image.

  As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 includes two left fixing pieces 1501 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece 1501 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. And 1502. This central liquid crystal display device 1500 has a back box in which two fixing grooves open to the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting two left fixing pieces 1501 from diagonally behind 3010, the right fixing piece 1502 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1502 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism, and the lock mechanism is slid downward. As a result, it is attached to the back box 3010.

[5-7. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The peripheral control unit 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. Although not shown, the peripheral control unit 1600 controls the peripheral control board that controls the effect to be presented to the player based on the control signal from the main control board, and displays the effect image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. An image display control board to be controlled, a ROM board having a ROM in which an effect image, an effect sound, an effect control program, etc. are stored, a peripheral control board, an image display control board, and a periphery accommodating the ROM board. And a control board box 1620.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 97. 91 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. Further, FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit of the front unit viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit viewed from the lower back. Further, FIG. 94 (a) is a perspective view of the side unit of the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 94 (b) is a perspective view of the side unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 95 (a) is a perspective view of the attacker unit of the front unit viewed from the front upper side, FIG. 95 (b) is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from the upper rear side, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. 96 is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 97 is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the mounting port 1112. And the panel plate 1110 projects rearward from the rear surface. In the table unit 2000 of the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are capable of accepting game balls that have been driven into the gaming area 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are within the gaming area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball at different positions, the gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is the gate The second starting opening 2004 that allows the game balls to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary drawing that is selected by passing through the section 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. There is a lower special winning opening 2005 and an upper special winning opening 2006, which allow the game balls to be accepted in either of the first special drawing result or the second special drawing result.

  A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1111 at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. The gate portion 2003 is arranged on the right side in the game area 5a, and is arranged downward from the center in the vertical direction. The second starting port 2004 is arranged immediately below the gate portion 2003. The lower special winning opening 2005 is arranged near the lower end of the game area 5a below the second starting opening 2004. The special winning opening 2005 is arranged near the upper end of the game area 5a above the second starting opening 2004.

  Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002 and a starting port unit 2100 in front view left. Side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has a plurality of (here, three) general winning openings 2001, and one general winning which is installed on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100. An attacker unit 2300 having a mouth 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a lower special winning opening 2005, a starting opening unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and an attacker unit 2300. It has a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a special winning opening 2006.

[5-8a. Starter unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. 93 and the like. The starting opening unit 2100 is arranged immediately above the out opening 1111 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002.

  The starting opening unit 2100 includes a unit base 2101 attached to a panel plate 1110, a ball receiving member 2102 attached to an upper front portion of the unit base 2101 and projecting forward to form a first starting opening 2002. A box frame-shaped front decoration base 2103 attached to the front surface of the unit base 2101 below the ball receiving member 2102 and protruding forward and extending left and right, and the front surface of the unit base 2101 inside the front decoration base 2103. And a front central decoration substrate 2104 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  Further, the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the front surface of the front decoration base 2103, is given a predetermined decoration, and is provided with a front decoration member 2105 which is light-emitted and decorated by the front central decoration substrate 2104, and the rear side of the unit base 2101. The guide passage member 2106 attached to the first starting opening 2002 and guiding the game ball received downward to the first starting opening 2002, and the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 attached to the guide passage member 2106 are detected. And a first starting port sensor 2107.

  The ball receiving member 2102 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and the rear, and can receive a game ball from above as the first starting port 2002 and guide it backward. The front decoration base 2103 extends equally to the left and right around the ball receiving member 2102 (first starting port 2002), and the upper surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the left and right ends. The front decoration member 2105 extends to the left and right, and has a fake portion 2105a formed in a plate shape having substantially the same size and shape as a lower special winning opening door member 2352 that opens and closes a lower special winning opening 2005 described later. ing. With this fake portion 2105a, it is possible to make the player illusion that there is a big winning opening below the first starting opening 2002.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. The side unit 2200 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2201 extending in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002, and is attached near the upper edge of the lower front surface of the unit base 2201. Together with the two first ball receiving members 2202 protruding forward and forming the general winning opening 2001, the front surface of the unit base 2201 is attached to the left side from the center in the left-right direction, and is protruding forward, which is the general winning opening. The second ball receiving member 2203 forming 2001, the side decoration board 2204 arranged behind the unit base 2201 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the side decoration board 2204 so as to cover the side decoration board 2204 from the rear side. A substrate cover 2205 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2201.

  The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to be higher toward the left side in front view. In addition, the unit base 2201 has a first shelf portion 2201a that is inclined so as to become lower toward the right side at a site to the left and above the site where the second ball receiving member 2203 is attached, It has a protruding portion 2201b protruding inward. The unit base 2201 has a light-transmitting property, and is illuminated and decorated by the side decoration substrate 2204.

The first ball receiving member 2202 is formed in a container shape with an open upper part and a rear part, and can receive a game ball from above as a general winning opening 2001 and guide it backward.
The second ball receiving member 2203 is formed in the shape of a box with an open rear, and has a second shelf 2203a that slopes downward to the right on the upper surface and below the second shelf 2203a. And a ball receiving portion 2203b forming a general winning opening 2001 on the left side.

  The substrate cover 2205 is formed in a shallow box shape having an open front, and is opened upward at a position behind the ball receiving portions 2203b of the two first ball receiving members 2202 and 2203. In addition, it has a gutter-shaped guide portion 2205a that extends back and forth and guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 rearward.

  The side unit 2200 is mounted on the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), the substrate cover 2205 is inserted into the mounting opening 1112, and the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 are paneled by the guiding portion 2205a. It can be guided behind the plate 1112.

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. The attacker unit 2300 is arranged in the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2300 has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a lower special winning opening 2005. Specifically, the second starting opening 2004 is arranged to the right of the general winning opening 2001, the gate portion 2003 is arranged immediately above the second starting opening 2004, and the general winning opening 2001 and the The lower special winning opening 2005 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004. The lower major winning opening 2005 extends leftward and rightward from right below the second starting opening 2004 to rightward beyond right below the general winning opening 2001.

  The attacker unit 2300 has a general winning opening 2001 and a gate portion 2003, is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, and a unit base 2301 is attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 2301 and is in front of the second starting opening 2004. The starting opening front member 2302 to be decorated, the shelf member 2303 attached to the front surface of the unit base 2301 between the starting opening front member 2302 and the lower special winning opening 2005, and protruding forward, and the unit base 2301. A ball guiding member 2304 attached to the rear side for guiding the game ball received in the second starting port 2004, and a gate sensor 2305 attached to the unit base 2301 for detecting passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2003. , Are provided.

  Further, the attacker unit 2300 is arranged on the rear side of the unit base 2301 at a portion corresponding to between the starting opening front member 2302 and the shelf member 2303, and a lower attacker decorative substrate 2306 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. And a substrate cover 2307 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 so as to cover the rear of the lower attacker decoration substrate 2306, and a lattice-frame-shaped light shield attached between the lower attacker decoration substrate 2306 and the unit base 2301. And a member (not shown).

  The attacker unit 2300 is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 2301 and opens and closes the second starting port 2004, and the second start port unit 2320 is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 2301 and the lower special winning opening 2005. And a lower special winning opening unit 2350 for opening and closing.

  In the unit base 2301, the gate portion 2003 projects forward from the upper end portion, and one general winning opening 2001 projects forward from the lower left portion of the gate portion 2003 in front view. In addition, the unit base 2301 is provided with a gutter-shaped gutter portion 2301a that guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear. The unit base 2301 has a light-transmitting property.

  The starting opening front member 2302 includes a pair of side wall portions 2302a (see FIG. 175 (a)) extending forward along both left and right sides of the second starting opening 2004 and an upper end of the side wall portion 2302a on the left side in front view. A guide portion 2302b extending toward the left side, and a flat plate-shaped outer wall portion 2302c extending forward from the side wall portion 2302a on the right side as viewed from the front with a distance allowing the game ball to pass rightward. , A pair of side wall portions 2302a, a guiding portion 2302b, and a flat plate-shaped front plate portion 2302d that connects the front ends of the outer wall portions 2302c. The left end of the guide portion 2302b extends to the left of the gate portion 2003.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (a) and the like, the upper surface of the shelf member 2303 extends from directly below the right side wall portion 2302a of the starting opening front member 2302 to directly below the center of the general winning opening 2001 so that its left end is lowered. ing. Accordingly, when the game ball is rolled on the upper surface of the shelf member 2303 and is discharged from the left end when the lower prize hole 2005 is in the open state, the game ball is received in the lower prize hole 2005 with an extremely high probability. The ball guiding member 2304 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 2307. In addition, the ball guiding member 2304 passes the game ball received in the second starting opening 2004 behind the unit base 2301 between the second starting opening unit 2320 and the lower special winning opening unit 2350, and the lower large winning opening. After being guided to the rear of the unit 2350, it is formed so as to discharge downward.

  The second starting port unit 2320 has a front case 2321 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 with a second starting port 2004 opened at the front end, and a rear case 2322 attached to the rear side of the front case 2321. , A second starting port door member 2323 supported in the front case 2321 so as to project forward of the second starting port 2004 and slidable forward and backward, and a second starting port door member 2323 is slid forward and backward. A starting opening solenoid 2324 installed in the case 2322 and a second starting opening sensor 2325 which is installed so as to be sandwiched between the front case 2321 and the rear case 2322 and detects the game ball received in the second starting opening 2004. And are equipped with.

  In the state in which the second starting opening unit 2320 is assembled to the attacker unit 2300, the front end of the front case 2321 penetrates the unit base 2301 from the rear side and is positioned substantially on the same plane as the front surface of the unit case 2301. As a result, the second starting port 2004 opens forward. Then, in a normal state where the starting opening solenoid 2324 is not energized, the second starting opening door member 2323 is retracted in the front case 2321, and the game ball flowing down in front of the second starting opening 2004 is the second starting opening. Without passing into 2004, it passes through the second starting port 2001 and flows downward. On the other hand, when the starting opening solenoid 2324 is energized, the second starting opening door member 2323 is in a state of protruding further forward than the second starting opening 2004. In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the second starting port 2004, the gaming ball comes into contact with the second starting port door member 2323 and the flow direction changes from the lower side to the rear side, to the second starting port 2004. Accepted. The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2325 and then guided by the ball guiding member 2304 and discharged downward.

  The lower special winning opening unit 2350 is a unit case 2351 that is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 and has a rectangular lower special winning opening 2005 that extends to the left and right on the front surface and a lower special winning opening 2005 that can be opened and closed. A horizontally elongated rectangular flat plate-shaped lower special winning opening door member 2352 rotatably attached to 2351 and a lower large winning opening door member 2352 mounted in the unit case 2351 and opened and closed according to a game state. Lower special winning opening solenoid 2353, lower special winning opening sensor 2354 that is attached to the unit case 2351 and detects a game ball received in the lower special winning opening 2005, and is attached to the lower surface of the unit case 2351 and is on the upper surface. Lower special winning opening decoration board 2355 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and lower special winning opening solenoid 235 Includes inferior vena winning hole sensors 2354, starting opening the solenoid 2324, and a second start hole sensor 2325 or the like, the attacker unit relay board 2356 relaying the connection between the main control board, the.

  The lower special winning opening 2005 is open toward the front. The lower special winning opening door member 2352 capable of opening and closing the lower special winning opening 2005 is rotatably attached to the left and right ends of the lower side by the unit case 2351, and is rotated so that the upper side moves forward and downward. By doing so, the lower special winning opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

  In the lower special winning opening unit 2350, in a normal state where the lower special winning opening solenoid 2353 is not energized, the lower special winning opening door member 2352 stands upright to close the lower special winning opening 2005. When the lower special winning opening solenoid 2353 is energized in accordance with the game state, the lower special winning opening door member 2352 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly above the lower side. It will be located. That is, the lower special winning opening door member 2352 is in a state of being inclined so as to be higher from the lower side of the lower special winning opening 2005 toward the front.

  In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the lower special winning opening 2005 and comes into contact with the lower large winning opening door member 2352, the distribution direction changes from the lower side to the rear due to the inclination of the lower large winning opening door member 2352, It will be accepted in the lower prize hole 2005. Then, the game ball received in the lower special winning opening 2005 is detected by the lower special winning opening sensor 2354 and then discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2351.

[5-8d. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the starting opening unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300 and slightly above the center in a front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be viewed from the front through the frame. The center accessory 2500 has an upper special winning opening 2006 that allows a game ball to be accepted according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, a part of the lower side of the center accessory 2500 extends between the starting opening unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300 and extends downward to the vicinity of the lower right rail 1004. In other words, this center accessory 2500 divides the game area 5a into right and left.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a flat plate frame-shaped flange portion 2511 that abuts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the periphery of the mounting opening 1112 that is largely open in the center of the panel plate 1112, and protrudes forward from the flange portion 2511. A frame-shaped center base having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 that prevents the game balls from entering the cage frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 that projects rearward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the mounting port 1112. 2510.

  The front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. The position of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 is slightly higher to the left from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 and the warp entrance 2520 in which the game balls in the game area 5a are open at the outer peripheral surface of the lower left side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 when viewed from the front. In the frame of the center base 2510, the warp passage 2521 that guides the game ball to the vicinity of the left end in front view, the warp outlet 2523 at the downstream end of the warp passage 2521 through which the game ball can pass, and the warp outlet 2523. The game ball released from is provided with a stage 2530 which is rollable, extends left and right along the lower side in the frame of the center base 2510, and releases the supplied game ball into the game area 5a. ing.

  The stage 2530 is curved so that the left and right ends are high and the left and right sides of the part corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction are the lowest, and the part between the lowest parts is bulged to be slightly higher. There is. This stage 2530 is formed in a portion corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and a central guide groove 2531 is formed by cutting out from the front end to the rear, and the two lowest portions are formed in the front. And a fan-shaped side guide groove 2532 that lowers toward the right and spreads to the left and right. In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the first starting port 2002 is located immediately below the central guiding groove 2531, and the gaming ball released from the central guiding groove 2531 into the game area 5a is the first with a very high probability. It is received in the starting port 2002.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the front end of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 at the right end in front view, and guides the game ball that abuts against the stop portion 1006 and bounces back toward the upper game space 2541 described later. The unit 2540 is provided. The guide portion 2540 is formed as a member different from the center accessory 2500 and is attached to the center accessory 2500 to extend the right end in front view of the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 in the right direction in front view. In addition, the guide portion 2540 is formed of a resin having higher strength than the center accessory 2500. Specifically, the center accessory 2500 is made of PC resin (polycarbonate resin), but the guide portion 2540 is made of POM resin (polyacetal resin) having higher durability than PC resin.

  As described above, when the game ball hit in the game area 5a comes into contact with the hitting portion 1006, the game ball slows down its momentum, but some of the game balls are hit by the hitting portion 1006 to the front peripheral wall of the center role object 2500. The part 2512 is repelled in the upper direction. Further, most players rotate the handle lever 504 to hit the game ball in order to bring the game ball into contact with the stopper 1006, so that the momentum of the game ball to be launched is toward the first starting opening 2002. It is stronger than the normal game that aims to win the prize. When the game ball hit in this way is bounced back by the hitting portion 1006, the center accessory 2500 may be damaged by being frequently dropped onto the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. Therefore, the front end right end portion of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 in front view is attached to the center role object 2540 as a guide part 2540 which is a separate member, and the center role object 2540 is prevented from being damaged by being formed of POM resin having excellent durability. ing. In addition, in this example, only the guide portion 2540 is formed of the POM resin without forming the center accessory 2540 entirely of the POM resin. Therefore, even if the guide portion 2540 is damaged, only the guide portion 2540 should be replaced. It can be repaired by, and even if it is damaged, it can be easily repaired.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 176, which will be described later, the guide portion 2540 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to have a step with the front peripheral wall portion 2512. In this example, the front peripheral wall portion 2512 is attached such that the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 is higher than the upper side of the guiding portion 2540 in front view. As a result, when the game ball bounced back by the stopper 1006 reaches this step, it is returned to the upper game space 2541 without going over the step. Further, the friction coefficient is low on the upper side of the guide portion 2540 due to the smooth mirror finish, and the game balls that cannot be stepped between the front peripheral wall portion 2512 and the guide portion 2540 are quickly flowed down to the upper game space 2541. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the game balls staying on the upper side of the guide portion 2540.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 176 described later, the upper side of the guiding portion 2540 is formed by a three-dimensional member that is longer than the right side (left and right sides). The upper side of the guiding portion 2540 needs a certain length or more to receive the game ball rebounded by the hitting portion 1006, but by setting the upper side and the right side (left and right sides) to be approximately the same, the space in the game area 5a Is narrowed, and the degree of freedom in designing game machines is reduced. Therefore, by forming the right side (left and right sides) of the guiding portion 2540 shorter than the upper side, a space in the vertical direction in the front view of the game area 5a is ensured and the degree of freedom in designing the game machine is not lowered.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is sandwiched between the guide portion 2540 and the stop portion 1006, and the upper right entrance where the game ball in the game area 5a is opened so that the game ball can enter, and the upper side of the center base 2510 below the upper right entrance. Along the right side of the center base 2510 from the right end in front view at the bottom of the upper game space 2541, and an upper game space 2541 of a predetermined size formed on the right side of the upper game space 2006 on the left side in front view. Is provided with a right passage 2542 that extends downward and has a lower end bent to the left and through which game balls can flow, and a lower right outlet 2543 that opens downward at the lower end of the right passage 2542. ..

  The upper right entrance extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the upper part widens upward. The upper game space 2541 is formed in such a size that the game balls can be moved sufficiently in the vertical and horizontal directions. In the upper game space 2541, the upper special winning opening 2006 is opened to the left in front view than the upper right entrance. In addition, the upper game space 2541 has a guide portion 2541a that is inclined rightward when viewed from the front so as to become lower right below the upper right entrance. By this guide portion 2541a, the game ball that has fallen through the upper right entrance is rolled along the bottom surface of the upper game space 2541 without bouncing up in the upper game space 2541, and is smoothly guided to the right passage 2542. Can be made

  The right passage 2542 is provided with a plurality of protruding ridges 2542a extending leftward and rightward on the front and rear wall surfaces alternately in the up-down direction. When the game spheres come into contact with the respective protruding ridges 2542a, the flow speed of the game spheres is reduced. Can be attenuated. The lower right outlet 2543 is opened immediately above the gate portion 2003 in the attacker unit 2300 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. Although illustration is omitted, in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), a plurality of obstacle nails are also implanted between the lower right outlet 2543 and the gate portion 2003.

  Further, the center character 2500 includes an upper special winning opening door member 2550 that closes the upper special winning opening 2006, and a upper special winning opening solenoid 2551 that opens and closes the upper special winning opening door member 2550 according to a game state. , Upper special winning opening sensor 2552 for detecting the game ball received in the upper special winning opening 2006, and a backward guiding path 2553 for guiding the game ball detected by the upper special winning opening sensor 2552 rearward of the flange portion 2511 ( (See FIG. 175), and a rear discharge port 2554 that is opened at the rear end of the rear guideway 2553 and through which game balls can pass, and is branched from the middle of the rear guideway 2553 to the right side of the center base 2510 in front view. It is provided with an escape passage 2555 that guides the game ball downward along with a discharge port 2556 that is open at the lower end of the escape passage.

  The upper special winning opening door member 2550 opens and closes the upper special winning opening 2006 that is open to the left in front view from the upper right entrance in the upper game space 2541. The upper special winning opening door member 2550 is rotatably attached to the lower end on the left side of the upper right entrance around an axis extending back and forth near the bottom surface of the upper gaming space 2541, and the upper end in an upright state. It extends to near the ceiling of the upper gaming space. This upper special winning opening door member 2550 is upright in a normal state and closes the upper special winning opening 2006. When the upper special winning opening solenoid 2551 is energized in accordance with the game state, the upper end is rotated so as to move rightward in front view, and the upper special winning opening 2006 is opened so that the game ball can be received. Open. In this state, the upper end of the upper special winning opening door member 2550 is higher than the lower end and is positioned to the right in front view from the upper right entrance. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen to the upper special winning opening door member 2550 through the upper right entrance is guided by the upper special winning opening door member 2550 and is received in the upper special winning opening 2006.

  The game ball received in the upper special winning opening 2006 is detected by the upper special winning opening sensor 2552 arranged at the lower left of the upper special winning opening door member 2550, and then to the rear of the flange portion 2551 by the rear guiding path 2553. Be induced. The rear discharge port 2554 opened at the rear end of the rear guide path 2553 is normally formed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310a of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 described later. It is closed. Therefore, when the game ball is not discharged from the rear discharge port 2554, the game ball enters the escape passage 2555 branched immediately before the rear discharge port 2554, and is discharged downward from the discharge port 2556 through the escape passage 2555. .

  In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes a front movable production unit 2560 attached to the upper side of the center base 2510 and a front movable production unit 2570 attached to the lower side of the center base 2510. The front movable art production unit 2560 of the center accessory 2500 is mounted so as to be able to move up and down within the frame of the center base 2510, and the front movable ornament body 2561, which is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, A front movable decorative body decorative board (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the upper movable decorative body 2561 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a game state mounted on the rear side of the center base 2510. And a front drive motor 2563 for moving the front movable ornament 2561 up and down according to the above.

  The front-bottom movable effect unit 2570 is attached to a portion of the lower side of the center base 2510 extending below the stage 2530, and is a flat plate having a decoration on the front surface and having a light-transmitting property. After the lower decorative body 2571, the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 that are rotatably attached in front of the front and lower decorative body 2571, and the center base 2510 The front side drive motor 2575 mounted on the side and rotating the first rotary decoration body 2572, the second rotary decoration body 2573, and the third rotary decoration body 2574 according to the game state, and the rear side of the front and bottom decoration body 2571. And a front and bottom movable decorative body decorative substrate 2576 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  In the front and bottom movable effect unit 2570, the first rotation decoration body 2572, the second rotation decoration body 2573, and the third rotation decoration body 2574 are formed in a shape simulating a shuriken, and are driven by the front and bottom drive motor 2575. , Rotate in the same direction.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101. 98 is a perspective view of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. A central liquid crystal display device 1500 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000.

  The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open, and a rear box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and the rear unit 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 in the center. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the liquid crystal display device 1500, and a game ball that is attached near the lower left front end of the back box 3010 and is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is guided downwards to the substrate. The lower left sphere passage unit 3030 that discharges onto the holder 1200, and the game balls that are attached to the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 that is mounted near the lower right front end of the back box 3010 and the upper winning opening 2006 are received. The outlet 3303a of the lower back right base 3303 in the rear right and left movable effect unit 3300 described later. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 that guides the game balls discharged from the game ball discharged from the outlet 2556 of the escape passage 2555 of the center accessory 2500 and discharges them onto the substrate holder 1200, and the lower left ball passage. The unit 3030 and the lower right ball passage unit 3040 are provided respectively, and a general winning opening sensor 3050 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is provided.

  The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 to the left of the opening 3010a in a rear view and drives the decoration boards based on a control command from the peripheral control board. A lamp drive board cover 3061 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear of the board 3060, and a control command from the peripheral control board attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a in rear view. A motor drive board 3062 that drives each drive motor based on the following, a motor drive board cover 3063 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear of the motor drive board 3062, and a rear view of the back surface of the back box 3010. It is installed in the lower left corner and relays the connection between the main control board and each winning hole sensor, each winning hole solenoid, etc. That the panel relay board 3064, and a.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back peripheral decoration unit 3080 mounted along the upper side and the left side at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back movable operation unit mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. 3100, a lower back front movable production unit 3200 attached below the opening 3010a near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable production attached to the right of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A unit 3300, a back left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a unit below the opening 3010a and behind the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010. Movable back-down movable effect unit 3500, back-up movable effect unit 3100 and back-under movable operation in the back box 3010 A back corners movable direction unit 3600 attached to the respective left and right sides of the output unit 3500, and a.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The back box 3010 is a box-shaped liquid crystal mounting that has a box-shaped opening at the front and penetrates the rear wall in a square shape, and a frame-shaped projection that protrudes rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. The portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside toward the outside on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view, and the left fixing piece 1501 of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view. A cutout portion 3010d that is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 is provided in the vertical center of the left side.

  The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in such a size that the central liquid crystal display device 1500 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the rear surface of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be vertically slidable.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 in a state where the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

  Although not described in detail, the back box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes for mounting the movable effect units and the like formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Lower left ball passage unit]
Next, the lower left ball passage unit 3030 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 is attached to the rear box 3010 at a portion corresponding to the rear of the side unit 2200. The lower left spherical passage unit 3030 is formed in an L shape in which a side extending vertically in a front view is shorter than a side extending leftward and rightward, and the inside is formed hollow. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 has three entrances 3031 that are open to the front and allow game balls to pass therethrough. These three entrances 3031 are formed at positions corresponding to the three guiding portions 2205a in the side unit 2200.

  This lower left sphere passage unit 3030 has a hollow interior that is inclined so as to become lower toward the right side in front view, and the game balls that have entered through the three entrances 3031 are discharged downward near the right end of the lower surface. It A general winning opening sensor 3050 is attached to the lower left sphere passage unit 3030, and the gaming ball entering the inside from the entrance 3031 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3050 attached to the lower left ball passage unit 3030.

[5-9c. Lower right ball passage unit]
Next, the lower right ball passage unit 3040 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is attached to the rear box 3010 at a portion corresponding to the rear of the attacker unit 2300. This lower right sphere passage unit 3040 is open to the front and has a first entrance 3041 into which a game sphere received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 can enter, and a back right movable effect unit 3300 described later. The second entrance 3042 which is opened directly below the discharge opening 3303a which is opened on the lower surface of the second opening, and the second entrance 3042 which is opened rightward and upward in a front view of the second entrance 3042 and is opened upward. It is provided with a third entrance 3043 through which the game ball discharged through the discharge passage 2555 flowing through the escape passage 2555 of the accessory 2500 can enter.

  The lower right ball passage unit 3040 discharges the game balls that have entered the first entrance 3041, the second entrance 3042, and the third entrance 3043 downward through independent passages. A general winning opening sensor 3050 for detecting a game ball that has entered the first entrance 3041 is attached to the lower right ball passage unit 3040. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3050 attached to the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

[5-9d. Back edge decoration unit]
Next, the back peripheral decoration unit 3080 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The back peripheral decoration unit 3080 is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front end of the back box 3010 at portions corresponding to the upper, left, and lower left of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. This back edge decoration unit 3080 is attached to the rear side of the back edge decoration member 3081 and a rear edge decoration member 3081 having a light-transmitting property extending in a C shape, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. And a substrate cover 3083 that covers the back of the back edge decoration substrate 3082 and is attached to the rear side of the back edge decoration member 3081.

  The back edge decoration unit 3080 can cause the LED on the back edge decoration substrate 3082 to emit light as appropriate to cause the back edge decoration member 3081 to emit light. Further, when the game board 5 is assembled, the front surface of the back peripheral edge decoration member 3081 can be seen from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1110, and the outside of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a is decorated.

[5-9e. Back movable production unit]
Next, the back-up movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 102 to 116. FIG. 102 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 102 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit seen from the back. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. In addition, FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the back decoration unit of the back movable production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 106 is the rear decoration unit of the back movable production unit that is disassembled from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back upper sub-decoration body in the back upper movable decoration unit. FIG. 108 is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism when the back decoration unit of the back movable production unit is in the retracted position, and FIG. 109 is the back decoration unit of the back movable production unit. FIG. 110 is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism at the appearance position, and FIG. 110 is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism at the second appearance position of the back side decorative body unit of the back side movable effect unit.

  Further, FIG. 111 (a) is a front view showing a part of the internal mechanism of the back-up movable effect unit, and FIG. 111 (b) is a perspective view of a part of the internal mechanism different from (a) as seen from the front. , (C) are perspective views of (b) viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the movement of the internal mechanism of the back side movable effect unit. Further, FIG. 113 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state of main members constituting the internal mechanism at the retracted position, and FIG. 113 (b) shows a state in which the first transmission member is rotated from the state of (a) and FIG. 114 (c) is an explanatory view showing a state where the transmission of rotation to the transmitted member is started, and FIG. 114 (c) shows a state in which the first transmitted member further rotates together with the first transmitted member from the state of FIG. 113 (b). It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the upper decoration body unit is descending toward the 1st appearance position from a retracted position, (d) further rotates a 1st transmission member with a 1st transmission member from the state of (c). It is an explanatory view showing a state in which the transmission of rotation to the first transmitted member is completed and the back decorative body unit has reached the first appearance position.

  Further, in FIG. 115 (e), the second transmission member of the transmission mechanism that was rotating together with the first transmission member from the state of FIG. 114 (d) is further rotated, and the rotation is transmitted to the second transmitted member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which was started, (f) is a 2nd transmission member with a 2nd transmission member rotating from the state of (e), and the back decoration unit is a 2nd appearance position from a 1st appearance position. FIG. 116 (g) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the second transmitted member and the second transmitted member rotate from the state of FIG. 115 (f) while descending toward and is rotated. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the body unit is rotating, further descending toward a 2nd appearance position, and (h) is a 2nd transmission member and a 2nd to-be-transmitted member further rotates from the state of (g). Then, the transmission of the rotation to the second transmitted member is completed, and the back decoration unit is at the first appearance position. While descending from the state is an explanatory view showing a state that has reached the second occurrence position by half turn.

  The back-up movable effect unit 3100 is mounted in the back box 3010 above the opening 3010a. The back-up movable production unit 3100 forms a space between a unit base 3101 attached in the back box 3010 and extending left and right, and a unit base 3101 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3101. A rear cover 3102, and a back drive motor 3103 attached to the front surface near the right end of the unit base 3101 in a front view and having a rotation shaft penetrating the unit base 3101 and projecting between the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102. , Are provided.

  Further, the back side movable effect unit 3100 includes a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3104 fixed to the rotation shaft of the back side drive motor 3103, and a spur gear-shaped first large diameter gear 3105a meshed with the drive gear 3104. , And a first small diameter gear 3105b which is smaller in diameter than the first large diameter gear 3105a and rotates integrally with the first large diameter gear 3105a on the rear side of the first large diameter gear 3105a. The first driven gear 3105 arranged on one side, the second large diameter gear 3106a in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the first small diameter gear 3105b of the first driven gear 3105, and a smaller diameter than the second large diameter gear 3106a. Has a second small diameter gear 3106b that rotates integrally with the second large diameter gear 3106a on the front side of the second large diameter gear 3106a, and is arranged to the left of the first driven gear 3105 in front view. It has a second driven gear 3106 and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3107a that meshes with the second small-diameter gear 3106b of the second driven gear 3106, and is arranged to the left of the second driven gear 3106 in front view. It has a first transmission member 3107 and a second transmission gear 3108a in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the first transmission gear 3107a of the first transmission member 3107, and is arranged to the left of the first transmission member 3107 in front view. The second transmission member 3108 is provided (see FIG. 111A and the like).

  The first driven gear 3105, the second driven gear 3106, the first transmission member 3107, and the second transmission member 3108 are rotatable between the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102 by the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102. Installed.

  The first transmission member 3107 includes a cylindrical first transmission pin 3107b that protrudes forward from the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge in the front surface of the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3107a, and the revolution of the first transmission pin 3107b. Between the disk-shaped first lock protrusion 3107c protruding forward from the front surface of the first transmission gear 3107a concentrically with a radius smaller than the radius, and between the first lock protrusion 3107c and the first transmission pin 3107b, On the outer peripheral surface of the first lock protrusion 3107c, from an even range to both sides with an axis connecting the center of the first transmission gear 3107a and the center of the first transmission pin 3107b as boundaries, toward the center of the first lock protrusion 3107c. And a first cutout 3107d that is cut out in a fan shape.

  The second transmission member 3108 is a cylindrical second transmission pin 3108b protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the second transmission gear 3108a having a spur gear shape in parallel with the rotation axis, and the revolution of the second transmission pin 3108b. Between the disk-shaped second lock protrusion 3108c, which protrudes concentrically forward from the front surface of the second transmission gear 3108a with a radius smaller than the radius, and between the second lock protrusion 3108c and the second transmission pin 3108b, On the outer peripheral surface of the second lock protrusion 3108c, from an even range to both sides with an axis connecting the center of the second transmission gear 3108a and the center of the second transmission pin 3108b as a boundary toward the center of the second lock protrusion 3108c. The second cutout portion 3108d is cut out in a fan shape.

  The first transmission gear 3107a and the second transmission gear 3108a of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are formed to have the same diameter. The first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 have the same cylindrical diameter and the same revolution radius. The first lock protrusion 3107c and the second lock protrusion 3108c of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are formed to have the same diameter. Furthermore, the first notch 3107d and the second notch 3108d of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are 72 degrees with respect to the circumferences of the first lock protrusion 3107c and the second lock protrusion 3108c. It is formed in a fan shape within the angle range.

  Further, in the back movable production unit 3100, a cylindrical slide shaft 3109 having a lower end attached to the unit base 3101 on the front surface near the left end in front view of the unit base 3101 and extending vertically, and an upper end of the slide shaft 3109. A shaft mounting member 3110 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3101, a left slider 3111 mounted on a slide shaft 3109 so as to be slidable up and down, and having a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3111a extending rearward, The rear up / down detection sensor 3112 that detects the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111 and is attached to the unit base 3101, and the upper portion on the front side of the unit base 3101 to the left of the rear drive motor 3103 in front view are attached. , The bottom is the unit base 310 A rail bracket 3113 that extends vertically so as to project downward from the lower surface of the rail, and a slide rail 3114 that has a right slider 3114a that is attached to the left side surface of the rail bracket 3113 in front view and that slides vertically. A rack member 3115 attached to the right slider 3114a of the rail 3114 and having a rack gear 3115a extending vertically, and a flat plate-shaped first movable member having left and right ends attached to the left slider 3111 and the rack member 3115, respectively. And a base 3116.

  Further, the back-side movable effect unit 3100 has a flat plate-shaped first substrate portion 3117a formed in a droplet shape, and a columnar first projecting forward from the droplet-shaped tip of the first substrate portion 3117a. It has an action pin 3117b and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3101 so that the first action pin 3117b revolves at a position on the front surface of the unit base 3101 on the right side of the first transmission member 3107 in front view. A first transmitted member 3117 capable of transmitting rotation of the first transmitting member 3107 and a first bearing slit 3118a into which the first action pin 3117b of the first transmitted member 3117 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction. And a bearing member 3118 attached to the rear surface of the first movable base 3116.

  The first movable base 3116 has an opening 3116a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending from the lower end to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction. On the rear surface of the first movable base 3116, a rack member 3115 is attached to the right of the opening 3116a in front view. The rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 extends along the opening 3116a with the tip of the tooth facing left when viewed from the front.

  The first movable base 3116 is attached so as to be vertically slidable (movable up and down) by a slide shaft 3109 and a slide rail 3114 via a left slider 3111 and a right slider 3114a. Further, the first movable base 3116 is regulated in the vertical position by the first action pin 3117b of the first transmitted member 3117 inserted into the first bearing slit 3118a of the bearing member 3118. Therefore, when the first actuated member 3117b is rotated to revolve the first action pin 3117b and the vertical position of the first action pin 3117b is changed, the first action pin 3117b moves in the first bearing slit 3118a. The first movable base 3116 slides in the vertical direction while sliding in the horizontal direction. That is, when the first transmitted member 3117 is rotated, the first movable base 3116 slides up and down.

  The first substrate portion 3117a of the first transmitted member 3117 has a base circle whose shape in front view is substantially the same as the root diameter of the gear teeth of the second large diameter gear 3106a of the second driven gear 3106, and the base circle thereof. Is formed in a shape (so-called drop shape) mainly composed of two sides extending so as to contact from outside. The first transmitted member 3117 has a center of a base circle of the first base portion 3117a as a rotation center, and the rotation center is arranged coaxially with the center of the second driven gear 3106. The first action pin 3117b projects from the vicinity (intersection of a droplet) where two sides of the first base plate 3117a that are in contact with the base circle intersect.

  The first transmitted member 3117 has a cylindrical first transmitted body portion 3117c having the same diameter as the base circle of the first substrate portion 3117a and protruding rearward from the rear surface of the first substrate portion 3117a, and the first transmitted member 3117c. A first transmission slit 3117d which is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 3117c toward the center and into which the first transmission pin 3107b is slidably inserted, and a first transmission slit 3117d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body portion 3117c. And a pair of first lock recesses 3117e that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center on both sides.

  The first lock recess 3117e is recessed with an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3107c of the first transmission member 3107. Further, the pair of first lock recesses 3117e are formed so that the lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In this first transmitted member 3117, the first transmitted main body portion 3117c has the first transmission pin 3107b and the first lock protrusion 3107c of the first transmission member 3107 when the back movable art production unit 3100 is assembled. The position in the front-back direction is the same. Thereby, the first transmission pin 3107b can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3117d, and the rotation can be transmitted via the first transmission pin 3170b and the first transmission slit 3117d. In addition, a part of the first lock protrusion 3107c can be inserted into the first lock recess 3117e, and a part of the first lock protrusion 3107c is inserted into the first lock recess 3117e. The rotation of the transmitted member 3117 can be restricted (locked).

  Further, the back movable production unit 3100 has a second bearing slit 3119a penetrating forward and backward at the upper end and extending left and right, and a bearing hole 3119b penetrating forward and backward at approximately the center in the vertical direction. The second movable base 3119 is slidably mounted on the rear surface of the first movable base 3116 so that the bearing hole 3119b faces forward from the opening 3116a, and the second movable base 3119 is arranged in front of the first movable base 3116. In addition, there is a shaft portion 3151a that is rotatably inserted into a bearing hole 3119a of the second movable base 3119, and a backside decorative body simulating a head including a face of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The unit 3150 is attached to the rear end of the shaft portion 3151a of the upper decorative body unit 3150 penetrating the second movable base 3119. A spur gear-shaped decorative body rotating gear 3120 meshing with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115, and a flat plate-shaped gear attached to the rear surface of the second movable base 3119 so as to cover the rear side of the decorative body rotating gear 3120. And a cover 3121.

  When the second movable base 3119 is slid relative to the first movable base 3116, the back decoration unit 3150 attached to the bearing hole 3119b of the second movable base 3119 is also moved together with the second movable base 3119. Slide to. At this time, since the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 attached to the first movable base 3116 is meshed with the ornament rotating gear 3120 attached to the shaft portion 3151a of the back ornament unit 3150, When the second movable base 3119 slides, the ornament rotating gear 3120 rotates together with the back ornament unit 3150.

  Further, the back-up movable effect unit 3100 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3101 below the front-view second transmission member 3108 and in front of the unit base 3101 so that the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 can be transmitted. A second transmitted member 3122, a rotation link member 3123 mounted on the front surface of the second transmission member 3122 so as to be slidable in a direction along the rotation surface, and a second transmission member on the front surface of the rotation link member 3123. 3122 is slidably mounted in a direction intersecting the sliding direction with respect to 3122, and is rotatably mounted behind the first movable base 3116, and projects rearward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation. The cylindrical second action pin 312 slidably inserted into the second bearing slit 3119a of the second movable base 3119. Includes a second movable base driving member 3124 to have a, a shaft member 3125 are rotatably mounted relative to the second movable base driving member 3124 first movable base 3116, a.

  The second transmitted member 3122 includes a disk-shaped second substrate portion 3122a rotatably attached to the unit base 3101 and a cylindrical second transmitted body portion 3122b protruding rearward from the peripheral edge of the second substrate portion 3122a. And a second transmission slit 3122c which is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body portion 3122b toward the center and into which the second transmission pin 3108b is slidably inserted, and an outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body portion 3122b. On both sides of the second transmission slit 3122c, a pair of second lock recesses 3122d that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center, and a pair of second lock recesses 3122d that are recessed rearward from the front surface of the second base plate portion 3122a and that are relative to the rotation axis. And a groove-shaped first transmission guide portion 3122e having one end opening to the outer peripheral surface of the second substrate portion 3122a. (See, etc. FIG. 111 (b) and (c)).

  In the second transmitted member 3122, the radius of the second substrate portion 3122a (the second transmitted main body portion 3122b) is shorter than the distance from the rotation center to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108, and the second lock protrusion is formed. It is formed longer than the distance to the outer peripheral surface of 3108c. The second lock recess 3122d is recessed with an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3108c of the second transmission member 3108. The pair of second lock recesses 3122d are formed so that the lines connecting the centers of the recessed arcs and the center of rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  The first guide transmission portion 3122e extends at an angle of 54 degrees with respect to the extending direction of the second transmission slit 3122c. Further, the first guide transmission portion 3122e opens on the peripheral surface in a direction opposite to the direction in which the second transmission slit 3122c opens on the peripheral surface.

  The rotary link member 3123 has a flat plate-shaped link body portion 3123a and a flat plate-shaped link body portion 3123a that projects from the rear surface of the link body portion 3123a and is slidably inserted into the first transmission guide portion 3122e of the second transmitted member 3122. The pair of first transmitted guide portions 3123b, the front protrusion 3123c protruding from the front surface of the link body portion 3123a, and the first transmitted guide portion 3123b extending backward from the front surface of the front protrusion 3123c. And a groove-shaped second transmission guide portion 3123d that extends in a direction intersecting the direction in which both ends are open to the outer peripheral surface of the front protrusion 3123c (FIGS. 111 (b) and (b)). See c) etc.).

  The pair of first transmitted guide portions 3123b of the rotary link member 3123 are provided symmetrically with respect to an axis passing through the center of the link body portion 3123a and eccentrically provided from the center. The second transmission guide portion 3123c is provided on the axis passing through the center of the link body portion 3123a. The first transmitted guide portion 3123b and the second transmitted guide portion 3123c each extend in a direction intersecting at an angle of 95 degrees.

  The second movable base drive member 3124 projects rearward from a position where the second action pin 3124a is eccentric with respect to the center of rotation, and has a drive body 3124b rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116 and a drive body. A second transmitted guide portion that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the portion 3124b, passes through the rotation center, extends at a right angle to the rotation axis, and is slidably inserted into the second transmission guide portion 3123d of the rotation link member 3123. 3124c (see FIGS. 111 (b) and 111 (c), etc.).

  As shown in FIG. 105, FIG. 106, etc., the back upper decorative body unit 3150 includes a decorative body base 3151 having a flat plate-shaped shaft portion 3151 a protruding from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape, and a decorative body base 3151. Is attached to the front surface of the decoration base 3151 and the back decoration 3152 which is three-dimensionally imitating the head of a predetermined character and has two oval openings 3152a. And a C-shaped rear upper decorative body substrate 3153 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  Further, the back decoration unit 3150 is disposed behind the back decoration 3152 at substantially the center of the front surface of the decoration base 3151, and has a cylindrical guide shaft 3154 extending left and right, and both ends of the guide shaft 3154. A pair of shaft brackets 3155 attached to the front surface of the ornament base 3151, and a guide shaft 3154 that is attached so as to be able to be guided to the left and right, and has a vertically extending guide slit 3156a in the lower center of the left-right direction. A slider 3156 for a flat ornamental body and a pair of openings 3152a of the back ornament 3152 attached to the front surface of the slider 3156 for a subordinate ornament are closed, and an ellipse is formed in a portion facing the opening 3152a. Back sub-decoration body 3157 with the sub-decoration 3157a of Includes a backing on a secondary decorative substrate 3158 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the front surface of the decorative body slider 3156 is mounted, the.

  Further, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is attached to the back upper auxiliary drive motor 3159 which is attached near the lower end of the front surface of the decorative base 3151 so that the rotary shaft extends left and right, and to the rotary shaft of the rear upper auxiliary drive motor 3159. The worm gear 3160, a disc-shaped main body 3161a that is rotatably attached to the ornament base 3151 above the worm gear 3156, extends along the outer peripheral surface of the main body 3161a, and meshes with the worm gear 3160. The gear portion 3161b, the extending portion 3161c extending from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 3161a on the side opposite to the gear portion 3161b to the rear of the slider 3156 for a sub-decoration body, and the tip of the extending portion 3161c are projected forward. It is slidably inserted into the guide slit 3156a of the slider 3156 for the sub-decoration body. Columnar slide pin 3161D, a gear member 3161 that has a, and a.

  In the back decoration unit 3150, the two openings 3152a of the back decoration 3152 form the outer circumference of the eyes of a predetermined character, and the sub-decoration body 3157 is a subordinate of the back decoration 3157 that faces forward from the two openings 3152a. The decoration 3157a forms a pupil. The back decoration 3152 and the back sub-decoration 3157 have a light-transmitting property, and are light-emitted and decorated by the LEDs of the back decoration substrate 3153 and the back sub-decoration substrate 3158 which are respectively arranged at the rear side. .

  As shown in the figure, in a normal state, the back decoration unit 3150 is in a state in which the head of a predetermined character, which is encircled by the back decoration 3152, is turned upside down. In addition, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 can slide the back upper auxiliary decorative body 3157 to the left and right with respect to the back upper decorative body 3152 by rotationally driving the back upper auxiliary driving motor 3159. As a result, it is possible to perform a movable effect in which the pupil (sub-decoration 3157a) of the predetermined character, which is embodied by the back decoration 3152, sways left and right.

  Next, the operation of the back side movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. First, the operation of the back side sub-decoration body 3157 in the back side decoration body unit 3150 will be described. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), in a normal state, the extending piece 3161c of the gear member 3161 is attached in a state of vertically extending upward. In this state, the sub-decoration body slider 3156 is located substantially in the center of the sliding range extending to the left and right, and the two sub-decoration bodies 3157 of the back sub-decoration body 3157 attached to the front surface of the sub-decoration body slider 3156 are attached. The decorations 3157a are located substantially in the center of the two openings 3152a of the back decoration 3152, respectively. That is, in a normal state, the predetermined character embroidered by the back decoration 3152 is looking to the front.

  In this normal state, for example, when the worm gear 3160 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the right side view by the back auxiliary drive motor 3159, the gear member 3161b meshed with the worm gear 3160 causes the gear member 3161 to face up. It rotates clockwise and revolves so that the sliding pin 3161d located above the center of rotation moves to the left. By the revolving movement of the sliding pin 3161d to the left, the sliding pin 3161d slides downward in the guide slit 3156a, and the sliding pin 3161d presses the inner surface of the guide slit 3156a to the left, so that the sub decoration The body slider 3156 slides to the left. As a result, the sub-decoration 3157a is moved to the left, so that the predetermined character embroidered by the back decoration 3152 is looking to the left (see FIG. 107 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the worm gear 3160 is rotated counterclockwise in the right side view by the back auxiliary drive motor 3159, the gear member 3161b meshed with the worm gear 3160 rotates the gear member 3161 clockwise in the front view. Then, the sliding pin 3161d positioned above the center of rotation revolves so as to move to the right. By the revolving movement of the sliding pin 3161d to the right, the sliding pin 3161d slides downward in the guide slit 3156a, and the sliding pin 3161d presses the inner surface of the guide slit 3156a to the right, so that the sub decoration The body slider 3156 slides to the right. As a result, the sub-decoration 3157a is moved to the right, so that the predetermined character embodied by the back decoration 3152 is looking to the right (see FIG. 107 (c)).

  In this way, since the subordinate decoration 3157a can be moved to the left and right by the rotational driving of the subordinate auxiliary drive motor 3159, a predetermined character seen by the subordinate decorative body 3152 can be seen depending on the game state. It is possible to perform a movable effect in which the direction in which the user is moving changes. In addition, by moving the sub-decoration 3157a back and forth to the left and right, it is possible to perform a movable effect in which the eyes of a predetermined character, which is embodied by the upper decorative body 3152, are swayed, and a variety of movable effects are presented to the player. can do.

  Next, the raising / lowering operation of the back side decoration unit 3150 in the back side movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. The back upper movable effect unit 3100 of this embodiment can raise and lower the back decoration unit 3150 and rotate the back decoration unit 3150 by 180 degrees.

  First, the internal mechanism of the back side movable effect unit 3100 for moving the back side decoration unit 3150 up and down will be described. As shown in FIG. 108, FIG. 111, etc., a back drive motor 3103 having a rotation axis oriented in the front-rear direction is arranged at the right end in front view. The rotation center of the first driven gear 3105, which meshes with the drive gear 3104 attached to the rotation shaft of the back drive motor 3103, is arranged at the lower left in front view with respect to the rotation center of the drive gear 3104. The center of rotation of the second driven gear 3106 that meshes with the first driven gear 3105 is located at the upper left of the rotation center of the first driven gear 3105 in a front view and substantially at the same height as the center of rotation of the drive gear 3104. There is. In addition, the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107 having the first transmission gear 3107a that meshes with the second driven gear 3106 is the lower left in front view with respect to the rotation center of the second driven gear 3106, and the rotation of the first driven gear 3105. It is located at approximately the same height as the center. Further, the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108 having the second transmission gear 3108a that meshes with the first transmission gear 3107a of the first transmission member 3107 is the upper left in front view with respect to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107. It is arranged at a position higher than the rotation center of the second driven gear 3106.

  The rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117, to which the rotation from the first transmission member 3106 is transmitted, is coaxial with the second driven gear 3106 at the upper right in a front view with respect to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3106. It is located in a position. On the other hand, the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122, to which the rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted, is slightly leftward from directly below in front view with respect to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108, and the rotation center of the second transmission member 3107. It is located lower than the center of rotation. The rotation center of the second movable base drive member 3124, to which the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is transmitted, is arranged on an axis line extending vertically through the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122.

  In the normal state, the back side decorative body unit 3150 is located at the ascending end in the up and down range of elevation, and the top and bottom of the predetermined character that is curled by the back side decorative body 3152 are reversed. In a normal state, most of the back decoration unit 3150 is located behind the center accessory 2500, and only a small part thereof is in the frame of the center accessory 2500, as shown in FIG. 83 and the like. It can be seen from the player side through the inside. That is, the underside decorative body unit 3150 is located at the retracted position where it is almost invisible from the player side in the normal state.

  When the back decoration unit 3150 is in the retracted position, as shown in FIGS. 108 and 113 (a), the first transmission pin 3107b of the first transmission member 3107 is in front of the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107. The second transmission pin 3108b of the second transmission member 3108 is located at the upper left of the view (a position inclined by about 27 degrees to the left from the vertical line), and the upper right of the front view with respect to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108 ( It is located about 13 degrees to the right of the vertical line). Further, at the retracted position, the first action pin 3117b of the first transmitted member 3117 is located at the upper left in front view (a position inclined by about 45 degrees from the vertical line to the left with respect to the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117). ), The first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 has a smaller angle with respect to the horizontal than the axis connecting the first action pin 3117b from the center of rotation (about 72 with respect to the vertical line). Angle of degree) extends toward the upper left of the front view.

  Further, at the retracted position, the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122 extends from the center of rotation toward the upper left in a front view (an angle of about 36 degrees leftward from the vertical line). Further, the second movable base drive member 3124 has a rotation center located above the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 and slightly below the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108, and has a second action. The pin 3124a is located at the upper right in a front view (a position inclined by about 45 degrees from the vertical line to the right) with respect to the rotation center of the second movable base drive member 3124.

  Further, at the retracted position, the first lock protrusion 3107c of the first transmission member 3107 is inserted into the first lock recess 3117e of one of the first transmitted members 3117 (the one closer to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107). ing. As a result, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3117 is restricted (locked), so that the first movable base 3116 does not slide vertically. Further, the second lock protrusion 3108c of the second transmission member 3108 is inserted into the second lock recess 3122d on one side of the second transmitted member 3122 (the side closer to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108). As a result, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is restricted (locked), so the second movable base drive member 3124 does not rotate, and the second movable base 3119 does not slide vertically.

  When the back decoration unit 3150 is in the retracted position, the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111 on which the first movable base 3116 is slidably mounted vertically is detected by the back lift detection sensor 3112.

  In the back side movable effect unit 3100, when the back side decoration motor unit 3150 is in the retracted position and the driving gear 3104 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the back side driving motor 3103, the first driven gear 3105 and the first driven gear 3105 are moved. The first transmission member 3107 rotates in the clockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108 rotates in the counterclockwise direction via the two driven gears 3106 at the same speed. Then, first, the first transmission pin 3107d of the first transmission member 3107 starts to enter the first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 (see FIG. 113 (b)).

  Then, when the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated in the clockwise direction, the first notch portion 3107d is rotated to the position of the first lock concave portion 3117e. The first lock protrusion 3107c is disengaged from the inside of the first lock recess 3117e, and the first transmission pin 3107b abuts on the inner surface of the first transmission slit 3117d to press the first transmission slit 3117d downward. As a result, the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 is transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117, and the first transmitted member 3117 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view. At this time, the first notch 3107d is located at the portion of the first lock recess 3117e, and the first lock protrusion 3107c is disengaged (unlocked) from the inside of the first lock recess 3117e. Therefore, the first transmitted member 3117 rotates without being blocked by the first lock protrusion 3107c (see FIG. 114 (c)).

  When the first transmitted member 3117 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, the first action pin 3117b revolves downward and the first action pin 3117b is slidably inserted. The first movable base 3116 slides downward through the one bearing slit 3118a. Since the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is attached to the first movable base 3116 via the second movable base 3119, the back upper decorative body unit 3105 also slides downward together with the first movable base 3116.

  Since the second transmission guide portion 3123d of the rotation link member 3123 extends vertically when the first movable base 3116 slides downward, it is attached to the first movable base 3116 and the second transmission guide portion 3123d. The second movable base drive member 3214 having the second transmitted guided portion 3124c guided by the first movable base 3116 can move downward together with the first movable base 3116, and the first movable base 3116 slides smoothly.

  Then, when the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, the first transmission pin 3107b is disengaged from the first transmission slit 3117d, and The lock protrusion 3107c enters into the other first lock recess 3117e different from the first lock recess 3117e into which the first lock protrusion 3107c was initially inserted. As a result, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3117 is stopped, and the downward sliding of the first movable base 3116 is stopped (see FIGS. 109 and 114 (d)). In this state, the first movable base 3116 is located at the lower end of the ascending / descending range, and the back decorative body unit 3150 is located at the first appearance position. Further, in the first transmission member 3107, the rotation range in which the first transmission pin 3107b is inserted into the first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 is the first specific rotation range.

  When the back decorative body unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the top and bottom are reversed as in the retracted position, and as shown in FIG. The player is facing the player from within the frame of the center accessory 2500. In the state of the first appearance position, the pair of openings 3152a of the back decoration 3152 and the sub-decoration 3157a facing the opening 3152a can be partially viewed from the player side. As a result, it is possible to present a moving effect in which a predetermined character embellished by the back decoration 3152 is looking upside down from above.

  In the state in which the back decoration unit 3150 is at the first appearance position, the second transmission pin 3108b of the second transmission member 3108 rotating together with the first transmission member 3107 causes the second transmission pin 3108b of the second transmitted member 3122 to transmit the second transmission pin 3108b. It has not reached the slit 3122c. Further, the rotation center of the second movable base drive member 3124 attached to the first movable base 3116 is located below the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122, and the second rotation base member 3123 has the second rotation base member 3124. Only the upper part of the second transmitted guide portion 3124c of the second movable base drive member 3124 is guided with respect to the transmission guide portion 3123d.

  From the state where the back decoration unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction to further rotate the first transmission member 3107 in the clockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108. Is further rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front, the first transmission pin 3107b moves away from the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission pin 3108b enters the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122. Is started (see FIG. 115 (e)).

  Then, when the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the second cutout portion 3108d is rotated to the position of the second lock concave portion 3122d. The second lock protrusion 3108c is disengaged from the inside of the second lock recess 3122d, and the second transmission pin 3108b abuts the inner surface of the second transmission slit 3122c to press the second transmission slit 3122c rightward in front view. As a result, the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted to the second transmitted member 3122, and the second transmitted member 3122 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. At this time, the second notch 3108d is located at the site of the second lock recess 3122d, and the second lock protrusion 3108c is disengaged (lock is released) from the inside of the second lock recess 3122d. Therefore, the second transmitted member 3122 rotates without being blocked by the second lock protrusion 3108c (see FIG. 115 (f)).

  When the second transmitted member 3122 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the first transmission guide portion 3122e formed on the front surface of the second transmitted member 3122 also rotates. The rotary link member 3123 having the first transmitted guided portion 3123b slidably guided also tries to rotate in the same clockwise direction. On the other hand, on the second transmission guide portion 3123d on the front surface of the rotation link member 3123, the upper portion of the second transmitted guide portion 3124c of the second movable base drive member 3124 rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116 slides. It is possible to be guided. As a result, when the rotation link member 3123 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the first transmitted member 3122, the second transmission guide portion 3123d also tries to rotate and the second transmission guide portion 3123d and the second transmitted guide portion 3123d are rotated. An attempt is made to revolve the second movable base drive member 3124 about the rotation link member 3123 via the portion 3124c.

  However, since the second movable base drive member 3124 is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116 and cannot revolve around the rotation link member 3123, the force acting on the second transmitted guide portion 3124c. On the contrary, the rotational link member 3123 tries to revolve around the second movable base drive member 3124 by the reaction force of. At this time, the rotation link member 3123 intersects with the extending direction (first direction) of the first transmission guide portion 3122e and the extending direction (first direction) of the second transmission guide portion 3123d. In the second direction), the rotation link member 3123 can slide in the first direction and the second direction so that the force acting on the rotation link member 3123 becomes small. Becomes Accordingly, the rotation of the rotation link member 3123 and the sliding in the first direction and the second direction transmit the rotation of the first transmitted member 3122 to the second movable base driving member 3124, and the second movable base driving member 3124. The 3124 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 115 (f) to 116 (h)).

  In other words, the rotation link member 3123 is forcibly rotated by the second transmitted member 3122 by the first transmission guide portion 3122e and the first transmitted guide portion 3123b. When the rotation link member 3123 rotates clockwise in a front view, the second transmission guide portion 3123d extending vertically in FIG. 115 (e) is obliquely rotated and inclined so that its upper end moves to the right. (See FIG. 115 (f)). When the second transmission guide portion 3123d rotates and tilts, the second movable base drive member 3124 tries to revolve through the second transmitted guide portion 3124c guided by the second transmission guide portion 3123d, but the second movable base drive member 3124 revolves. Since the base driving member 3124 is attached to the first movable base 3116 and cannot revolve, the reaction force of the force acting from the rotation link member 3123 to the second movable base driving member 3124 causes the rotation link member 3123 to perform the first transmission. It greatly slides toward the open side (right side in front view) along the guide portion 3122e, and slightly slides toward the center of rotation (downward) of the second movable base drive member 3124 along the second transmission guide portion 3123d. Then, the second movable base drive member 3124 rotates at the same angle as the angle at which the second transmission guide portion 3123d is inclined.

  When the second movable base drive member 3124 rotates clockwise in a front view, the second action pin 3124a revolves so as to move downward, and thus the second action pin 3124a is slidably inserted. The second movable base 3119 slides downward through the second bearing slit 3119a. Since the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is attached to the second movable base 3119, the back upper decorative body unit 3105 slides further downward from the first appearance position together with the second movable base 3119. At this time, the back decoration unit 3150 is rotatably attached by the shaft portion 3151a and the bearing hole 3119b of the second movable base 3119, and at the same time, it is attached to the rear end of the shaft portion 3151a. Since the gear 3120 meshes with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 attached to the first movable base 3116, when the second movable base 3119 slides downwards, the decorative body rotating gear 3120 and the rear decorative body are also included. The unit 3150 rotates counterclockwise in a front view (see FIG. 115 (f) and the like).

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the second transmitted member 3122 is further rotated in the clockwise direction via the second transmitting member 3108, the rotation link member 3123 becomes the second transmitted member 3122. It rotates in the clockwise direction at the same angle, slides further toward the open side along the first transmission guide portion 3122e, and the center of the rotation link member 3123 moves second along the second transmission guide portion 3123d. The second movable base drive member 3124 further rotates in the clockwise direction by sliding so as to approach the rotation center of the base drive member 3124. As a result, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 slides further downward together with the second movable base 3119, and the back upper decorative body unit 3150 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction (see FIG. 116 (g)).

  Then, when the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the second transmission pin 3108b is disengaged from the second transmission slit 3122c and the second lock is performed. The protrusion 3108c enters into another second lock recess 3122d different from the second lock recess 3122d into which the second lock protrusion 3108c was initially inserted. As a result, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is stopped, the downward movement of the second movable base 3199 is stopped, and the top and bottom are 180 degrees up and down with respect to the state in which the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is in the first appearance position. It stops in the rotated state (see FIGS. 110 and 116 (h)). In this state, the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 are also positioned at the lower end of the ascending / descending range, and the back decorative body unit 3150 is positioned at the second appearance position. . Further, in the second transmission member 3108, the rotation range in which the second transmission pin 3108b is inserted into the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122 is the second specific rotation range.

  In a state in which the back decoration unit 3150 (back decoration 3152) is in the second appearance position, the second lock protrusion 3108c of the second transmission member 3108 is located inside the second lock recess 3122d of the second transmitted member 3122. Since it is inserted, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is blocked, and the second movable base 3119 does not slide further downward. In the state where the back decoration unit 3150 is in the second appearance position, as shown in FIG. 148, the top and bottom of the predetermined character which is being moved by the back decoration 3152 is in a normal state, and The upper decorative body 3152 is positioned substantially in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500, and almost the entire back upper decorative body 3152 can be visually recognized from the player side.

  When the back decoration unit 3150 descends from the first appearance position to the second appearance position, the back movable design unit 3100 descends while rotating the back decoration 3152 whose top and bottom has been reversed while rotating 180 degrees. Then, the player can be presented with a movable effect that is positioned substantially in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500 (on the front surface of the central liquid crystal display device 1500) in a normal state, which greatly surprises the player. You can

  When the back side decorative body unit 3150 is in the second appearance position and the driving gear 3104 is rotated by the back side driving motor 3103 in the range direction (clockwise direction in front view) different from the above, the back side decorative body unit 3150 is rotated. Reversely moves up through the first appearance position toward the retracted position, and when the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111 is detected by the back up / down lift detection sensor 3112, the drive gear by the back up drive motor 3103 is detected. The rotation of 3104 stops, and the back decoration unit 3150 returns to the retracted position.

  The back side movable effect unit 3100 can raise and lower the back side decoration body unit 3150 in two steps from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and further from the first appearance position to the second appearance position. Separately, the back sub-decoration body 3157 (sub-decoration 3157a) can be slid to the left and right with respect to the back top decoration body 3152 (a direction perpendicular to the top-bottom direction of the back top decoration body 3152). By appropriately combining, it is possible to present various movable effects.

[5-9f. Front and back movable production unit]
Next, the lower back front movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the back. In addition, FIG. 118 (a) is an explanatory view showing the back lower front first decorative body and the back lower front second decorative body of the back lower front movable effect unit from the front in the state of the normal retracted position, and FIG. [Fig. 3] is an explanatory view showing the front lower back front decorative body and the front lower back front decorative body of the front lower back movable effect unit from the front in the appearance position.

  The lower back movable production unit 3200 is arranged below the opening 3101a in the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010. This front lower back movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the front surface of the rear lower back movable effect unit 3500, and a flat unit base 3201. The lower back front drive motor 3202 that penetrates 3201 and protrudes forward, the drive gear 3203 attached to the rotation shaft of the lower back front drive motor 3202, and the drive gear 3203 mesh with the lower right front view. A transmission gear 3204 rotatably attached to the unit base 3201 and a pinion gear 3205 meshing with the transmission gear 3204 from the lower right in a front view and rotatably attached to the unit base 3201 are provided.

  Further, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 has a rack gear 3206a that meshes with the pinion gear 3205 from the right side in front view and extends vertically, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3206b protruding rightward in front view. The rack member 3206 mounted on the unit base 3201 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the rack member 3206 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3201 and including the drive gear 3203, the transmission gear 3204, the pinion gear 3205, and the rack member 3206. A unit cover 3207 that covers from the front, and a back lower front movable detection sensor 3208 that is attached to the unit cover 3207 and that can detect the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206 are provided.

  Further, the lower back front movable effect unit 3200 has a link pin 3209a protruding rearward from a position between the center in the left-right direction in front view and the left end, and the left end in front view is the upper end of the rack member 3206. And a three-dimensionally decorated translucent front first underbody 3209 that is attached to the unit base 3201 and is vertically slidable on the unit base 3201. One front lower back decorative board 3210 attached to the rear surface of one decorative body 3209 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a base plate-shaped front lower back decorative body 3209 and a unit base. It is rotatably attached to the unit base 3201 and the unit cover 3207 near the center of the unit base 3201 in the left-right direction between the unit base 3201 and the link pin 32. A link member 3211 having a link slit 3211a extending in an arc shape, in which 9a is slidably inserted, and a back bottom front that is attached to the tip of the link member 3211 and imitates a predetermined character's hand. A second decorative body 3212 and a lower back front second decorative substrate 3213 mounted on the rear surface of the lower back front decorative body 3212 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

  Next, operations of the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 in the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), in the normal state, the front lower back movable effect unit 3200 descends with respect to the rack member 3206 to which the front lower front decorative body 3209 is attached and the vertical sliding direction. The link member 3211, which is located at the end and to which the second lower back front decorative body 3212 is attached, extends obliquely so that the tip is located slightly above the horizontal.

  In this state, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are located below the frame of the center accessory 2500, and cannot be visually recognized by the player (FIG. 83 etc.). That is, in a normal state, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are in a retracted position invisible to the player. In the state in which the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are in the retracted position, the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206 is detected by the back lower front movable detection sensor 3208.

  In the normal state, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 rotates the drive gear 3203 counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the back lower drive motor 3202, and the pinion gear 3205 rotates counterclockwise. The rack member 3206 is lifted by the rack gear 3206a meshing with the pinion gear 3205. Since the back lower front decorative body 3209 is attached to the upper end of the rack member 3206, the back lower front decorative body 3209 also rises together with the rack member 3206.

  When the back lower front decorative body 3209 rises, the link pin 3209a inserted in the link slit 3211a of the link member 3211 also rises, and thus the link pin 3209a presses the inner surface of the link slit 3211a upwards. By sliding inside, the link member 3211 rotates in a clockwise direction in a front view around the base end. Since the back lower front second decorative body 3212 is attached to the tip of the link member 3211, the back lower front second decorative body 3212 moves upward as the back lower front first decorative body 3209 rises. Rotate to move.

  After that, when the rack member 3206 reaches the rising end, the rotation of the back lower front drive motor 3202 stops, the rising of the front lower back first decorative body 3209 stops, and the rotation of the back lower front second decorative body 3212. Stops. In this state, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), the link member 3211 is in a substantially upright state, and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 is located above the back lower front first decorative body 3209. .

  Further, in the state where the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are raised, as shown in FIG. 148, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are Since it is located in the front view frame of the center accessory 2500, it can be sufficiently viewed from the player side (front). That is, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are in the appearance positions in which they can be visually recognized from the player side. As shown in FIG. 148, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are positioned in front of the back decorative body 3152 of the back movable production unit 3100 in the appearance position. Therefore, it does not come into contact with the upper back decorative body 3152. Further, the back lower front second decorative body 3212 is formed so as to partially overlap with the back upper decorative body 3152 at the second appearance position by being moved to the appearance position.

  In addition, in the state where the front lower back front decoration 3209 and the second front lower back decoration 3212 are in the appearance position, the drive gear 3103 is driven by the front back lower drive motor 3102 in the opposite direction (clockwise direction when viewed from the front). ), The back lower front first decorative body 3209 descends and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 rotates so as to move leftward in front view. When the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206 is detected by the front lower back movement detection sensor 3208, the rotation driving of the front lower back drive motor 3102 is stopped, and the lowering of the front lower front decorative body 3209 is stopped. The rotation of the back lower front second decoration 3212 is stopped, and the back lower front first decoration 3209 and the back lower front second decoration 3212 are returned to the retracted position.

  In this way, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 sets the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 outside the frame (withdrawal position) and inside the frame (appearing position) of the center accessory 2500. Since it can be moved between these, it is possible to surprise the player by making it appear in the frame of the center accessory 2500. Further, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 rises and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 rotates and appears, and the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body Since 3212 and the characters appear in different movements, it is possible to make the illusion that the movement of the movable effect is a complicated movement, and entertain the player.

[5-9 g. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view of the back right movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 119 (b) is a perspective view of the back right movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 120 (a) is a front view of the back right movable effect unit shown with the first decorative surface of the back right rotation decorative body facing the front, and FIG. 120 (b) is a back right rotation decorative body in (a). Is a front view of the back right movable effect unit shown in a state where the shutter is opened, and (c) is a front view of the back right movable effect unit shown with the second decorative surface of the back right rotating decorative body facing the front. Yes, (d) is a front view of the back right movable effect unit shown with the third decorative surface of the back right rotation decorative body facing the front.

  The back right movable effect unit 3300 is attached inside the back box 3010 to the right of the opening 3010a in front view. This back right movable effect unit 3300 is a back right sheet metal base 3301 which is mounted in the back box 3010 and extends vertically in a U shape in front view, and a back right upper base attached to the front upper part of the back right sheet metal base 3301. 3302, a lower back right base 3303 attached to the lower front surface of the lower right sheet metal base 3301, a lower right drive motor 3304 attached to the lower surface of the lower right back base 3303, and a rotational drive by the lower right drive motor 3304. And a cylindrical back right rotation decorative body 3310 that is rotatably attached by a back upper right base 3302 and a back lower right base 3303.

  The back right sheet metal base 3301 is formed of a metal plate. The back upper right base 3302 has a low-cylindrical cover portion 3302a that covers the upper portion of the back right rotating decorative body 3310, and a cutout portion 3302b that is formed by cutting out a predetermined range in the circumferential direction of the cover portion 3302a. .. The back lower right base 3303 has a discharge port 3303a penetrating vertically. The notch 3302b of the back upper right base 3302 is located immediately after the rear discharge port 2554 in the center accessory 2500 in the state where the game board 5 is assembled. Further, the outlet 3303a of the back lower right base 3303 is located directly above the second entrance 3042 of the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

  The back right rotating decorative body 3310 has a first decorative surface 3310a, a second decorative surface 3310b, and a third decorative surface 3310c that divide the outer peripheral surface into three in the circumferential direction. The back-right rotating decorative body 3310 includes an opening 3311 that extends vertically and opens on the first decorative surface 3310a, and a pair of openings 3311 that are closed from the rotation center side and are slidable vertically. 3312, an inner decorative body 3313 attached to the center of the opening 3311 in the vertical direction on the rotation center side of the pair of shutters 3312, and an outer decoration attached to the rotation center side of the inner decoration body 3313 and facing outward. A rear right first decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on a surface thereof and a pair of shutters 3312, which are mounted closer to the rotation center side than the rear right first decorative substrate, approach or separate from each other. And a back right shutter solenoid (not shown) that slides in this manner.

  On the first decorative surface 3310a of the back-right rotating decorative body 3310, usually, a pair of shutters 3312 are close to each other and abutted (see FIG. 120 (a)). Then, when the pair of shutters 3312 are separated from each other by driving the back right shutter solenoid according to the game state, the inside decoration body 3313 faces the outside from between the pair of shutters 3312, and in this state the back right first decoration By causing the LED on the board to emit light, the inner decoration body 3313 that is light-emitted can be shown to the player.

  Although not shown in detail, the second decorative surface 3310b of the back-right rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with a translucent back-right character decoration 3318 in which predetermined characters are formed in a relief pattern. Have On the rotation center side of the second decorative surface 3310b, a back right second decorative board (not shown) having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface facing the outside is attached. The second decorative surface 3310b (back right character decoration 3318) can be illuminated and decorated by the decorative substrate.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), a game ball is opened on the third decoration surface 3310c of the back right rotation decoration 3310 so that the game ball can enter the same height as the cover portion 3302a of the back right base 3302. The back right sphere entrance 3320, which is in communication with the back right sphere entrance 3320, and is also communicable with the discharge port 3303a of the back right lower base 3303, and is located on the rotation center side of the outer peripheral surface. A back right effect space 3321 that can be distributed, a ball guiding member 3322 that is mounted in the back right effect space 3321 and spirally rolls down a game ball that has entered the back right ball entrance 3320, It is provided with a back right third decorative board 3323 which vertically extends adjacent to the right effect space 3321 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  Next, the operation of the back right rotation decorative body 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 will be described. The back-right movable effect unit 3300 can rotate the back-right rotating decorative body 3310 in any direction about the axis extending in the up-down direction by rotating the back-right driving motor 3304. In the back right movable effect unit 3300, in a normal state (first decorative state), the first decorative surface 3310a faces forward as shown in FIG. 120 (a). On the first decorative surface 3310a, a pair of shutters 3312 arranged closer to the rotation center than the opening 3311 normally abut each other to close the opening 3311.

  Further, in the first decoration state, the cutout portion 3302b of the cover portion 3302a in the back upper right base 3302 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decoration surface 3310a. Therefore, when the back right movable effect unit 3300 is in the first decoration state, the rear discharge port 2554 of the center accessory 2500 which coincides with the cutout portion 3302b is also closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decoration surface 3310a. As a result, in the first decoration state, when the game ball is received in the upper prize hole 2006 of the center accessory 2500, the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guideway 2553 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310a. Therefore, the game ball received in the upper prize hole 2006 enters the escape passage 2555 that branches near the rear end of the rear guideway 2553, passes through the escape passage 2555, and passes from the outlet 2556 to the back right ball passage. It is delivered to the third entrance 3043 of the unit 3040, and is discharged downward through the inside of the back right ball passage unit 3040.

  In the back right movable effect unit 3300, when the back right shutter solenoid (not shown) is energized in the first decoration state, the pair of shutters 3312 are vertically separated, and the inner decoration body 3313 is removed from between the pair of shutters 3312. It is in a state of facing the outside (see FIG. 120 (b)). Then, the LED (high-intensity LED) of the back right first decorative substrate (not shown) arranged on the rotation center side of the inner decorative body 3313 is caused to emit light, and the inner decorative body 3313 facing between the pair of shutters 3312 is emitted. To decorate. As a result, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player.

  Further, the back right movable effect unit 3300 may be in a state (second decoration state) in which the second decorative surface 3310b of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 is stopped forward by the rotational driving of the back right driving motor 3304. Yes (see FIG. 120 (c)). In this second decoration state, by illuminating the LED of the back right second decoration substrate (not shown), the back right character decoration 3318 formed of a predetermined character formed on the second decoration surface 3310b can be illuminated. It is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player. Further, in the second decoration state, as in the first decoration state, the cutout portion 3302b of the cover portion 3302a is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the second decoration surface 3310b.

  Furthermore, the back right movable effect unit 3300 may be in a state (third decoration state) in which the third decorative surface 3310c of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 is stopped forward by the rotational driving of the back right driving motor 3304. Yes (see FIG. 120 (d)). In the third decoration state, as shown in the drawing, the back right effect space 3321 through which the game balls can be distributed can be visually recognized from the player side. In the third decoration state, the back right sphere entrance 3320 is located at the cutout portion 3302b of the cover portion 3302a. Therefore, in the third decoration state, the rear outlet 2554 of the center accessory 2500 and the back right sphere inlet 3320 are aligned with each other and the game balls are communicatably communicated with each other.

  Then, in the third decoration state, the game ball received in the upper prize hole 2006 of the center accessory 2500 enters the back right ball entrance 3320 from the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guideway 2553, and the back right effect space 3321. The ball guiding member 3322 arranged in the lower part makes a downward spiral while rotating a plurality of times (here, eight times) around an axis extending vertically in the back right effect space 3321 (see FIG. 175 (a)). . As a result, the game ball received in the upper prize hole 2006 can be made to flow in a spiral shape in the back right effect space 3321, so that the player can visually recognize the game ball received in the upper prize hole 2006. It is possible to increase the expectation for paying out the game balls by receiving the game balls to the upper prize hole 2006, and to entertain the player with the game balls spirally flowing down. Can be suppressed. Also, by letting the game balls received in the upper special winning opening 2006 flow down while rotating in a spiral manner, it is possible that a larger number than the number actually entered in the upper special winning opening 2006 has entered. It also has the effect of making the player illusion.

  After that, the game ball flowing down in the back right effect space 3321 is discharged from the discharge port 3303a of the back lower right base 3303, and enters the second entrance 3042 of the right lower ball guiding unit 3040 which is opened immediately below. After passing through the lower right sphere passage unit 3040, it is discharged into the lower substrate holder 1200.

  Thus, according to the back right movable effect unit 3300, various movable effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

[5-9h. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 123. 121A is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 121B is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as seen from the back. Also, FIG. 122 (a) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit shown with the first decorative surface of the back left rotation decorative body facing the front, and FIG. 122 (b) is the second decoration of the back left rotation decorative body. It is a front view of the back left movable production unit shown in the state where the surface was faced to the front, and (c) is a front view of the back left movable production unit shown in the state where the third decorative surface of the back left rotating decorative body is faced to the front. And (d) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit showing a state in which the back left protruding decoration of the back left rotating decoration is set to the appearance position in the state of (a). Further, FIG. 123 is a sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 122 (a).

  The back left movable effect unit 3400 is attached inside the back box 3010 to the left of the opening 3010a in front view. This back left movable effect unit 3400 is installed in the back box 3010 and has a back left sheet metal base 3401 vertically extending in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and a back left upper base attached to the front upper part of the back left sheet metal base 3401. 3402, the lower back left base 3403 attached to the lower front surface of the rear left sheet metal base 3401, the rear left drive motor 3404 attached to the lower surface of the lower left bottom base 3403, and the rear left drive motor 3404 are driven to rotate, It has a cylindrical left back rotating decoration 3410 rotatably attached by a back left upper base 3402 and a back left lower base 3403. The back left sheet metal base 3401 is formed of a metal plate.

  The back left rotating decorative body 3410 has a first decorative surface 3410a, a second decorative surface 3410b, and a third decorative surface 3410c that divide the outer peripheral surface into three in the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 122 (a), the back left rotation decorative body 3410 has a door decoration 3411 on the first decorative surface 3410a, which is a door-like structure. The back left rotation decorative body 3410 is arranged closer to the rotation center side than the first decoration surface, and has a back left first decoration substrate 3412 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface facing the outside. . The first decorative surface 3410a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the LEDs of the rear left first decorative substrate 3412 to emit light.

  Although not shown in detail, the second decorative surface 3410b of the back left rotating decoration 3410 is formed with a relief-shaped character different from the back right character decoration 3318 of the back right rotating decoration 3310. It has a translucent backside character decoration 3413. On the rotation center side of the second decoration surface 3410b, a back left second decoration board 3414 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface facing the outside is attached. The second decorative surface 3410b (back left character decoration 3413) can be illuminated and decorated.

  Further, on the third decorative surface 3410c of the back left rotation decoration 3410, the back left projection portion 3415 forming the outer peripheral surface and the rotation center side of the back left projection portion 3415 are arranged so as to have a light-transmitting property. The projection film 3416 is provided, and the back left third decorative substrate 3417, which is arranged on the rotation center side of the projection film 3416 and faces the outside, has a plurality of color LEDs mounted thereon. Although not shown, the projection film 3416 has a red pattern projected in red and a blue pattern projected in blue, which are represented by a single color and different from each other, and are red. The part where the design and the blue design overlap is milky white or transparent, and the part other than the red design and the blue design is black or opaque. In this third decoration portion 3410c, in the back left third decoration substrate 3417, a red pattern can be projected on the back left projection portion 3415 by emitting red light, and a blue pattern can be displayed by emitting blue light. It can be projected on the left projection unit 3415.

  Further, on the third decorative surface 3410c, a pair of door members 3420 that are vertically arranged at an end portion of the back left projection portion 3415 near the first decorative surface 3410a and that can be opened and closed, and each door member 3420 A pair of rear left protrusions arranged on the center of rotation side and slidably mounted between a retracted position inside the outer peripheral surface of the rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and an appearance position protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface. A decoration 3421 and a pair of back left decoration solenoids 3422 mounted in the back left rotation decoration 3410 and slidingly driving each back left protruding decoration 3421 are provided.

  The door member 3420 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically as shown in the figure. Although not shown, the door member 3420 is rotatably attached to both ends of the vertically extending side far from the first decorative surface 3410a, and the opposite vertically extending side is the third side. It is opened and closed so as to move to the outside of the decorative surface 3410c. Further, the door member 3420 has a hook-like closing claw 3420a protruding from an inner side surface near a vertically extending side that is rotatably attached.

  The back left protruding decorative body 3421 is attached such that the sliding direction is the left-right direction when the first decorative surface 3410a is directed forward (front). The back left protruding decorative body 3421 is formed in the shape of a shuriken, as shown in FIG. The back left protruding decorative body 3421 projects from the vicinity of the tip in a direction away from the first decorative surface 3410a, and has a closing piece 3421a that can be engaged with the closing claw 3420a of the door member 3420.

  Next, the operation of the back left rotation decorative body 3410 in the back left movable effect unit 3400 will be described. The back left movable effect unit 3400 can rotate the back left rotating decorative body 3410 in any direction by rotating the back left driving motor 3404 about an axis extending in the vertical direction. In the normal state (first decorative state), the back left movable effect unit 3400 is stopped with the first decorative surface 3410a facing forward, as shown in FIG. 122 (a). In this first decorative state, the first decorative surface 3410a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the LEDs of the back left first decorative substrate 3412 to emit light. Since the first decoration surface 3410a is provided with a door decoration 3411 imitating a door, it is possible to make the player think that the door decoration 3411 may be opened by making the first decoration surface 3410a emit light. Therefore, the player's expectation can be increased.

  Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, in a normal state, the back left protruding decoration body 3421 of the back left rotation decoration body 3410 is housed inside the back left rotation decoration body 3410 by the urging force of a spring (not shown). It is located in the retracted position. In this retracted position, the outer surface of the door member 3420 is in the closed state in which the outer surface of the door member 3420 is flush with the third decorative surface 3410c, and the closing piece 3421a of the rear left protruding decorative body 3421 is closed by the closing claw of the door member 3420. It is locked to 3420a. As a result, even if the back left rotating decoration 3410 is swung and the centrifugal force acts on the back left protruding decoration 3421 and the door member 3420, the urging force of the spring (not shown) causes the back left protruding decoration 3421 to appear. It is possible to prevent the sliding of the door member 3420 and to prevent the door member 3420 from opening by locking the closing piece 3421a with the locking claw 3420a.

  Then, when the back left decoration body solenoid 3422 is driven (energized) in the first decoration state, the back left projection decoration body 3421 slides outward while resisting the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the back left projection. The door member 3420 is opened by being pushed by the tip of the ornamental body 3421, and the back left protruding ornamental body 3421 is in an appearance position in which it protrudes outward from the third ornamental surface 3410c. As a result, the back left protruding decoration body 3421 projects from the back left rotating decoration body 3410 that rotates in a cylindrical shape, which can surprise the player. Further, since the pair of back left protruding decorative bodies 3421 can be independently projected, a variety of movable effects can be presented to the player.

  When the driving of the rear left decorative body solenoid 3422 is stopped in the appearance position, the rear left protruding decorative body 3421 slides to the retracted position by a spring (not shown). At this time, the closing piece 3421a is locked by the locking claw 3420a, the door member 3420 can be rotated from the open state to the closed state, and automatically returns to the normal state.

  In addition, the back left movable effect unit 3400 may be in a state (second decoration state) in which the second decorative surface 3410b of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 is stopped forward by the rotational driving of the back left driving motor 3404. Yes (see FIG. 122 (b)). In this second decoration state, the LED on the back left second decoration substrate 3414 is appropriately made to emit light so that the back left character decoration 3413 can be made to emit light, which suggests to the player that an opportunity or the like has arrived. You can

  Furthermore, the back left movable effect unit 3400 may be in a state (third decoration state) in which the third decorative surface 3410c of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 is stopped forward by the rotational driving of the back left driving motor 3404. Yes (see FIG. 122 (c)). In this third decorative state, the LED on the back left third decorative substrate 3417 can cause a red pattern to be projected on the back left projection unit 3415 by emitting red light, and a blue pattern can be emitted by emitting blue light. It can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415. As a result, the pattern projected on the back left projection unit 3415 can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, which can entertain the player and enhance the expectation.

  Thus, according to the back right movable effect unit 3300, various movable effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

[5-9i. Movable production unit under the back]
Next, the back rear movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 136. FIG. 124 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower rear movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 124 (b) is a perspective view of the back lower rear movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the back. In addition, FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the elevating unit of the rear lower back movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the elevating unit of the rear lower rear movable effect unit as seen from the rear. It is a figure. FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the state of the lifting / lowering unit when the back lower back rotating decorative unit is at the lower end position, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows a state from the front.

  Also, FIG. 129 (a) is a front view of the back-bottom rear movable effect unit, (b) is a perspective view of the back-bottom rear movable effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. [Fig. 4] is a perspective view of the rear-bottom rear-revolving decorative body unit of the rear-bottom rear-moving effect unit as seen from behind. Further, FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the rear lower rear rotating decorative body unit as seen from the rear. 132 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 129 (a).

  Further, FIG. 133 (a) is a front view showing a state in which the back lower rear rotating decorative body of the rear lower rear rotating decorative unit is stopped rotating, and FIG. 133 (b) is a rear view lower rotating decorative body front view counterclockwise. It is a front view which shows the state which is rotating to the direction of rotation, (c) is a front view which shows the state just before it rotates in the clockwise direction of a front view, when the back rotation object under rotation is opened. [Fig. 8] is a front view showing a state in which the rear lower back rotating decorative body is rotating clockwise in a front view. FIG. 134 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the drive mechanism related to the back lower rear rotary drive motor in the back lower rear rotating decorative body unit, and FIG. 134 (b) is a rotary damper in the back lower rear rotating decorative body unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of such a differential mechanism, and (c) is the connection which connects the drive mechanism which concerns on the back lower rear rotary drive motor, and the differential mechanism which concerns on the rotary damper in the back lower rear rotary decoration body unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a mechanism.

  Further, FIG. 135 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state of the coupling mechanism when the back lower back rotating decorative body is closed and rotation is stopped, and FIG. 135 (a) is a back lower back rotating decorative body in a counterclockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when rotating in the direction. Further, FIG. 136 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state of the coupling mechanism when the rotating decorative body is closed and rotation is stopped at the back bottom side, and FIG. 136 (b) is a coupling ring of the drive mechanism in a clockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism at the time of rotating, and the back rotating decoration is opening, and (c) is the connection ring of a drive mechanism further rotating in the clockwise direction, and it is a back rotating after decoration. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when a body is completely opened, (d) is a back lower back rotation decoration body of the open state, and is rotating in the clockwise direction with the connection mechanism of a drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism of FIG.

  The lower back movable effect unit 3500 is attached below the opening 3010a in the vicinity of the rear end in the back box 3010. The back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3500 is mounted in the back box 3010 and the front-bottom back movable effect unit 3200 is mounted on the front surface, and a back-bottom rear rotating decorative body vertically moved by the lift unit 3510. And a unit 3550.

  The raising / lowering unit 3510 of the rear lower back movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3511 attached to the front surface of the rear wall below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and the front left lower corner of the unit base 3511. And a rear-bottom rear up-and-down drive motor 3512 whose rotary shaft projects forward through the unit base 3511, and a spur gear-shaped vertical drive gear 3513 attached to the rotary shaft of the rear-under-back rear vertical drive motor 3512. A first transmission gear 3514a in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the lifting drive gear 3513, and a second transmission gear 3514b that rotates integrally with the front surface of the first transmission gear 3514a and that has a smaller diameter than the first transmission gear 3514a. And a transmission gear member 3514 rotatably attached to the unit base 3511, And A member second transmission gear 3514b engaged to and unit base 3511 lifting drive pinion gear 3515 rotatably mounted in and spur gear shape of 3514, and a.

  Further, the elevating unit 3510 has a guide slit 3516a extending vertically in the substantially center of the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3516b protruding leftward from the lower left end in front view. And a lift base 3516, which is mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3510 so as to be slidable up and down, and at the rear surface, which is mounted on the rear surface by a guide slit 3516a so as to slidably move the back and rear rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 up and down. Of the vertical drive rack gear 3517 attached to the rear surface near the left end of the front view and extending vertically and meshing with the elevator drive pinion gear 3515, and the upper end extending vertically and the upper end is the same height as the upper end of the unit base 3511. Fixed-side rack gear 3 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3511 with 18 meshes with the stationary rack gear 3518, and also meshes with the vertically movable movable rack gear 3551b mounted on the rear surface of the rear lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 and rotatably mounted on the elevating base 3516. And an acceleration gear 3519 having a spur gear shape.

  Further, the lifting unit 3510 is mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3511 so as to cover the front of the lifting drive gear 3513, the transmission gear member 3514, the lifting drive pinion gear 3515, and the fixed rack gear 3518 on the left side of the lifting base 3516 in front view. The gear cover left 3520, the rear lower rear elevation detection sensor 3521 attached to the front surface of the gear cover left 3520 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3516b of the elevation base 3516, and the unit on the right side of the elevation base 3516 in front view. A guide pinion gear 3522, which is rotatably attached to the front surface of the base 3511, and a guide pinion gear 3522, which meshes with the guide pinion gear 3522 and extends vertically, are attached to the rear surface of the elevating base 3516 on the right end side in front view. Guide rack gear 3523 and the guide rack gear 3523 The right side of the gear cover 3524, which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3511, and the lower end side of which is attached to the elevating base 3516, and the upper end side of which is attached to the left gear cover 3520 and the right gear cover 3524, respectively. And a pair of assist springs 3525 that urge the upper part of the spring.

  The lifting unit 3510 is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3511 on the right end side in front view of the unit base 3511, and on the rear surface of the substrate base 3526. Rear sensor substrate 3521, rear rear rear rotation drive motor 3553, rear rear rear rotation detection sensor 3570, rear rear rear decoration substrate 3572, motor drive substrate 3062, and rear rear relay substrate relaying the connection to the lamp drive substrate 3060. 3527 and.

  Next, the operation of the elevating unit 3510 in the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3500 will be described. In the normal state, the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3500 is located at the lower end position where the back-bottom rear rear rotating decorative body 3550 is most lowered. In this state of the descending end position, as shown in FIG. 127, at the upper ends of the elevating drive rack gear 3517 and the guide rack gear 3523 attached to the elevating base 3516, the elevating drive pinion gear 3515 and the guide attached to the unit base 3511 are provided. The pinion gears 3522 are in mesh with each other. Further, the acceleration gear 3519 attached to the elevating base 3516 meshes with the lower end of the fixed side rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511, and the movable gear attached to the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550. It meshes with the upper end of the side rack gear 3551b.

  Further, in the state of the lower end position, the guide pin 3552b of the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 inserted into the guide slit 3516a of the elevating base 3516 via the guide bush 3528 is located at the lower end of the guide slit 3516a. ing. Further, in the state of the descending end position, the detection piece 3516b of the elevating base 3516 is detected by the lower back rear elevating / lowering detection sensor 3521, and the pair of assist springs 3525 extend to urge the elevating base 3516 upward. is doing.

  In the rear-bottom rear movable effect unit 3500, when the rear-bottom rear rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is at the lower end position, as shown in FIG. A part is visible from the player side above the stage 2530 in the frame of the center accessory 2500.

  When the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 is at the lower end position, when the rear lower rear raising / lowering drive motor 3512 rotates the raising / lowering drive gear 3513 in the counterclockwise direction in front view, the raising / lowering drive pinion gear 3515 rotates counterclockwise. The elevating drive rack gear 3517 that rotates in the direction and meshes with the elevating drive pinion gear 3515 raises the elevating base 3516. When the lifting base 3516 rises, the acceleration gear 3519 rotatably attached to the lifting base 3516 also rises together with the lifting base 3516. The acceleration gear 3519 meshes with the fixed-side rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511. Therefore, when the elevating base 3516 (acceleration gear 3519) rises with respect to the unit base 3511, the acceleration gear 3519 is opposed to the front view. It will rotate in the clockwise direction.

  Since the accelerating gear 3519 is on the opposite side of the fixed rack gear 3518 and the movable rack gear 3551b attached to the rear lower rotating decorative body unit 3550 is meshed, the accelerating gear 3519 moves counterclockwise. When rotated, the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 rises relative to the elevating base 3516 via the movable rack gear 3551b. At this time, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 rises at a speed twice that of the elevating base 3516 by the acceleration gear 3519 meshing with the stationary rack gear 3518 of the unit base 3511.

  Further, in the elevating unit 3510, in the elevating base 3516, the guide rack gear 3523 on the side opposite to the elevating drive rack gear 3517 meshes with the guide pinion gear 3522 rotatably attached to the unit base 3511. The lift base 3516 can be raised straight without the right end of the base 3516 being twisted. Further, in the elevating unit 3510, since the pair of assist springs 3525 urge the elevating base 3516 upward, the load on the lower back rear elevating drive motor 3512 is reduced. In addition, in the pair of assist springs 3525, the assist spring 3525 on the right side in front view, which is far from the lifting drive rack gear 3517, is extended longer than the assist spring 3525 on the left side, and the biasing force is strengthened. is doing.

  Then, when the under-rear rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is located at the highest raised position, the under-rear rear elevating drive motor 3512 stops. In the state of this raised end position, as shown in FIG. 128, the guide pin 3552b of the back lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is located at the upper end of the guide slit 3516a of the elevating base 3516. Further, in the state of the ascending end position, at the lower ends of the lifting drive rack gear 3517 and the guide rack gear 3523 attached to the lift base 3516, the lifting drive pinion gear 3515 and the guide pinion gear 3522 attached to the unit base 3511 are respectively arranged. It is in mesh. The acceleration gear 3519 attached to the elevating base 3516 meshes with the upper end of the fixed-side rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511, and the movable gear attached to the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550. The lower end of the side rack gear 3551b is meshed.

  When the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 is at the rising end position, as shown in FIG. 152, the rear lower rear rotating decorative body 3568 is in the frame of the center accessory 2500 (front surface of the central liquid crystal display device 1500) in a front view. ) Is located approximately in the center. When the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 is in the rising end position and the rear lower rear raising / lowering drive motor 3512 rotates the raising / lowering drive gear 3513 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the operation reverse to the above is performed. Then, the rotating decorative body unit 3550 descends and returns to the descending end position.

  Next, the back under-rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 of the back under-rear movable effect unit 3500 will be described. The lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 includes a cylindrical shaft tube portion 3551a extending from the upper portion to the front, and a movable rack gear 3551b extending vertically on the lower rear surface and meshing with the acceleration gear 3159. And a shallow container-shaped decoration body base 3551 that extends vertically and is open at the front, and has a larger diameter than the shaft cylinder portion 3551a of the decoration base 3551 at the top and penetrates the shaft cylinder portion 3551a back and forth. Has a through hole 3552a that is inserted concentrically, and a guide pin 3552b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the lower part to the front and is inserted into the guide slit 3516a of the elevating unit 3510, and the rear is open. The base cover 3552 has a shallow box shape and is attached to the front surface of the ornament base 3551.

  In addition, the under-rear rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 includes a lower-rear rear rotating drive motor 3553 attached to a lower rear surface of the base cover 3552 and a spur gear shape attached to a rotating shaft of the lower-rear rear rotating drive motor 3553. Rotation drive gear 3554, a spur gear-shaped first driven gear 3555 meshed with the rotation drive gear 3554 and rotatably mounted between the ornament base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and a first driven gear. A second driven gear 3556 in the form of a spur gear, which meshes with the 3555 and is rotatably mounted between the ornament base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and the second driven gear 3556, which meshes with the ornament base 3551. And the base cover 3552 are rotatably mounted between the third driven gear 3557 and the third driven gear 3557. A spur gear-shaped fourth driven gear 3558 that is rotatably mounted between the ornament base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and an annular drive ring gear 3559a that meshes with the fourth driven gear 3558. , A plurality of (here, three) engaging projections 3559b that are spaced apart from the front end of the drive ring gear 3559a in the circumferential direction and project forward, and a flange shape that projects outward from the rear end of the drive ring gear 3559a. A drive gear member 3559 having a drive detection piece 3559c that is partially notched in the circumferential direction, four mounting holes 3560a formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and forward from the rear end. The drive gear member 3559 is provided with a plurality of recessed recesses 3560b into which the plurality of engagement protrusions 3559b of the drive gear member 3559 are inserted and engaged. It has substantially the same size as the outer diameter and coupling ring of the ring-shaped formed on the inner diameter 3560, the.

  The outer diameter and the inner diameter of the drive ring gear 3559 and the connecting ring 3560 are smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 3552a of the base cover 3552 and larger than the outer diameter of the shaft tubular portion 3551a of the ornament base 3551. Further, the drive ring gear 3559 and the coupling ring 3560 have the same inner shape. In the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550, the rear lower rear rotating drive motor 3553, the rotation driving gear 3554, the first driven gear 3555, the second driven gear 3556, the third driven gear 3557, the fourth driven gear 3558, and the drive gear member. 3559 and the coupling ring 3560 constitute a drive mechanism 3550A that is directly driven to rotate by the rear lower rear rotation drive motor 3553 (see FIG. 134 (a) and the like).

  Further, the back lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 penetrates the through hole 3552a of the base cover 3552, the connecting ring 3560, and the drive ring member 3559 from the front, and the shaft cylinder portion 3551a of the decorative body base 3551 is inserted. The tubular outer tubular portion 3561a, a plurality of connecting concave portions 3561b which are recessed from the rear end of the outer tubular portion 3561a toward the front and are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction, and the outer tubular portion 3561a in front of the base cover 3552. Has a flat plate-shaped base portion 3561c extending outward from the front end thereof and four guide slits 3561d penetrating the base portion 3561c in the front-rear direction and extending radially around the axis of the outer cylindrical portion. Rotating decorative body base 3561 and the rotating decorative body base 3561 inserted into the outer cylindrical portion 3561a of the rotating decorative body base 3561, and A cylindrical inner cylinder portion 3562a into which the shaft cylinder portion 3551a of the shaft 3551 is inserted, a ring-shaped differential ring gear 3562b formed on the outer periphery of the rear end of the inner cylinder portion 3562a behind the drive gear member 3559, A plurality of connecting projections 3562c, which protrude from the front surface of the ring gear 3562b at intervals in the circumferential direction and are inserted and connected in the connecting recesses 3561b of the rotary decoration base 3561, and the rear end of the differential ring gear 3562b to the outside. The differential gear member 3562, which has a differential detection piece 3562d that protrudes like a flange and is partially notched in the circumferential direction, meshes with the differential ring gear 3562b of the differential gear member 3562. A spur gear-shaped differential transmission gear rotatably mounted coaxially with the fourth driven gear 3558 between the ornament base 3551 and the base cover 3552. 563, a spur gear-shaped damper gear 3564 meshing with the differential transmission gear 3563, and a damper gear 3564 rotatably attached to the damper gear 3564 in a state of imparting rotational resistance to the damper gear 3564. And a rotary damper member 3565 that operates.

  The outer diameter of the outer tubular portion 3561a of the rotary ornament base 3561 is slightly smaller than the inner diameters of the drive gear member 3559 and the coupling ring 3560, and the outer gear portion 3562a allows the drive gear member 3559 and the coupling ring 3560 to rotate. It is installed. The inner diameter of the outer cylinder portion 3561a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the inner cylinder portion 3562a of the differential gear member 3562. The base portion 3561c is formed larger than the through hole 3552a of the base cover 3552. The guide slits 3561d are formed at intervals of 90 degrees with respect to the circumferential direction of the outer tubular portion 3561a.

  The inner cylinder portion 3562a of the differential gear member 3562 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft cylinder portion 3551a of the ornament base 3551, and is rotatably attached by the shaft cylinder portion 3551a. Although not shown in detail, the rotary damper member 3565 imparts rotational resistance to the rotary shaft to which the damper gear 3564 is attached by viscous resistance of the viscous fluid enclosed inside. In the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550, the rotating decorative body base 3561, the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, the damper gear 3564, and the rotating damper member 3565 directly impart rotational resistance to the rotating damper member 3565. The differential mechanism 3550B is configured (see FIG. 134 (b) and the like).

  The lower back rear decorative body unit 3550 has a cylindrical slide pin 3566a penetrating the guide slit 3561d and projecting rearward, and each guide is provided on the front surface of the base portion 3561c of the rotary decorative body base 3561. It has four decoration body sliders 3566 slidably mounted by slits 3561d and a front end hole 3567a penetrating in the front and rear direction and into which a slide pin 3566a of the decoration body slider 3566 is rotatably inserted. While having a base end pin 3567b that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape and is rotatably inserted into the mounting hole 3560a of the connection ring 3560, and has four strip-shaped connection arms 3567, Four undersides that are attached to the front of each ornament slider 3566 and are decorated on the front A rotary decoration member 3568, and a, and four rotation restricting member 3569 which regulates the range of rotation of the connecting arm 3567 is attached to the rear surface of the backing under the rotated decorative body 3568.

  The back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a front view, one of the four vertices is formed at a right angle, and the opposite vertex on the diagonal line passing through the right-angled vertex. Is formed at an acute angle. The lower back rotating decorative body 3568 has its right-angled vertices directed toward the center axis of rotation of the rotating decorative body base 3561, and the diagonal line passing through the right-angled vertices is in the sliding direction of the decorative body slider 3566 (the guide of the rotating decorative body base 3561). It is attached to the decorative body slider 3566 so as to extend in the direction in which the slit 3561d extends. The four rear lower back rotating decorations 3568 can be slid so as to approach and separate from each other by the guide slit 3561d of the rotating decoration base 3561.

  In the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550, the decorative body slider 3566, the connecting arm 3567, the rear lower rear rotating decorative body 3568, and the rotation restricting member 3569 connect the drive mechanism 3550A and the differential mechanism 3550B to rotate. It constitutes the connecting mechanism 3550C which is transmitted (see FIG. 134 (c) and the like).

  Further, the back lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is attached between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and the drive detecting piece 3559c of the drive gear member 3559 and the differential detecting piece 3562d of the differential ring gear 3562 are provided. A rear underside rotation detection sensor 3570 for detecting the rotational position of the fixed decoration base 3571 and a rear end of the rotation decoration base 3561 which penetrates the center of the rotation decoration base 3561 from the front and is attached to the shaft tube portion 3551a of the decoration base 3551. And a back lower rear decorative substrate 3572 mounted on the front surface of the fixed decorative body base 3571 in front of the rotating decorative body base 3561 and rearward of the rear lower rotating decoration body 3568 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof. It is attached to the front surface of the fixed decorative body base 3571 between the rear lower decorative board 3572 and the rear lower rotating decorative body 3568. Cage front decorated is provided with a disk-shaped subplantar after fixing the decorative body 3573 having a light-transmitting property with are subjected.

  Next, the operation of the back under-rear rotating decorative body 3568 of the back under-rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 in the back under-rear movable effect unit 3500 will be described. In the normal state, the back-bottom rear-revolving decorative body unit 3550 has four back-bottom rear-revolving decorative bodies 35 slid to the rotation center side of the rotary decorative body base 3561 and in contact with each other. In the normal state, the drive gear member 3559 is stopped with the notched portion of the drive detection piece 3559c facing leftward in front view (see FIG. 134 (a)). Further, the differential gear member 3562 is stopped with the notched portion of the differential detection piece 3562d facing rightward in front view (see FIG. 134 (b)). Further, in the four connecting arms 3567, an axis line connecting the center of the base end pin 3567b rotatably attached to the attaching hole 3560a of the connecting ring 3560 and the center of the tip end hole 3567a at the tip end of the connecting ring 3560 is formed. A slide pin 3566a of a decorative body slider 3566 that is rotatably attached to a tip hole 3567a and extends so as to contact a circle centered on the rotation center is located on the rotation center side of the guide slit 3561d in the rotary decorative body base 3561. Located at the edge. Further, in the four connecting arms 3567, in a normal state, the distal end holes 3567a are separated from the base end pins 3567b in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 134 (c) and the like).

  In this normal state (see FIG. 135 (a), etc.), when the rotary drive gear 3554 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the rear lower rear rotary drive motor 3553, the coupling ring 3560 together with the drive gear member 3559. Will rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the connecting ring 3560 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the connecting arm 3567 is attached via the base end pin 3567b attached to the attaching hole 3560a, and the tip end hole 3567a of the connecting arm 3567 is attached to the ornament slider. The slide pin 3566a attached to the tip hole 3560a moves inside the guide slit 3561d because the slide pin 3566a attached to the tip end hole 3560a moves in the direction away from the guide slit 3561d of the rotary decoration base 3561 attached via the slide pin 3566a of 3566. At, it tries to slide toward the center of rotation.

  However, in this normal state, the slide pin 3566a is located at the end of the guide slit 3561d on the rotation center side, and cannot slide further toward the rotation center. As a result, the connecting arm 3567 pulls the rotating decorative body base 3561 through the guide slit 3561d so as to rotate in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. Since the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565 acts on the rotary decoration base 3561 via the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, and the damper gear 3564, the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565 is resisted. Then, the rotating decorative body base 3561 rotates in the counterclockwise direction.

  When this rotating ornament base 3561 rotates counterclockwise in the front direction, the slide pin 3566a of the ornament slider 3566 is located at the end of the guide slit 3561d on the rotation center side. The lower back rotating decorative body 3568 attached to the 3566 is rotated toward the center of rotation and in contact with each other (see FIG. 135 (b)). Further, during rotation of the four rear lower back rotating decorations 3568 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the connecting arm 3567 attaches to the decorative body slider 3566 to which the rear lower rear rotating decorations 3568 are attached by the connecting arm 3567. Since the force that slides to the back is applied, the back under-rear rotating decorative body 3568 does not slide outward due to the centrifugal force.

  On the other hand, in a normal state (see FIG. 136 (a), etc.), when the rotary drive gear 3554 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the back lower rear rotary drive motor 3553, it is connected together with the drive gear member 3559. Ring 3560 will rotate in a clockwise direction. When this connecting ring 3560 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction, the connecting arm 3567 slides through the base end pin 3567b attached to the mounting hole 3560a, and the tip hole 3567a of the connecting arm 3567 slides on the ornament slider 3566. The slide pin 3566a attached to the distal end hole 3560a moves through the guide slit 3561d because the slide ornament 3566a attached to the tip hole 3560a moves toward the guide slit 3561d of the rotary decoration base 3561 attached via the pin 3566a. Attempt to rotate the rotating ornament base 3561 in the clockwise direction.

  However, since the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565 acts on the rotary decorative body base 3561 via the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, and the damper gear 3564, the rotary decorative body base 3561 rotates clockwise. Before rotating in the direction of, the slide pin 3566a moves along the guide slit 3561d in the outward direction from the center of rotation (see FIG. 136 (b)). As a result, each slide pin 3566a (decoration body slider 3566) slides outward, so that each back-bottom rearward rotation decoration body 3568 slides outward so as to separate from each other.

  Then, when the connecting ring 3560 further rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front and the mounting hole 3560a reaches the axis of the guide slit 3561d in the rotary decoration base 3561, the connecting arm 3567 extends along the guide slit 3561d. In addition, the side surface of the connecting arm 3567 comes into contact with the rotation restricting member 3569 and the connecting arm 3567 is prevented from further rotating. In this state, the decorative body slider 3566 is slid to the outermost side via the connecting arm 3567, and the rear underside rear rotating decorative bodies 3568 are in the most separated state and opened (see FIG. 136 (c)). ). Further, in the state where the back lower back rotating decoration 3568 is opened, the back lower rear fixed decoration 3573 arranged behind the back lower rotating decoration 3568 is visually recognized between the back lower rotating decorations 3568. It becomes possible (see FIGS. 133 (c) and 133 (d), etc.).

  When the connecting ring 3560 further rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with the back decoration 3568 open, the rotation restricting member 3569 restricts the rotation of the connecting arm 3567. The base 3561 rotates in the clockwise direction against the rotation resistance of the rotation damper member 3565, and the back underside rear rotating decoration body 3568 rotates in the clockwise direction in the opened state (Fig. 136 ( See d)). By opening the backside rotating decorative body 3568, it becomes larger and becomes more conspicuous, which can surprise the player.

  When closing the back lower rear rotating decorative body 3568 in the opened state, by rotating the connecting ring 3567 by the rear lower rear rotating drive motor 3553 in the counterclockwise direction in front view opposite to the above, The lower back rotating ornamental body 3568 slides toward the center of rotation and is in a closed state.

  In this way, the back-bottom rear movable decorative unit 3500 moves the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 to the rising end position to move the back-lower rear rotating decorative body 3568 within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (the game area 5a. ), The rotating decorative body 3568 can be made conspicuous. In this state, when the back-bottom rearward rotating decorative body 3568 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view, it is rotated in the center of the game area 5a, which can surprise the player. Further, when the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 is rotated clockwise in a front view, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 rotates in an opened and enlarged state, which can further surprise the player. , A variety of movable effects can be presented to the player.

[5-9j. Back four corner movable production unit]
Next, the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 145. FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the back four corner movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the back four corner movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the back. Further, FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable effect unit viewed from the front and FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable effect unit from the back. FIG. Also, FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corner second rendering unit in the back four corner movable rendering unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the back four corner movable rendering unit disassembled from the back. FIG.

  Also, FIG. 143 (a) is a front view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable effect unit in the state of the normal retreat position, and FIG. 143 (b) shows the back four corner first decorative body in the appearance position. It is a front view of a back four corners 1st unit, and (c) is a front view of a back four corners 1st unit in the state where a back four corners 2nd decorative body is an appearance position. Further, FIG. 144 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the drive mechanism when the back four corner first decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit from the left side, and FIG. 144 (b) shows the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a drive mechanism in the middle of the back four corners 1st decorative body going to an appearance position from a retracted position, (c) is a back four corners 1st unit, and a back 4 corners 1st decoration body is an appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a drive mechanism at the time from a left side surface. Further, FIG. 145 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the drive mechanism when the back four corner second decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit from the left side surface, and FIG. 145 (b) shows the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a drive mechanism in the middle of the back four corners second decoration body going to an appearance position from a retracted position, (c) is a back four corners second unit, and the back four corners second decoration body is an appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a drive mechanism at the time from a left side surface.

  The back four corner movable effect unit 3600 is attached to four corners outside the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back four corner movable production unit 3600 is a back four corner first unit 3610 attached to the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the four corners of the back box 3010, and a back four corner second unit attached to the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the four corners of the back box 3010. And 3650. The back four corner first unit 3610A attached to the lower left corner is attached to the back four corner first unit 3610A attached to the upper right corner in a state of being rotated by 180 degrees around the axis line extending in the front-rear direction. Further, the back four corner second unit 3650A attached to the lower right corner is attached to the back four corner second unit 3650A attached to the upper left corner in a state of being rotated by 180 degrees around the axis line extending in the front-rear direction.

  Hereinafter, the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610A) attached to the upper right corner and the back four corner second unit 3650 (3650A) attached to the upper left corner will be described, and the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610B) attached to the lower left corner will be described. ) And the rear four-corner second unit 3650 (3650B) attached to the lower right corner are only rotated 180 degrees with respect to those attached to the upper right corner and the upper left corner, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the rear four-corner first unit 3610 is a shallow box-shaped unit base 3611 that is mounted in the back box 3010 and is open at the rear and the bottom, and the front surface of the unit base 3611. Is attached to the left side surface of the motor base 3612 and a shallow box-shaped motor base 3612 whose left side (the one facing the center of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction) is open. It is attached to the front side of the motor base cover 3613 that covers the front side of the open left side surface of the motor base 3612 more than the center in the front-rear direction, and to the left side of the motor base 3612 behind the front side of the motor base cover 3613. Box-shaped motor base cover rear 3614, which is open to the right and front, and the right side surface of the motor base 3612 The rear four-corner drive motor 3615 mounted on the front portion and having the rotation shaft protruding into the motor base 3612, and the motor base cover front 3613 mounted on the rotation shafts of the back four-corner drive motor 3615 cover the left side. And a transmission member 3616 housed in the motor base 3612.

  The transmission member 3616 includes a cylindrical mounting shaft portion 3616a mounted on the rotary shafts of the back four corner drive motor 3615, a disk-shaped base portion 3616b extending from the tip of the mounting shaft portion 3616a in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and a base. A detection piece 3616c protruding rightward from a surface of the portion 3616b facing right, a first transmission portion 3617 provided on the surface of the base portion 3616b facing left, and a base portion. And a second transmission portion 3618 provided on a surface of the 3616b facing the right side.

  The first transmission portion 3617 of the transmission member 3616 includes a cylindrical first transmission pin 3617a protruding leftward in the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the base portion 3616b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b, and an orbit of the first transmission pin 3617a. Between the first lock protrusion 3617b and the first transmission pin 3617a, the first lock protrusion 3617b and the cylindrical first lock protrusion 3617b protruding concentrically to the left from the left surface of the base portion 3616b at a radius smaller than the radius. One lock protrusion 3617b is cut out in a fan shape from a uniform range to both sides with an axis connecting the center of the base portion 3616b and the center of the first transmission pin 3617a on the outer peripheral surface toward the center of the first lock protrusion 3617b. And a first cutout portion 3617c that is cut out.

  The second transmission portion 3618 of the transmission member 3616 includes a cylindrical second transmission pin 3618a protruding rightward from the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the base portion 3616b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b, and the revolution of the second transmission pin 3618a. Between the second lock protrusion 3618b and the second transmission pin 3618a, the second lock protrusion 3618b and the cylindrical second lock protrusion 3618b, which are concentric and protrude rightward from the right surface of the base portion 3616b with a radius smaller than the radius, A fan-shaped notch is formed from an even range to both sides with an axis connecting the center of the base portion 3616b and the center of the second transmission pin 3618a on the outer peripheral surface of the second lock protrusion 3618b toward the center of the second lock protrusion 3618b. The second cutout portion 3618c is formed.

  In the transmission member 3616, the revolution radiuses of the first transmission pin 3617a and the second transmission pin 3618a are the same. Further, the second transmission pin 3618a projects from the first transmission pin 3617a from a position rotated by 180 degrees about the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b. Further, the diameters of the first locking protrusion 3617b and the second locking protrusion 3618b are the same. Further, in the transmission member 3616, the first cutout portion 3617c of the first transmission portion 3617 and the second cutout portion 3618c of the second transmission portion 3618 are formed on the circumferences of the first lock protrusion 3617b and the second lock protrusion 3618b. On the other hand, it is formed in a fan shape within an angle range of 72 degrees.

  The rear four-corner first unit 3610 includes a columnar transmitted shaft member 3619 having both ends attached to the motor base 3612 and the motor base cover rear 3614 at positions behind the transmission member 3616, and the transmitted shaft. The member 3619 has a working arm 3620a that is rotatably attached by penetrating and is rotated by transmitting the rotation from the first transmission portion 3617 of the transmission member 3616 and extending in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a link shaft member 3621 having both ends attached to a motor base 3612 and a motor base cover rear 3614 below the first transmitted member 3620 immediately below the transmitted shaft member 3619. , The link shaft member 3621 is rotatably attached by penetrating the base end side to rotate. A link arm 3622 extending in the same direction as the acting arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620 in a direction perpendicular to the upper end of the first transmitted member 3620, and an upper end rotatably attached to the tip of the operating arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620. The lower end of the link member 3623 and the lower end of the link member 3623 are rotatably attached so that the link arm 3622 extends parallel to the action arm 3620a below the upper end. A back four-corner first decorative body 3624 attached to the front surface and used as a shuriken, and a back four-corner first decorative substrate 3625 attached to the rear surface of the back four corner first decorative body 3624 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface And are equipped with.

  The first transmitted member 3620 has a shaft portion 3620b through which a working arm 3620a extends from the left end and a transmitted shaft member 3619 penetrates, and a right end of the shaft portion 3620b extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A disk-shaped first transmitted main body portion 3620c, a first transmission slit 3620d in which the first transmission pin 3617a is slidably inserted from the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body portion 3620c toward the center, On both sides of the first transmission slit 3620d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body portion 3620c, a pair of first lock recesses 3620e that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center are provided.

  The direction in which the first transmission slit 3620d opens on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body portion 3620c is substantially the same as the direction in which the action arm 3620a extends. The first lock recess 3620e is recessed with an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3617b of the first transmission portion 3617. Further, the pair of first lock recesses 3620e are formed such that the lines connecting the centers of the recessed arcs and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3620 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In this first transmitted member 3620, when the rear four corner first unit 3610 (rear four corner movable effect unit 3600) is assembled, the first transmitted main body portion 3620c is the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617 and The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the first lock protrusion 3617b. Accordingly, the first transmission pin 3617a can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3620d, and the rotation can be transmitted via the first transmission pin 3617a and the first transmission slit 3620d. In addition, a part of the first lock protrusion 3617b can be inserted into the first lock recess 3620e, and a part of the first lock protrusion 3617b is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e. The rotation of the transmitted member 3620 can be restricted (locked).

  The tip of the action arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620 and the tip of the link arm 3622 are rotatably attached to the link member 3623 by link pins 3626, respectively. Further, a link cover 3627 is attached to the upper front portion of the link member 3623. The back four corner first unit 3610 forms a parallel link by the motor base 3612, the action arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620, the link arm 3622, and the link member 3623, and the first transmitted member 3620. By rotating the, the back four corner first decorative body 3624 can be vertically moved up and down via the link member 3623.

  Further, the back four corner first unit 3610 closes the rear end opening of the unit base 3611 and has a flat plate-shaped base cover 3628 attached to the unit base 3611, and a columnar transmitted shaft member extending left and right. It has a second action pin 3629a that revolves around 3619, and is rotatably mounted by the transmission shaft member 3619 penetrating between the motor base 3612 and the first transmission member 3620. The second transmitted member 3629, which is rotated by transmitting the rotation from the second transmitting portion 3618, of the transmitting member 3616, and the second acting pin 3629a of the second transmitted member 3629 revolves around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. And has a first connecting pin 3630a that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape, and is located behind the transmitted shaft member 3619. A rotary connecting member 3630 that is rotatably attached by a space 3611 and a base cover 3628, and a unit base 3611 and a base cover 3628 that are rotatably attached by a unit base 3611 and a base cover 3628 below the rotary connecting member 3630. And a second four-corner second decorative body base 3631 having second connecting pins 3631a protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape at a position eccentric from the center of rotation.

  Further, the back four corner first unit 3610 has one end side rotatably attached to the first connecting pin 3630a of the rotary connecting member 3630 and the other end side of the back four corner second decorative body base 3631. A strip-shaped connecting arm 3632 rotatably attached to the second connecting pin 3631a and a rear four-corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the front surface of the second four-corner second decorative body base 3631 and extending in an arc shape. And a back four corner second decorative substrate 3634 mounted on the back surface of the back four corner second decorative body 3633 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back surface near the tips of the back four corner second decorative body 3633. A substrate cover 3635 that covers a part of the rear four corners of the second decorative substrate 3634 on the rear side, and a detection piece 36 of the transmission member 3616 that is attached to the motor base 3612. A back corner lift detection sensor 3636 that can detect 6c, and a.

  The second transmitted member 3629 has a disk-shaped second transmitted main body portion 3629b centered on the transmitted shaft member 3619 and a second transmitted main body portion 3629b in which the second action pin 3629a projects rightward from the peripheral edge. At the both sides of the second transmission slit 3629c on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body portion 3629b, and the second transmission slit 3629c which is recessed from the outer peripheral surface toward the center and in which the second transmission pin 3618a is slidably inserted. , And a pair of second lock recesses 3629d that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The second transmission slit 3629c of the second transmitted member 3629 has an opening in the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body portion 3629b in a direction opposite to the second action pin 3629a with the transmitted shaft member 3619 interposed therebetween. It is facing. The second lock recess 3629d is recessed with an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3618b of the second transmission portion 3618. Further, the pair of second lock recesses 3629d are formed such that the lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3629 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  The second transmitted member 3629 has the second transmitted main body portion 3629b and the second transmitted pin 3618a of the second transmission portion 3618 and The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the second lock protrusion 3618b. Accordingly, the second transmission pin 3618a can be inserted into the second transmission slit 3629c, and the rotation can be transmitted via the second transmission pin 3618a and the second transmission slit 3629c. Further, a part of the second lock protrusion 3618b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3629d, and a part of the second lock protrusion 3618b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3629d. The rotation of the transmitted member 3629 can be restricted (locked).

  The rotation connecting member 3630 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 3630b in which a first connecting pin 3630a protrudes rearward from a peripheral edge of a rear surface in a fan shape extending in a direction perpendicular to an axis from a rotation center, and a plate from a peripheral portion of the main body portion 3630b to a front side. -Shaped protruding piece 3630c, and a part of the protruding piece 3630c is notched so that the second action pin 3629a of the second transmitted member 3629 is slidably inserted from the front end toward the rear. The second operated portion 3630d is provided.

  The rotation connecting member 3630 has its center of rotation mounted at the same height as the center of rotation of the second transmitted member 3629. In this rotation coupling member 3630, the second actuated member 3629 rotates and the second action pin 3629a revolves, so that the second actuated portion 3630d is pressed by the second action pin 3629a to rotate.

  The back four corners second decorative body 3633 is formed in a shape of the cutting edge of a knife such as a shuriken or a sword, and the side with the narrowed cutting edge is attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3631.

  The back four corner first unit 3610 forms a rotation link with the base cover 3628, the rotation connecting member 3630, the back four corner second decorative body base 3631, and the connecting arm 3632, and when the rotation connecting member 3630 rotates. The second back four corner decorative body bases 3631 rotate in the same direction via the connecting arms 3632. Accordingly, the back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 can be rotated (rotated) such that the tip ends thereof are directed downward.

  Subsequently, the back four corner second unit 3650 is, as shown in FIG. 141 and FIG. 142, a shallow box-shaped unit base 3651 mounted in the back box 3010 and opened at the rear and the bottom, and a unit base 3651. A shallow box-shaped motor base 3652 that is attached to the center of the front surface in the left-right direction and is open on the right side (the one that faces the center of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction), and is attached to the right side surface of the motor base 3652. The motor base 3652 is attached to the front side of the motor base cover 3653, which covers the front side of the open right side surface of the motor base 3652 in the front-rear direction, and to the right side of the motor base 3652 behind the front side of the motor base cover 3653. Box-shaped motor base cover rear 3654 with left and right sides open and left side of motor base 3652 4 corner drive motor 3655 which is attached to the front part of the motor and whose rotary shaft projects into the motor base 3652, and the right side is covered by the motor base cover front 3653 which is attached to the rotary shaft of the back 4 corner drive motor 3655. Thus, the transmission member 3656 accommodated in the motor base 3652 is provided.

  The transmission member 3656 includes a cylindrical mounting shaft portion 3656a mounted on the rotation shafts of the back four-corner drive motor 3655, a disc-shaped base portion 3656b extending from the tip of the mounting shaft portion 3656a in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and a base. A detection piece 3656c that protrudes rightward from the right-facing surface of the portion 3656b, a first transmission portion 3657 provided on the right-facing surface of the base portion 3656b, and a base portion. And a second transmission portion 3658 provided on a surface of the 3656b facing leftward.

  The first transmission portion 3657 of the transmission member 3656 includes a cylindrical first transmission pin 3657a protruding from the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the base portion 3656b to the right in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b, and the revolution of the first transmission pin 3657a. Between the first locking protrusion 3657b and the first transmission pin 3657a, the first locking protrusion 3657b and the cylindrical first locking protrusion 3657b protruding concentrically to the right from the right surface of the base portion 3656b with a radius smaller than the radius, A fan-shaped notch is formed from an even range to both sides of an axis connecting the center of the base portion 3656b and the center of the first transmission pin 3657a on the outer peripheral surface of the one lock protrusion 3657b toward the center of the first lock protrusion 3657b. And a first cutout portion 3657c, which is cut out.

  The second transmission portion 3658 of the transmission member 3656 includes a cylindrical second transmission pin 3658a protruding leftward from the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the base portion 3656b in parallel to the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b, and the revolution of the second transmission pin 3658a. Between the second lock protrusion 3658b and the second transmission pin 3658a, the second lock protrusion 3658b and the cylindrical second lock protrusion 3658b, which are concentric and protrude leftward from the left surface of the base portion 3656b with a radius smaller than the radius, The outer peripheral surface of the second lock protrusion 3658b is notched in a fan shape from an even range to both sides with an axis connecting the center of the base portion 3656b and the center of the second transmission pin 3658a as a boundary toward the center of the second lock protrusion 3658b. The second cutout portion 3658c is formed.

  In the transmission member 3656, the revolution radiuses of the first transmission pin 3657a and the second transmission pin 3658a are the same. In addition, the second transmission pin 3658a projects from the first transmission pin 3657a from a position rotated by 180 degrees about the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b. Further, the diameters of the first locking protrusion 3657b and the second locking protrusion 3658b are the same. Further, in the transmission member 3656, the first cutout portion 3657c of the first transmission portion 3657 and the second cutout portion 3658c of the second transmission portion 3658 are formed on the circumferences of the first lock projection portion 3657b and the second lock projection portion 3658b. On the other hand, it is formed in a fan shape within an angle range of 72 degrees.

  Further, the rear four corner second unit 3650 has a columnar transmitted shaft member 3659 having both ends attached to the motor base 3652 and the motor base cover rear 3654 at positions behind the transmission member 3656, and the transmitted shaft. The member 3659 has a working arm 3660a that is rotatably attached by penetrating and that is rotated by the rotation of the first transmission portion 3657 of the transmission member 3656 and that extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a link shaft member 3651 having both ends attached to the motor base 3652 and the motor base cover rear 3654 below the first transmitted member 3660 immediately below the transmitted shaft member 3659. , The link shaft member 3661 is rotatably attached by penetrating the base end side to rotate. A link arm 3662 extending in the same direction as the action arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660 in a direction perpendicular to the direction, and an upper end rotatably attached to the tip of the action arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660. The lower end of the link member 3663 and the lower end of the link member 3663 are rotatably mounted so that the link arm 3662 extends parallel to the action arm 3660a below the upper end. Back four-corner first decorative body 3664 attached to the front and shuriken, and back four-corner first decorative substrate 3665 attached to the rear surface of back four-corner first ornament 3664 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front And are equipped with.

  The first transmitted member 3660 has a shaft portion 3660b through which a working arm 3660a extends from the left end and a transmitted shaft member 3659 passes through, and a right end of the shaft portion 3660b extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A disk-shaped first transmitted main body portion 3660c, a first transmission slit 3660d in which the first transmission pin 3657a is slidably inserted from the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body portion 3660c toward the center, On both sides of the first transmission slit 3660d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body portion 3660c, a pair of first lock concave portions 3660e that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center are provided.

  The direction in which the first transmission slit 3660d opens to the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body portion 3660c is substantially the same as the direction in which the action arm 3660a extends. The first lock recess 3660e is recessed with an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3657b of the first transmission portion 3657. The pair of first lock recesses 3660e are formed such that the lines connecting the centers of the recessed arcs and the center of rotation of the first transmitted member 3660 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In this first transmitted member 3660, the first transmitted main body portion 3660c is the first transmission pin 3657a of the first transmission portion 3657 and the first transmission pin 3657a in the state in which the back four corner second unit 3650 (the back four corner movable effect unit 3600) is assembled. The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the first lock protrusion 3657b. Accordingly, the first transmission pin 3657a can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3660d, and the rotation can be transmitted via the first transmission pin 3657a and the first transmission slit 3660d. In addition, a part of the first lock protrusion 3657b can be inserted into the first lock recess 3660e, and a part of the first lock protrusion 3657b is inserted into the first lock recess 3660e. The rotation of the transmitted member 3660 can be restricted (locked).

  The tip of the action arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660 and the tip of the link arm 3662 are rotatably attached to the link member 3663 by link pins 3666, respectively. Further, a link cover 3667 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the link member 3663. The back four corner second unit 3650 forms a parallel link by the motor base 3652, the action arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660, the link arm 3662, and the link member 3663, and the first transmitted member 3660. By rotating, the back four corner first decorative body 3664 can be moved up and down via the link member 3663.

  Further, the back four corner second unit 3650 has a flat plate-shaped base cover 3668 attached to the unit base 3651 that closes the rear end opening of the unit base 3651, and a columnar transmitted shaft member that extends left and right. It has a second action pin 3669a that revolves around 3659, and is rotatably attached by the transmission shaft member 3659 penetrating between the motor base 3652 and the first transmission member 3660. The second transmitted member 3669 that is rotated by transmitting the rotation from the second transmitting portion 3658 of the transmitting member 3656 and the second acting pin 3669a of the second transmitted member 3669 revolves around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. And has a first connecting pin 3670a that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape, and is located behind the transmitted shaft member 3659. A rotary connecting member 3670 rotatably attached by a base 3651 and a base cover 3668, and a unit base 3651 and a base cover 3668 below the rotary connecting member 3670 rotatably attached about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. And the second four-corner second decorative body base 3671 having the second connecting pins 3671a protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape at a position eccentric from the center of rotation.

  Further, the back four corner second unit 3650 has one end side rotatably attached to the first connecting pin 3670a of the rotary connecting member 3670, and the opposite end side of the back four corner second decorative body base 3671. A strip plate-shaped connecting arm 3672 that is rotatably attached to the second connecting pin 3671a, and a back four-corner second decorative body 3673 that is attached to the front surface of the back four-corner second decorative body base 3671 and extends in an arc shape. And a back four corner second decorative substrate 3674 mounted on the back surface of the back four corner second decorative body 3673 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back surface near the tips of the back four corner second decorative body 3673. A substrate cover 3675 that covers a part of the rear four corners of the second decorative substrate 3674 on the rear side, and a detection piece 36 of the transmission member 3656 that is attached to the motor base 3652. A back corner lift detection sensor 3676 that can detect 6c, and a.

  The second transmitted member 3669 has a disk-shaped second transmitted main body portion 3669b centered on the transmitted shaft member 3659 and a second transmitted main body portion 3669b with a second action pin 3669a protruding leftward from the peripheral edge. On the both sides of the second transmission slit 3669c on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body portion 3669b and the second transmission slit 3669c into which the second transmission pin 3658a is slidably inserted. , And a pair of second lock recesses 3669d that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The second transmission slit 3669c of the second transmitted member 3669 has an opening in the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body portion 3669b in a direction opposite to the second action pin 3669a with the transmitted shaft member 3659 interposed therebetween. It is facing. The second lock recess 3669d is recessed by an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3658b of the second transmission portion 3658. The pair of second lock recesses 3669d are formed so that the lines connecting the centers of the recessed arcs and the center of rotation of the second transmitted member 3669 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In this second transmitted member 3669, the second transmitted main body portion 3669b has a second transmission pin 3658a of the second transmission portion 3658 and The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the second lock protrusion 3658b. Accordingly, the second transmission pin 3658a can be inserted into the second transmission slit 3669c, and the rotation can be transmitted via the second transmission pin 3658a and the second transmission slit 3669c. Further, a part of the second lock protrusion 3658b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3669d, and a part of the second lock protrusion 3658b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3669d. The rotation of the transmitted member 3669 can be restricted (locked).

  The rotation connecting member 3670 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 3670b in which a first connecting pin 3670a protrudes rearward from a peripheral edge of a rear surface of the main body portion 3670b, and extends from the periphery of the main body portion 3670b to a front side. -Shaped protruding piece 3670c, and a part of the protruding piece 3670c is notched so that the second action pin 3669a of the second transmitted member 3669 is slidably inserted from the front end toward the rear. The second operated portion 3670d is provided.

  The rotation connecting member 3670 is attached such that its rotation center is at the same height as the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3669. In this rotation coupling member 3670, the second actuated member 3669d rotates and the second action pin 3669a revolves, so that the second actuated portion 3670d is pressed by the second action pin 3669a to rotate.

  The back four corner second decorative body 3673 is formed in a shape of a cutting edge of a knife such as a shuriken or a sword, and the side with the thin blade is attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3671.

  The back four corner second unit 3650 forms a rotation link with the base cover 3668, the rotation connecting member 3670, the back four corner second decorative body base 3671, and the connecting arm 3672, and when the rotation connecting member 3670 rotates. The second decoration bases 3671 on the back four corners rotate in the same direction via the connecting arms 3672. Accordingly, the back four corner second decorative body 3673 attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3671 can be rotated (rotated) such that the tip ends thereof are directed downward.

  Next, the operations of the back four corner first decoration bodies 3624 and 3664 and the back four corner second decoration bodies 3633 and 3673 in the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the back four corner movable production unit 3600, the back four corner first unit 3610 and the back four corner second unit 3650 are the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673, the back four corner second decorative substrates 3634 and 3674, and the substrate covers 3635 and 3675. Except for, the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673, the back four corner second decorative substrates 3634 and 3674, and the substrate covers 3635 and 3675 are formed in point symmetry. Therefore, here, only the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610A) at the upper right corner in the front view is used for description, and the other back four corner first unit 3610B and the back four corner second unit 3650 are not described.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (a), the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 (back four corner first unit 3610) is in a state in which the back four corner first decorative body 3624 moving up and down is close to the unit base 3611. In addition, the rotating back four corner second decorative body 3633 extends horizontally. In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the back four-corner first decoration 3624 and the back four-corner second decoration 3633 are located at the retracted position, which is almost invisible to the player.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIGS. 144 (a) and 145 (a), in the transmission member 3616, the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617 is located directly above the center of rotation, and The second transmission pin 3618a of the second transmission portion 3618 is located immediately below the center of rotation. Further, in a normal state, the action arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620 extends obliquely upward and frontward, and the first transmission slit 3620d opens obliquely upward and forward, thus the first transmission slit 3620d. The first locking protrusion 3617b of the first transmission portion 3617 is inserted into the first locking recess 3620e below the. As a result, the back four corner first decoration bodies 3624 are located at the rising ends via the link members 3623, and the first transmitted members 3620 are non-rotatably locked.

  Further, in a normal state, in the second transmitted member 3629, the second action pin 3629a is located obliquely upward and rearward with respect to the rotation center, and the second transmission slit 3629c is opened obliquely downward and forward. The second locking protrusion 3618b of the second transmission portion 3618 is inserted into the second locking recess 3629d above the second transmission slit 3629c. As a result, the back four corner second decorative body 3633 extends substantially horizontally via the rotary connecting member 3630, the connecting arm 3632, and the back four corner second decorative body base 3631, and the second transmitted member 3629 becomes non-rotatable. It's locked. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corner up / down detection sensor 3636.

  In this normal state, when the transmission member 3616 is rotated counterclockwise in left side view so that the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617 is moved rearward by the back four corner drive motor 3615, The transmission pin 3617a revolves so as to move rearward and enters the first transmission slit 3620d of the first transmitted member 3620, and at the same time, the first lock protrusion 3617b is disengaged from the first lock recess 3620e to lock. When released, the first transmitted member 3620 becomes rotatable. Further, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 revolves, and the back four corner up / down detection sensors 3636 are in a non-detection state. When the first transmission pin 3617a further revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the first transmission pin 3617a presses the inner surface of the first transmission slit 3620d downward, and the first transmitted member 3620 moves the transmitted shaft member 3619. It will rotate clockwise around the center.

  When the first transmitted member 3620 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the tip of the working arm 3620a extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis rotates so as to move downward, so that the working arm 3620a moves. The back four-corner first decorative body 3624 moves downward via the link member 3623 attached to the tip (see FIG. 144 (b)). At this time, since the link member 3623 is attached by the parallel link of the action arm 3620a and the link arm 3622, the back four corner first decorative body 3624 moves downward in the same posture.

  On the other hand, in the second transmission portion 3618 of the transmission member 3616, the second transmission pin 3618a revolves in the direction away from the second transmitted member 3629, and the second lock protrusion 3618b is inserted into the second lock recess 3629d. Therefore, the second transmitted member 3629 does not rotate, and the back four corner second decorative body 3633 does not rotate from the retracted position.

  Then, when the first transmission pin 3617a further revolves in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view and comes off the first transmission slit 3620d, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3620 stops, and the back four corners first decoration The downward movement of the body 3624 stops (see FIGS. 143 (b) and 144 (c)). When the first transmission pin 3617a is disengaged from the first transmission slit 3620d, the first lock protrusion 3617b enters into the first lock recess 3620e above the first transmission slit 3620d, and the first lock protrusion 3617b moves the first lock protrusion 3617b. The rotation of the one transmitted member 3620 is locked. Therefore, the first transmitted member 3620 does not rotate any further in the clockwise direction, and the back four corner first decorative body 3624 is maintained in a stopped state. In this state, as shown in FIG. 154, the back four-corner first decorative body 3624 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500, and can be visually recognized from the player side. That is, the back four corners first decorative body 3624 is in the appearance position.

  When the rear four-corner drive motor 3615 rotates the transmission member 3616 in the opposite direction (clockwise in left side view) with the rear four-corner first decorative body 3624 in the appearance position, the reverse of the above is performed. As a result, the first transmitted member 3620 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the back four corners first decorative body 3624 rises via the action arm 3620a, and returns to the normal state (the state of the retracted position). When the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corner up / down detection sensor 3636, the rotation (drive) of the back four corner drive motor 3615 is stopped. In the present embodiment, in the transmission member 3616 (first transmission portion 3617), the rotation range in which the first transmission pin 3617a is inserted into the first transmission slit 3620d is the first specific rotation range.

  In the rear four corner first unit 3610, in the normal state (state of FIG. 145 (a)), the rear four corner drive motor 3615 causes the transmission member 3616 to move the second transmission pin 3618a of the second transmission portion 3618 rearward. Is rotated clockwise in the left side view, the second transmission pin 3618a revolves so as to move rearward, enters the second transmission slit 3629c of the second transmitted member 3629, and at the same time The lock protrusion 3618b is disengaged from the inside of the second lock recess 3629d to release the lock, and the second transmitted member 3629 becomes rotatable. Further, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 revolves, and the back four corner up / down detection sensors 3636 are in a non-detection state. Then, when the second transmission pin 3618a further revolves in the clockwise direction, the second transmission pin 3618a presses the inner surface of the second transmission slit 3629c upward, and the second transmitted member 3629 centers on the transmitted shaft member 3619. It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction.

  When this second transmitted member 3629 rotates counterclockwise in left side view, the second action pin 3629a of the second transmitted member 3629 revolves so as to move downward, and below the second action pin 3629a. With the movement of the rotary coupling member 3630, the rotary coupling member 3630 rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction (counterclockwise direction in front view) so that the second actuated portion 3630d of the rotary coupling member 3630 moves downward. Then, when the rotary connecting member 3630 rotates, the back four corner second decorative body bases 3631 connected by the connecting arms 3632 rotate in the same direction as the rotary connecting member 3630 and are attached to the back four corner second decorative body bases 3631. The second rear four-corner second decorative body 3633 also rotates in the same direction (the direction in which the tip side moves downward, that is, the direction around the anti-hemorrhea in front view) (see FIG. 145 (d)).

  On the other hand, in the first transmission portion 3617 of the transmission member 3616, the first transmission pin 3617a revolves in the direction away from the first transmitted member 3620, and the first lock protrusion 3617b is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e. Therefore, the first transmitted member 3620 does not rotate, and the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 do not move from the retracted position.

  Then, when the second transmission pin 3618a further revolves in the clockwise direction in the left side view and comes off the second transmission slit 3629c, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3629 stops, and the back four corner second decorative body. The downward rotation of the tip side of the 3633 is stopped (see FIGS. 143 (c) and 145 (c)). When the second transmission pin 3618a is disengaged from the second transmission slit 3629c, the second lock protrusion 3618b enters the second lock recess 3629d above the second transmission slit 3629c, and the second lock protrusion 3618b causes (2) The rotation of the transmitted member 3629 is locked. Therefore, the second transmitted member 3629 does not rotate further in the counterclockwise direction, and the back four corner second decorative body 3633 is maintained in a state in which the rotation is stopped. In this state, as shown in FIG. 143 (c), the back four corner second decorative body 3633 is inclined about 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and as shown in FIG. 153, the back four corner second decorative body 3633 is centered. It can be seen from the player side through the frame of the accessory 2500. That is, the second decorations on the back four corners 3633 are in the appearance position.

  When the rear four-corner drive motor 3615 rotates the transmission member 3616 in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in left side view) with the rear four-corner second decorative body 3633 in the appearance position, the reverse operation is performed. The second transmitted member 3629 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the rear four-corner second decorative body 3633 is rotated so as to move upward through the rotary connecting member 3630, the connecting arm 3632, and the like. , Return to the normal state (state of the retracted position). When the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corner up / down detection sensor 3636, the rotation (drive) of the back four corner drive motor 3615 is stopped. In the present embodiment, in the transmission member 3616 (second transmission portion 3618), the rotation range in which the second transmission pin 3618a is inserted into the second transmission slit 3629c is the second specific rotation range.

  As described above, the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 causes the back four corner first decoration bodies 3624 and 3664 to appear and the back four corner second decoration bodies 3633 and 3673 to appear by the rotation of one back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655. With the back four corner first unit 3610A in the upper right corner, the back four corner first unit 3610B in the lower left corner, the back four corner second unit 3650A in the upper left corner, and the back four corner second unit 3650B in the lower right corner, Since they can be operated independently of each other, more various movable effects can be presented to the player, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-10. Movable performance on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 to 154. FIG. 146 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the movable front decoration of the movable front production unit in the center accessory. Further, FIG. 147 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back decoration of the back movable production unit in the back unit is in the first appearance position, and FIG. 148 is a back decoration of the back movable production unit in the back unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows a state in which the body is in the second appearance position and the back lower front first decorative body and the back lower front second decorative body of the back lower front movable effect unit are in the appearing position.

  Also, FIG. 149 shows that a pair of shutters are opened with the first decorative surface of the back-right rotating decorative body of the back-right movable effect unit in the back unit facing forward, and the back-left rotating effect unit of the back-left movable effect unit is rotated. It is a front view of the game board which shows a state in which the back left protruding decorative body is in the appearance position with the first decorative surface of the decorative body facing forward. Further, FIG. 150 is a game board showing the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable effect unit and the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable effect unit in the back unit, with their respective second decorative surfaces facing forward. FIG. Also, FIG. 151 is a game board showing the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable effect unit and the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable effect unit in the back unit with their respective third decorative surfaces facing forward. FIG.

  Further, FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board showing a state where the rear-bottom rear rotating decorative body of the rear-bottom rear movable effect unit in the rear unit is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view at the rising end position. In addition, FIG. 153 shows that the rear-bottom rear rotating decorative body of the rear-bottom rear movable effect unit in the rear unit is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front at the rising end position, and the rear four-corner second rear corner movable second It is a front view of the game board showing the state of the appearance body appearance position. Also, FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing the rear four-corner first decorative body of the rear four-corner movable effect unit in the rear unit in the appearance position.

  As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, in this game board 5, the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, which is arranged in the rear through the frame of the center accessory 2500, is well viewed from the player side in a normal state. can do. Further, in the normal state, the front movable ornament body 2561 of the front movable effect unit 2560 in the center accessory 2500 is elevated, and the first rotary ornament 2572 and the second rotary ornament of the front movable effect unit 2570 are also raised. The body 2573 and the third rotating decorative body 2574 are stopped rotating. Furthermore, in a normal state, the back side decorative body 3152 of the back side movable effect unit 3100 is located at a retracted position above and behind the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a state where the top and bottom are reversed. The center accessory 2500 is projected downward from the upper side of the frame and can be seen from the player side.

  Further, in a normal state, the back lower front first decoration body 3209 and the back lower front second decoration body 3212 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 are behind the lower side of the center accessory 2500 and are visually recognized from the player side. It is located in a difficult escape position. Further, in a normal state, the back right rotation decorative body 3310 and the back left rotation decorative body 3410 of the back right movable effect unit 3300 and the back left movable effect unit 3400 respectively move the first decorative surfaces 3310a and 3410a forward (front). The rotation is stopped in the state of being directed toward, and the pair of shutters 3312 of the back right rotation decoration body 3310 are closed, and the two back left protruding decoration bodies 3421 of the back left rotation decoration body 3410 are rotated to the left left side. It is located at a retracted position invisible in the body 3410.

  Further, in a normal state, the back under-rear rotating decorative body 3568 of the back under-removable movable effect unit 3500 is located at the descending end position, and a part of it can be seen from the player side from the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It faces the frame. Further, in a normal state, the back four corner first decorations 3624 and 3664 and the back four corner second decorations 3633 and 3673 of the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 are within the frame of the center role object 2500 which is difficult to see from the player side. Is also located in the outer retracted position.

  From the normal state, this game board 5 is on the table according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by receiving the game balls in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Movable effect unit 2560, front and bottom movable effect unit 2570, back upper movable effect unit 3100, front lower back movable effect unit 3200, back right movable effect unit 3300, back left movable effect unit 3400, back lower movable effect unit 3500, and The back four corner movable effect unit 3600 performs a predetermined movable effect.

  Specifically, for example, in the front movable art production unit 2560 of the center accessory 2500, the front movable motor 2563 is rotationally driven to lower the front movable decorative body 2561 from the normal position to move the central liquid crystal display device 1500. Position on top of front (see FIG. 146). As a result, by covering the upper part of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 with the front movable decoration 2561, it is possible to make the player think that the game state is changed, and to raise the expectation for the game. be able to.

  Further, in the front and bottom movable effect unit 2570 of the center accessory 2500, the back and bottom drive motor 2575 causes the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 to rotate round and round ( See FIG. 96 (b)). As a result, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

  Further, in the back movable operation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back driving motor 3103 is rotationally driven to lower the back decoration 3152 from the retracted position to the first appearance position in a state where the top and bottom are reversed ( See FIG. 147). In this state, the pair of openings 3152a of the back decoration 3152 and the sub-decoration 3157a facing the opening 3152a can be partially viewed from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. it can. As a result, the predetermined character mocked by the back decoration 3152 looks like it is looking upside down from above, which can surprise the player and entertain the appearance of the character. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Further, in this state, when the back sub-embellishment body 3157 is reciprocally moved to the left and right by the rotation driving of the back top sub-driving motor 3159, the pupil (sub-decoration 3157a ) Will squeeze right and left, which can further surprise the player and entertain the movable production.

  Further, in the back side movable effect unit 3100, with the back side decorative body 3152 in the first appearance position, the back side driving motor 3103 is further driven to rotate to move the back side decoration body 3152 to a further lower second appearance position. (See FIG. 148). When the back decoration 3152 descends from the first appearance position to the second appearance position, the top and bottom of the predetermined character that is engraved by the back decoration 3152 is reversed from the top and bottom to the normal state. Since it descends while rotating, the movement of the back decoration 3152 becomes a dynamic movement, which can strongly attract the interest of the player and can greatly surprise the player.

  When the back decoration 3152 is in the second appearance position, as shown in the figure, the top and bottom of the predetermined character that is being moved by the back decoration 3152 is in a normal state, and the back decoration 3152 is The center accessory 2500 is located substantially in the center of the frame. As a result, the back decorative body 3152 becomes conspicuous in the game area 5a, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be greatly foreseen that an advantageous game state occurs. .. Even in the state of this second appearance position, the rotation of the back auxiliary drive motor 3159 can make the eyes of a predetermined character, which is struck by the back decorative body 3152, flutter left and right, making the player more entertaining. You can

  In this back side movable effect unit 3100, the back side decoration body 3152 is moved up and down between the retracted position and the first appearance position, or moved up and down between the first appearance position and the second appearance position, and the retracted position. It is possible to move up and down between the second appearance position and the second appearance position, and it is possible to prevent the pupils from moving around at the first appearance position and the second appearance position. By combining them, various movable effects can be performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired.

  Further, in the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, when the back upper decorative body 3152 of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is in the second appearance position, the back lower front drive motor 3202 is driven to rotate to the back of the retracted position. The lower front first decorative body 3209 and the lower front second decorative body 3212 are moved to the appearance position located in the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 148). As a result, as shown in the drawing, the front back lower front decorative body 3209 with the hand is positioned in front of the back upper decorative body 3152 with the head (face), so that the predetermined character casts the spell as if it were a spell. Since such a state (as if a mark is tied) is made, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, in a normal state (a state in which the rotation is stopped with the first decorative surface 3310 facing forward), a pair of shutters 3312 are separated by a back right shutter solenoid (not shown). Then, the inner decoration body 3313 is exposed to the front from between the shutters 3312 (see FIG. 149), and the inner decoration body 3313 is illuminated and decorated. As a result, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player.

  Further, in the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right drive motor 3304 causes the back right rotation decorative body 3310 to rotate. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel a sign that the game state is changing, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right drive motor 3304 rotates the back right rotation decorative body 3310 to stop the second decorative surface 3310b forward (front) (see FIG. 150). As a result, the back right character decoration 3318 on the second decoration surface 3310b becomes visible from the player side, and the player can be made aware of the arrival of the chance by the recognition of the back right character decoration 3318.

  Further, in the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right drive motor 3304 rotates the back right rotation decoration body 3310 to stop the third decoration surface 3310c toward the front (front side) (see FIG. 151). As a result, since the ball guiding member 3322 that extends vertically in the back right effect space 3321 can be visually recognized from the player side, the game ball is supplied to the player in the back right effect space 3321. It is possible to make the player think that the upper special prize hole 2006 will open at the time of being played, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

  Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, in a normal state (a state in which the first decorative surface 3410 is turned forward and stopped), the back left decorative body solenoid 3422 is driven to rotate the back left. The back left protruding decorative body 3421 projects outward from the outer peripheral surface of the decorative body 3410 (see FIG. 149). As a result, the back left protruding decoration 3421 is projected from the back left rotating decoration 3410 that rotates in a cylindrical shape, so that it is possible to surprise the player and to think that there is something good. It is possible to raise expectations for the game.

  Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotation decorative body 3410 is rotated by the rotation drive of the back left drive motor 3404. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel a sign that the game state is changing, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left drive motor 3404 rotates the back left rotating decorative body 3410 to stop the first decorative surface 3410a forward (front) (see FIG. 83 and the like). Since the first decoration surface 3410a is provided with a door decoration 3411 imitating a door, the shutter 3312 of the first decoration surface 3310a of the back right rotation decoration body 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 for the player. Similarly, it is possible to make the user think that the door decoration 3411 may be opened, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left drive motor 3404 rotates the back left rotating decorative body 3410 to stop the second decorative surface 3410b forward (front) (see FIG. 150). As a result, the back left character decoration 3413 on the second decoration surface 3410b becomes visible from the player side, and the player can be made aware of the arrival of the opportunity by recognizing the back left character decoration 3413.

  Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left drive motor 3404 rotates the back left rotating decorative body 3410 to stop the third decorative surface 3410c toward the front (front) (see FIG. 151). Then, although illustration is omitted, in this state, when the red light is emitted by the LED of the back left third decorative substrate 3417, the red pattern can be projected on the back left projection portion 3415, and the blue light is emitted. Then, the blue pattern can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415. As a result, the pattern projected on the back left projection unit 3415 can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, which can entertain the player and enhance the expectation.

  The back right movable effect unit 3300 and the back left movable effect unit 3400 rotate the back right rotation decoration body 3310 and the back left rotation decoration body 3410 at the same time, so that the left and right ends (in the frame of the center accessory 2500). Movable effects can be performed on both the left and right sides of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the rotating back-right rotating decorative body 3310 and back-left rotating decorative body 3410 enhance the player's expectation and suppress a decrease in interest. be able to. In addition, by appropriately selecting the decorative surface for which the back right rotation decoration 3310 and the left left rotation decoration 3410 are stopped to rotate, it is possible to make the pattern of the movable effect diversified and prevent the player from getting tired. .

  Further, in the rear-bottom rear movable effect production unit 3500 of the rear unit 3000, the rear-bottom rear rear elevation drive motor 3512 is rotationally driven to move the rear-bottom rear rear rotating decorative body 3568 to an ascending end position which is substantially the center within the frame of the center accessory 2500. Raise to. Then, when the back lower rear rotating decorative body 3568 is at the rising end position, the back lower rear rotating drive motor 3553 rotates the back lower rear rotating decorative body 3568 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view (see FIG. 152). ). As a result, the back underside rear rotating decorative body 3568, which is slightly desired to the player side above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, rises and is positioned in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player It can surprise you and make you think there is something good, and you can raise your expectations for the game. In addition, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, whereby the player can further increase his / her expectation for the game.

  Further, in the rear-bottom rear movable effect unit 3500, when the rear-bottom rear-rotating decorative body 3568 is at the rising end position, the rear-bottom rear-rotating drive motor 3553 rotates the rear-bottom rear-rotating decorative body 3568 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front. When this is done, the four back-bottom rear rotating decorations 3568 are opened so as to be separated from each other and rotate in a large state (see FIG. 153). As a result, the diameter of the back-bottom rearward rotating decorative body 3568 is larger than that when rotating counterclockwise, so that the player's expectation for the game can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 are located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 from the retracted position by the rotational driving of the back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655. Move up and down to the appearance position (see FIG. 154). As a result, the appearance of the four back four-corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 can surprise the player and suggest the arrival of a chance.

  In the back four corner movable effect unit 3600, the back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655 are rotationally driven to move the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 from the retracted position to the appearance position located in the frame of the center accessory 2500. (See FIG. 153). As a result, four back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 that radially extend around the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500 appear, which can surprise the player and do something good. It can be thought that there is it, and it can raise expectations for the game. In the back four corners movable rendering unit 3600, when the back bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 of the back lower rear movable rendering unit 3500 is at the rising end position, the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 are rotated to the appearance position, It is possible to make a large shuriken appear in the frame of the accessory 2500 (see FIG. 153). As a result, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous gaming state has occurred, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game as much as possible, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

[6. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board (particularly, the main control MPU mounted on the main control board) will be described. FIG. 155 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), the main control board according to the present embodiment first performs various registers and main control as the processing of step S1 provided that a RAM clear switch (not shown) is operated. Initializes the data stored in the built-in RAM. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed from the power-on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed to save information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) in the main control built-in RAM. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). A recovery process for recovering the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to the initial state by executing the initialization process without executing the restoration process.

  Next, as the process of step S2, a random number, which is the number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, in the main control board according to this embodiment, the first special symbol display is variably displayed on the first special symbol and the second special symbol display is variably displayed on the second special symbol when the variable display is stopped. Special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for lottery processing for display mode, variable random numbers used for lottery processing for a predetermined time (fluctuation time) required for variable display control of the special symbols , Reach random numbers used in a lottery process of whether or not to execute the reach effect as the game effect executed in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and a big hit based on the special random number. The symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) that is used in the lottery process for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined, and the hit that becomes the operation trigger of the second starting door member 2323. Etc. random number is subjected to such a lottery process to drop (usually random), and a random number counter for storing random numbers such.

  In this example, the same reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first winning opening 2002 is won, the second winning opening 2004 is won. Even if the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, the reach effect execution rate can be determined by acquiring the reach random number from a counter with a different range of random numbers. You may make it different, the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol as a reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number, and the second special symbol, different from the first reach determination table. By providing the second reach determination table in which the determination value is set, the execution ratio of the reach effect may be different.

  In the processing of this step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random number (fluctuating random number) among these random numbers that is not related to winning or losing is updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, basically only the process of step S2 is repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms.

  FIG. 155 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register saving process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2305, the first starting opening sensor 2107, the second starting opening sensor 2325, the upper special winning opening sensor 2552, the lower special winning opening sensor 2354, and the general winning opening sensor 3050. Etc., the detection signals from various sensors are input. Then, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random number related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol (special random number, ordinary random number) is updated, and the counter of the random number counter is updated. The operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board, as the process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. Run. In addition, although this special symbol process process will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, the second special symbol process flag, which indicates the progress status of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM) Corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

  Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for a win or loss which is an operation trigger of the second starting opening door member 2323 as a process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU of the main control board is configured such that the driving frequency of the second starting opening door member 2323 becomes higher within a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game state (excluding some big hits). It is configured to execute a lottery process (so-called time saving state). In this embodiment, such a time-saving state is realized by shortening the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbols for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game state.

  Specifically, in the control of the time saving state (called time saving control), the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to one-half (per 100%), and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is set to non- When shortened to a predetermined time (for example, 0.08 seconds) shorter than the time saving state, and the result of the lottery for the ordinary symbols is a hit, the second starting port door member 2323 of the second starting port 2004, for example, The game ball is moved forward for 5.5 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting port 2004, and is then moved back again to disable the game ball to be received in the second starting port 2004.

  On the other hand, in the non-time saving control, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0% and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is set to a predetermined variation time (for example, 5 seconds) to make a second start. The acceptance of the game ball into the mouth 2004 is disabled. Even in the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol may be set to 0% or more. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that in the time saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a win. When it becomes, the second starting port door member 2323 of the second starting port 2004 is advanced for a time shorter than the time saving state, for example, 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting port 2004 again. It may be moved backward to disable the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004.

  In other words, in the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 0%, so in this case, even if the player strikes to the right, it is impossible to win the game ball to the second starting opening 2004. Therefore, in the non-time saving state, a game ball is shot aiming at the left side of the center role object 2500 (so-called "left" so that many game balls are won in the first starting port 2002, not in the second starting port 2004). Striking ”) is preferable.

  On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the probability of winning a normal symbol is 100%, and the second starting port door member 2323 of the second starting port 2004 is advanced for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). In this case, by hitting right, it becomes easy to win the game ball into the second starting opening 2004. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game ball is shot at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that many game balls are won in the second start port 2004, not in the first start port 2002 (so-called "right hitting"). )) Is preferable.

  As the time-saving control, control for increasing the winning probability of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol as compared with the non-time-saving state, control for shortening the time required for the variable display control of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol as compared with the non-time-saving state, the second starting opening 2004 (2) Control for extending the period for advancing the starting port door member 2323 beyond the non-time saving state, control for increasing the number of times for advancing the second starting port door member 2323 of the second starting port 2004 above for the non-time saving state, first Of the control for shortening the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol in the special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device (the time required for the variable display control of the decorative symbol in the central liquid crystal display device 1500) compared to the non-time saving state, Any one or any combination (may be all) may be executed.

  Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board then performs the process of step S16 in the special symbol process process. A process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board or the like is performed. Then, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting the command set in the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board, for example, in the normal symbol process process is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU of the same main control board then performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hole management computer, for example, as the process of step S18.

  Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board performs the processing of step S19, that is, the first starting opening sensor 2107, the second starting opening sensor 2325, the upper special winning opening sensor 2552, and the lower large winning opening sensor 2354. When the detection signals of the general winning opening sensor 3050 and the like are in the ON state, a payout control command is output to the above-mentioned payout control board so that a prize ball corresponding to these signals is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 834 and pays out the prize balls to the player. In this example, when a game ball wins the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port sensor 2107 is turned on, “3 balls”, a game ball wins the second starting port 2004 and the second starting is performed. When the mouth sensor 2325 is turned on, "1 ball", the game ball wins the above-mentioned special winning opening (upper winning opening 2006, lower winning opening 2005), and the upper winning opening sensor 2552 or the lower winning opening sensor 2354 When the state is turned on, "14 balls" are awarded to the general winning opening 2001, and when the general winning hole sensor 3050 is turned on, "10 balls" are awarded to the player. ing.

  Further, the main control MPU of the same main control board then executes a storage process for checking the increase / decrease in the number of holdings as the process of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for allowing the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. Then, after that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control is terminated. Becomes

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control processing is activated every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 156, the main control MPU of this main control board first detects the first starting port sensor 2107. On the condition that the signal is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is stored in the main control RAM. The first starting opening passage processing such as storing in the first special symbol reservation storage area is executed (step S32). In addition, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2325 is in the on state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. A second starting opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is controlled (step S35), and if the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S40) is executed. In the jackpot control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped are “4R normal jackpot”. , "4R latent probability big hit", and "4R probability variation big hit" in a mode that suggests, after opening the lower special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the lower large winning opening 4R big hit game state which repeats the opening and closing pattern (round) which is closed when the above-mentioned big winning hole sensor 2354 detects that 9 game balls have won in 2005 4R big hit game state (only long time open 4R big hit game state It may be called), and the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R sudden big hit". The 16R jackpot gaming state in which the lower winning a prize opening 2005 is opened for a short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then closed is repeated 16 times (sometimes referred to simply as the 16R jackpot gaming state of short-time opening) However, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R probability variation big hit", the lower special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5). Seconds) or after repeating the opening and closing pattern for closing 8 times when 9 gaming balls are won in the lower special winning opening 2005 by the lower large winning opening sensor 2354, the lower large winning opening 2005 is shortened. It is controlled to an 8R big hit game state (sometimes referred to simply as a long open 8R big hit game state) that repeats an opening and closing pattern that is closed 8 hours after opening (for example, 0.5 seconds). However, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests “16R probability variation big hit”, the special winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5). Seconds) or when the upper special winning opening 2006 detects that 9 gaming balls have been won by the upper special winning opening sensor 2552, the opening and closing pattern is repeated 16 times. 16R big hit game state (simply open for a long time) 16R jackpot game state (sometimes called)) to control processing. It is to be noted that the lower big winning hole sensor 2354 detects that the lower big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) as a 4R big hit game state, or that 9 gaming balls have been won in the lower big winning hole 2005. The opening and closing pattern (round) to be closed when repeated is shown four times, but after that, the opening and closing pattern for opening the lower special prize hole 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then closing it is repeated 12 times. By substantially executing the 4R big hit game state control, even if the big hit game state is entered, the opening / closing pattern for controlling opening / closing of the lower special winning opening 2005 is repeated 16 times regardless of the type of the big hit. Good, after 8H big hit game state open the lower big prize hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or that 9 game balls have won the lower big prize hole 2005. The opening / closing pattern for closing when the lower special winning opening sensor 2354 is detected is repeated eight times, and thereafter the opening / closing pattern for closing the lower special winning opening 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is not performed. You may do it. That is, the number of times, etc., is not limited to the above number as long as the number of times of repeating the round in which the game ball can be accepted in the lower special winning opening 2005 is substantially the same.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a left-handed state in which a game based on winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 2002 is mainly executed and a game based on winning of a game ball into the second starting opening 2004 is executed mainly. It is controlled to either one of the right hit state and the right hit state. Specifically, when the time saving control is being executed, the right hit state is controlled, while when the time saving control is not being executed, the left hit state is controlled. In the left-handed state, a maximum long-range jackpot gaming state of up to 8 rounds is executed, and in the right-handed state, a maximum long-round open jackpot gaming state of up to 16 rounds is executed. It is possible to get more prize balls than in the left-handed state.

  Further, in the jackpot control process, after performing the opening control of such a big winning opening (upper winning opening 2006, lower winning opening 2005), each setting process of the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving counter Run. The high-probability flag is a flag that indicates a high-probability state, and is used in a big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 161, which will be described later, and is set until the next big hit occurs (first shown in FIG. 166, which will be described later). Special symbol stop process or second special symbol stop process not shown).

  The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (a low probability time saving state, a high probability time saving state), and a big hit to perform time saving control (a high probability time saving state, a low probability time saving state) after the big hit gaming state ( 4R certainty variation big hit, 16R sudden variation big hit, 8R certainty variation big hit, 16R big hit game condition which is set when the big hit game state ends, when it becomes next big hit, first special design stop processing which is shown in Figure 166 which is mentioned later Alternatively, it is reset by the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  If the jackpot execution flag is not set, on the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of the second special random number stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is "0". (Step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area. On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S37), the second special symbol including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S39). In this way, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned first starting opening passage processing (step S32).

  Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 2107 is in the on state and the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002, as shown in FIG. 157. The main control MPU of the main control board first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board obtains the counter value by the first special holding number counter from the main control internal RAM, and the holding number of the first special symbol is the maximum value (upper limit) based on this counter value. It is determined whether the value is "4" (step S42). In the processing of this step S42, when it is determined that the number of holding of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, in order to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol to the holding state, the following steps The processing of S43 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as a process of step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. Then, the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the number of holding of the first special symbol is the maximum value (when a so-called "fog ball" occurs), the variable display of the first special symbol Control is not newly reserved. That is, each random number obtained in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol non-lottery storage area of the storage area of the main control internal RAM without executing the processing of steps S43 to S44 (step S45), by ending the process, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage processing (step S34).

  Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2325 is in the on state and the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 158. The main control MPU of the main control board first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Then, the main control MPU of the main control board acquires the counter value by the second special holding number counter from the main control internal RAM, and the holding number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether it is "4" (step S52). In the processing of this step S52, when it is determined that the number of holding of the second special symbol is not its maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The processing of S53 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as a process of step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is a second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. Then, the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S52, when it is determined that the number of holding the second special symbol is the maximum value (when a so-called "fog ball" occurs), the variable display of the second special symbol Control is not newly reserved. That is, each random number acquired in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol non-lottery storage area of the storage area of the main control internal RAM without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54 (step S55), by ending the process, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  A command to instruct the number of first special symbols to be reserved in the storage process (step S20) when the number of first special symbols to be reserved changes based on the fact that a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 (first hold) The number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board, and when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004, the above storage processing (step S20). ), A command (second reserved number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the reserved number of the second special symbol is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board. In addition, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, when a random number is stored in the first special symbol non-lottery storage area, the command for notifying the random number (first bubble ball designation command) is also described above. When a random number is stored in the second special symbol non-lottery storage area based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second starting opening 2004 and is set in the memory processing, it is notified to the peripheral control board. The command to perform (second command for specifying a ball) is also set in the above storage processing and transmitted to the peripheral control board. In addition, when the first bubble ball command and the second bubble ball command are transmitted to the peripheral control board in the storage processing, the stored contents of the first special symbol non-lottery storage area and the second special symbol non-lottery storage area are cleared.

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program module, and the random numbers used for the determination. Since the tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. The first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the first special symbol is selected based on the read first special random number and the lottery process or the like is performed for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. Normal processing (step S80)

  2. Based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the determination process of the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. is performed. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81). )

  3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82)

  4. First special symbol variation process to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is stopped (step S83)

  5. The variation control stop mode of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device. First special symbol stop process to stop the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 155).

  FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control MPU of the main control board, first, in step S101. As a process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value by the first special suspended number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation random number) is the same main control built-in RAM Read from. Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM. The random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol holding storage area a to first special symbol holding storage area d), of the starting winning prize to the first starting opening 2002. The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become. Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), depending on the occurrence of a start winning prize for the second starting opening 2004. The random numbers thus extracted are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  Then, after that, as a process of step S105, a big hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

  FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU of the main control board, if the current game state is a high-probability state (high-probability time-short state, high-probability non-time-short state) (step S111), jackpot at high probability shown in FIG. 162 (A) If the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the determination table is selected (step S112), and the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 162 (A) is selected (step S113). The big hit determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 162 (A), the big hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the gaming state is low probability (low probability non-time saving) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). State and low-probability time-saving state) low probability big hit judgment table used, when the gaming state is high probability (high-probability non-time saving state, high probability time-saving state) high-probability time big hit determination And a table. Then, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, one type of the first special random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot was won, and the 399 first types The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that the special random numbers are out of the above range (big hit probability at low probability; 1/400). Further, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing in this example, in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first special random number Similarly to the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison, one type of second special random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot was won, and the 399 types of second special random numbers deviate from the above. The above-mentioned second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that is (big hit probability at low probability; 1/400).

  Further, in the high probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, 10 kinds of first special random numbers coincide with the big hit judgment value, and 390 kinds of first special random numbers are deviated judgment values. The above-mentioned first special random numbers are associated with each other so that they coincide with each other (big hit probability at high probability; 1/40). Further, in this example, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first special random number Similar to the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability that is referred to for comparison with, the 10 kinds of second special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the 390 second special random numbers deviate from the above. The above-mentioned second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that is (a big hit probability at high probability; 1/40). The jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number and the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number (with the same number of jackpot determination values). The jackpot determination value may be different (the jackpot probability is common), or the number of jackpot determination values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the big hit judgment table at the time of low probability and the big hit judgment table at the time of high probability may be made different (both may be made different).

  The main control MPU of the main control board, as a result of the comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, when it is determined to be a jackpot (step S115) The jackpot flag indicating that the variation is a jackpot is set (step S116), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S115 that it is out of alignment, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state. Reach determination table in the high probability time saving state used in the case of, and the reach determination table in the low probability state used when the game state is the low probability state (low probability non-time saving state and low probability time saving state), Is equipped with. Then, in the reach determination table in the high-probability time saving state, one type of reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating that reach, and 71 types of reach random number match the reach determination value indicating that the reach does not reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, a reach determination value indicating that 5 types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state reach is determined. The 67 reach random numbers are associated with the reach random numbers so as to match the reach determination values indicating that the reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is increased in the low probability state than in the high probability time reduction state.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the high-probability non-time saving state, six types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random numbers set in the reach determination table in the high-probability time saving state and the low-probability state should be reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the reach random numbers of 66 types and the reach random numbers of 66 types do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is higher than in the high-probability time-saving state and the low-probability state (low-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state). To be enhanced.

  The main control MPU of the main control board, as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), when it is determined that the reach is lost (step S120), the fluctuation is The reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set, and the process ends (step S121).

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 163, the main control MPU of the main control board, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of one special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 162 (B), and selects the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. The big hit symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is determined by comparing with the symbol determination table (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 162 (B), in the symbol determination table, each random number of symbols (4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 16R sudden variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) respectively The first symbol random number and the second symbol random number) are stored in a form associated with each other. The main control MPU of the main control board determines the type of jackpot by identifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. ing.

In particular,
1. Opening and closing to close after opening the lower prize hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the lower prize hole sensor 2354 that 9 game balls have been won in the lower prize hole 2005. By repeating the pattern four times, the game ball can enter the lower special winning opening 2005 (easy) and is controlled to a 4R big hit game state, and a low probability non-time saving state (so-called normal state) until the next big hit game state occurs. 4R normal big hit to control

  2. Opening and closing to close after opening the lower prize hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the lower prize hole sensor 2354 that 9 game balls have been won in the lower prize hole 2005. By repeating the pattern four times, the game ball can be entered (easy) in the lower big winning opening 2005, and is controlled to a 4R big hit game state, and is controlled to a high probability non-time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs. 4R latent probability big hit to execute the production that is difficult to determine that it is controlled in the probability state

  3. Opening and closing to close after opening the lower prize hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the lower prize hole sensor 2354 that 9 game balls have been won in the lower prize hole 2005. By repeating the pattern 4 times, the game ball can enter the lower special winning opening 2005 (easy) 4R big hit control to the gaming state, and then to the high probability time reduction state until the big hit gaming state occurs

  4. By opening and closing the lower prize hole 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then opening and closing it 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R jackpot game state where it is difficult to enter the lower prize hole 2005, and then 16R sudden hit big hit to control whether it is controlled to a high probability time saving state until a big hit gaming state occurs

  5. Opening and closing to close after opening the lower prize hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the lower prize hole sensor 2354 that 9 game balls have been won in the lower prize hole 2005. After repeating the pattern eight times, open the lower prize hole 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then close the pattern to repeat the opening and closing pattern 8 times to allow the game ball to enter the lower prize hole 2005 (easy ) 8R big hit game state control, 8R probability variation big hit control to high probability time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs

  6. Opening or closing after opening the special winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the above-mentioned special winning opening sensor 2552 that nine game balls have been won in the special winning opening 2006 16R jackpot that allows the game ball to enter the upper jackpot 2006 by repeating the pattern 16 times (easy). It is controlled to the 16R jackpot gaming state, and then controlled to the high probability time saving state until the next jackpot gaming state occurs.

  In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the second starting opening door member 2323 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except for the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display, and the big hits related to the first special symbol (4R normal big hit, 4R latent accuracy big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 16R sudden probability big hit, 8R probability variation) Jackpot) will occur. Similarly, in the right-handed state, no game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 will occur, and the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unless there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol. Only the display is executed, and a big hit (4R regular big hit, 4R latent probability big hit, 4R certainty variation big hit, 16R certainty variation big hit) related to the second special symbol will occur.

  In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, it is possible to repeat the opening / closing pattern for opening the lower special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at the maximum eight times, while it is related to the second special symbol. It is possible to repeat the opening / closing pattern for opening the upper special winning opening 2006 for a long time at the maximum for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times, and further opening the lower large winning opening 2005 related to the first special symbol for a long time ( For example, 28.5 seconds) The opening / closing pattern that repeats 8 times is repeated 8 times, and the upper special winning opening 2006 related to the second special symbol is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) rather than the rate (31%) determined for the 8R probability variation big hit. ) The open / close pattern is repeated 16 times and the rate (63%) determined for the 16R probability variation big hit is set to be about twice as high, so that it is mainly based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004. Technique it is possible to obtain a large amount of prize balls mainly compared to the left-handed state a player based on the winning of the game balls to the first start hole 2002 is executed in a right-handed state which is executed.

  In addition, in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when it is determined to be a 4R normal jackpot, it is determined to be a 4R normal jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol, and when it is determined to be a 4R latent hit jackpot, it is a 4R latent hit jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol. When determined and determined to be 4R certainty variation jackpot, it is determined to be 4R certainty variation jackpot design as a big hit symbol, when it is determined to 16R sudden definite jackpot, it is determined to 16R sudden deduction jackpot design as a jackpot symbol, when it is determined to 8R certain variation jackpot As a big hit design, it is decided to be the 8R probability variation big hit design. Also, although not shown, if the 4R normal big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 4R normal big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and the 4R latent accuracy is determined as the big hit symbol. When it is determined to be a big hit symbol, when it is determined to be 4R certainty variation jackpot, it is determined to be a 4R certainty variation jackpot symbol as a big hit symbol, and when it is determined to be 16R certainty variation jackpot, it is determined to be a 16R certainty variation jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, after determining the deviation symbol as the mode at the time of fluctuation stop of the first special symbol (step S136), count the number of times per big jackpot. The counter is incremented by 1 (step S135b), and the process proceeds to step S137.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board, as the process of step S137, indicates one of the lottery results (type of big hit, out of reach, out of contact (first). One special symbol may be used to instruct the mode of the stopped symbol)) so that determination result notification commands corresponding to the respective lottery results are set so as to be transmitted to the peripheral control board. After that, as the process of step S138, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82), this process ends.

  The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board controls the display of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 based on the received determination result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed and left decoration is performed). It is stopped and displayed in the order of the pattern → the right decorative pattern → the middle decorative pattern (note that the left, middle, and right decorative patterns can be displayed in sync with the same symbol in a variable manner and stopped at the same time)). Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU identifies a 4R normal big hit among the big hits from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stopping pattern) when the variation of the decorative design displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is stopped (stop design). When 4R normal big hit is identified as 4R normal big hit, and the combination of left, middle, and right decorative designs is the same even number among the designs of "0" to "9" In 4R latent probability big hit design (combination in which the left, middle and right decorative designs similar to the 4R normal big hit design are the same even number of the decorative designs of "0" to "9"), the big hit When 4R probability variation big hit is specified, 4R probability variation big hit pattern (combination in which left, middle, and right decorative patterns are all "1" or "9") is determined, and when 16R sudden hit big jackpot is specified 16R sudden big hit 8R certainty variation big hit when 8R certainty variation jackpot is specified among the big hits by deciding on the design (combination including all the designs of left, middle, and right decorative designs "1", "3", and "5") If you decide on the design (combination in which all the left, middle and right decorative designs are "5") and specify the 16R probability variation big hit among the jackpots, the 16R probability variation jackpot design (all the left, middle and right decoration patterns are (7) combination). In addition, when the reach out is specified, a detached pattern accompanied by the reach (a combination of the same symbols whose left and right decorative symbols are "0" to "9" and different inside decorative symbols; reach loss) If it is determined to be a design), and if the removal is specified, it is determined as a removal design without a reach (a combination of the left, middle, and right decorative designs in which at least the left and right decoration designs are different), and changes. When the variable time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the central liquid crystal display device 1500.

  FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board, the jackpot flag is set, as shown in FIG. 164. If it is (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit decided at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If so (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal deviation (reach effect is produced). If it is not executed, select the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of disconnection. (Step S147).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the variation pattern table is started around The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S150). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), this process ends. Thereby, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display only for the variation time thus determined, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is controlled in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the design random number (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The variable random numbers are stored so as to be associated with each other. Then, the main control MPU, of the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, the variation pattern table selected and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process By comparing, by acquiring the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table, the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, of the 241 types of variable random numbers, 164 types of variable random numbers are set as the determination value (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers have a low jackpot expectation. It is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the effects is executed, and 18 kinds of variable random numbers are judgment values (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation is executed. ) Is set as. Note that the super-reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and for a player who desires the occurrence of a big-hit game state, the expectation of the player for the big-hit game state when the super-reach effect is executed is higher. It is getting higher.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of outliers provided corresponding to the first special random number and the first symbol random number and used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, it is common to the non-time saving state and the time saving state. The fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of the outfall, which is provided corresponding to the second special random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, the variation time of 0.3 seconds as a time saving state. Is set, and the fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-time saving state. In this way, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same during the time saving state and during the non-time saving state, and prompts the player to win the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 during the time saving state and the player makes a second start. The time to secure the game ball in the mouth 2004 is secured.

  Further, as described above, in the right-handed state, only an interval that allows one game ball to pass through is provided, and the rolling of the game ball is limited, and it is guided to the gate portion 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 with an extremely high probability. To be done. That is, in the right-handed state, the game ball is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with an extremely high probability, the normal symbol is a hit, and the second starting opening door member 2323 of the second starting opening 2004 is advanced. Then, the game ball is configured to be received in the second starting opening 2004 with an extremely high probability (substantially all of the game balls hit to the right of the center accessory 2500). Further, in the time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to be 100%, and when the ordinary symbol is a hit, the second starting port door member 2323 of the second starting port 2004 is for a long period of time (5.5 in this example). It is maintained in a forwarded state for 2 seconds), and it becomes possible to receive the game ball into the second starting port 2004. It should be noted that in this example, when the player is operating the handle lever 504, game balls are shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Then, when the launched game ball is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is accepted to the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability, so that the second starting port door of the second starting port 2004 is saved in a short time. In the state where the member 2323 moves forward and the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004, the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 2004 occurs at intervals of about 0.6 seconds. In the present example, as described above, the variation pattern table when the second special symbol is out based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 is set to a very short 0.3 second as the variation time in the time saving state. . Further, the interval time from the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol to the start of the variable display again is set to about 0.6 seconds. That is, in the time saving state, the execution interval of the variable display of the second special symbol is extremely shortened compared to the non-time saving state (fluctuation time 12 seconds, interval time 0.6 seconds), and the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 In the winning interval and the time saving state, the difference between the execution interval of the variable display of the second special symbol is narrowed, so even if a large number of game balls are won in the second starting opening 2004 in an extremely short time, the second special symbol Variable display is executed in an extremely short time to prevent an increase in the number of second special symbols held, and in the time saving state, the number of times of variable display per unit time is extremely increased as compared with the non-time saving state. As a result, in the high-probability time saving state in which the shift control to the right-handed state is performed, it is possible to win the next big hit in an extremely short time compared to the previous game machine, and it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls in a short time. , You can improve the enjoyment of the game.

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 165, the main control MPU of the main control board, first, in step S171. As the processing, 1 is subtracted from the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery processing (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the fluctuation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process ends.

  FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 166, the main control MPU of the main control board, first, in step S181. As a process, while performing the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol indicator, the first special symbol is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design according to the stop design is set as a command to the peripheral control board (step S182).

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board, when the jackpot flag is set (step S186), sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game state is started (step S187), jackpot game state The waiting time until the start of (the time for displaying that the big hit game state is started, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being executed is set, and the high probability flag is reset if the high probability flag is set, and if the time saving flag is set. The time saving flag is reset (step S189), and at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S194), this process ends. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a big hit start command (4R normal big hit start command, 4R odd big hit) Start command, 4R probability variable jackpot start command, 16R sudden probability jackpot start command, 8R probability variation jackpot start command, 16R probability variation jackpot start command). Thereby, the effect of the big hit game state according to the kind of big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the lamps / LEDs and the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like.

[7. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, a process executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 167, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 ms has passed, 16 ms has elapsed. The flag T is set, and the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In this 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the lamps / LEDs, the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board. When the 16 ms steady process is finished, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0") in step S502, the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing an example of the 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing of step S601, the command received from the main control board is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the central processing is performed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, the second variation pattern setting process). A control process related to the liquid crystal display device 1500 is executed.

  Also, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing relating to the speakers 130, 222, 262 is executed. In the lamp control processing of step S604, control processing relating to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving substrate 3060 is executed. In the random number updating process of step S606, a process of updating the random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms steady processing ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, immediately after the 16 ms steady process is started, the 16 ms steady process is started from the beginning (command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the 16 ms steady process is completed, the 16 ms steady process is executed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop process and the 16 ms steady process in the sub-main process.

[8. Battle production]
Next, the shortening control at the time of winning, which is a main part of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. 169 and 173 show that the command analysis indicates that the judgment result notification command and the variation pattern command indicating that the reach (reach out of reach, reach) is received when the high probability time saving state is controlled. FIG. 171 to FIG. 173 are timing charts of the battle effect executed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500 when specified in the process (step S601), and FIGS. 171 to 173 show reach when the high probability time saving state is controlled. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a battle effect executed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500 when it is specified in the command analysis processing (step S601) that the determination result notification command indicating that the change command and the variation pattern command have been received. is there.

  In this example, the main character 1500a is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 during the high-probability time saving state, and the left, middle, and right decorative designs are reduced in the lower left portion of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. To perform variable display. Then, when the determination result notification command indicating that the reach is reached and the variation pattern command are received, the enemy character 1500b is exposed so as to face the main character 1500a, and the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b are confronted. Execute battle production. When the received determination result notification command indicates a big hit, a mode in which the main character 1500a wins over the enemy character 1500b is displayed as a result of the battle effect, and when the received determination result notification command indicates a failure, The mode in which the main character 1500a is defeated by the enemy character 1500b as a result of the battle effect is displayed.

  Further, in the above-mentioned battle effect, after the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b are displayed facing each other on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, a blackout (a mode in which the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is displayed by turning off the screen) is displayed. Is not visible), and then one of the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b is displayed. It is shown that the character displayed after this blackout will make a first strike, and when the main character 1500a is displayed after the blackout, it is a big hit. On the other hand, when the enemy character 1500b is displayed after the blackout, if the attack of the enemy character 1500b is avoided, it will be a big hit. In this way, the player can recognize that the main character 1500a has been displayed after the blackout, which is a big hit, and that even if the enemy character 1500b is displayed after the blackout, the attack of the enemy character 1500b is avoided. You will be able to recognize that it will be a big hit.

  In this way, even though it has been confirmed that a big hit will be reached in the middle of the battle effect, if the battle effect is continued after that and the variable display is executed for a long period of time, the special symbol per unit time is displayed. Since the number of times of variable display is reduced, the number of times of winning the big hit game state and the expected value of the award balls that can be obtained are reduced, which may disadvantage the player and reduce the enjoyment of the game. In this example, when it is determined that a big hit will be reached in the middle of the battle production, the big winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower winning opening 2005) is open-controlled at that time to control the big hit gaming state. Even if it starts, the battle effect is continued so that it can be executed to the end. The details will be described below.

  In this example, a battle production short and a battle production long are provided as a variation pattern in the case of reaching during a high-probability time-saving state, the battle production short is executed only when it is a big hit, and the battle production long is a big hit. It is designed to be executed in both the case where it becomes and the case where it becomes out of order. First, the battle effect executed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect short circuit will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 171 (A) to 172 (I). In the high-probability time saving state, the right-handed hitting is performed to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004, so that the central liquid crystal display device 1500 displays that (right-handed →). There is.

  When the gaming state is controlled to the high probability time saving state as shown in FIG. 171 (A), the peripheral control MPU displays the mode in which the main character 1500a is moving on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. And the second special symbol process process (step S39) is executed based on the game ball winning the second starting port 2004 in that state, the main control MPU is the second special symbol as shown in FIG. 169. Along with starting the variable display of the second special symbol on the display unit, the judgment result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command on the peripheral control board (in this case, the judgment result notification command indicating that it is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect short circuit) (Variation pattern command indicating) is transmitted. When the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command are received from the main control MPU, the peripheral control MPU variably displays the left, middle, and right decorative patterns reduced in the lower left portion of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and receives the received variation. When the variable time designated by the pattern command has passed, all the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. Further, in the case where it is indicated that the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU indicate that the main character 1500a should stop and reach something (reach out, reach out, big hit). The noticed mode is displayed (FIG. 171 (B)).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU causes the enemy character 1500b to appear on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 so as to face the main character 1500a (FIG. 171 (C)), and then blackouts the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 ( FIG. 171 (D)). The received determination result notification command indicates that the high probability time saving state will be a big hit (in this example, 4R certainty variation big hit, 16R certainty variation big hit), and the variation pattern command instructs execution of the variation pattern of the battle effect short. If so, the peripheral control MPU gradually brightens the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 to make only the main character 1500a stand out, and at the same time the left, middle, and right sides of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are reduced and displayed in a reduced size. The player is notified that the decorative design will be a big hit by stopping and displaying the big hit pattern (big hit design) and displaying "big hit confirmed!" (FIG. 171 (E)).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 169, the variation time of the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the main control MPU is almost the same as the variation time of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol indicator at a timing in the middle of the battle production in which the main character 1500a is highlighted after blacking out the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in agreement. The main control MPU starts opening control of the special winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower winning opening 2005) based on the fact that the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, when starting the opening control of the special winning opening (upper special winning opening 2006 or lower special winning opening 2005) by the main control MPU, the peripheral control MPU displays "big hit confirmed!" To control the big hit gaming state. Since it is notified that the big hit game state control is started, the player can recognize that the big hit game state control is started, and the player suffers a disadvantage without noticing that the big hit game state control is started. Can be suppressed. If the player is sure to recognize that the control of the jackpot gaming state is started, it is not limited to the above example, and the voice output of the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. (the jackpot is started. Or a display (starting the big hit) for notifying that the big hit is to be started.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the peripheral control MPU continuously executes the battle effect even after the control of the big hit game state is started by the main control MPU, and displays a mode in which the main character 1500a attacks the enemy character 1500b. (FIG. 172 (F)). Next, the peripheral control MPU displays "Press the button and stab the stop!" On the central liquid crystal display device 1500 and starts the timer to start measuring the effective period (Fig. 172 (G)). The plate production button 257 is operated and the detection signal from the production button pressing sensor 258 is input to the peripheral control MPU, and the elevating unit 3510 retracts the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 invisible from the player side. From the position (upward end position), it is slid downward in an arc shape and moved to an appearance position (downward end position) that can be visually recognized from the player side, and at the same time, the rotation connecting member 3630 is rotated to rotate the back four corner second decorative body. The base 3631 and the second back four corner second decoration body 3633 attached to the base four corner third decoration body 3633 are rotated (rotated) (FIG. 172 (H)).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU, after displaying the mode in which the main character 1500a has won (FIG. 172 (I)), executes the effect display of the big hit game state (big hit effect; round effect display, etc.) as shown in FIG. 169. . In this way, even if the jackpot gaming state is started before the battle effect short effect is completed, the peripheral control MPU continues to execute the battle effect short effect and responds to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257. By causing the rear decorative device unit 3550 to appear under the back, it is possible to proceed in the direction in which the effect of the battle effect short is completed (FIG. 172 (H)). In other words, when the battle effect is executed, the player operates the upper plate effect button 257 to cause the lower back rear decorative unit 3550 to appear in order to complete the effect of the battle effect short. In this way, since the effect of the battle effect short can be completed in response to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 by the player, the player's intention can be reflected in the effect to obtain a sense of satisfaction and a sense of achievement. You can perform more attractive effects than conventional gaming machines. Note that, as shown in FIG. 169, the effective period of the upper plate effect button 257 is continued until one round of the big hit game state is completed, but when the upper plate effect button 257 is not operated within the effective period. However, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 may be exposed after the effective period has passed. If the upper plate production button 257 is not operated within the valid period, the back-lower rear rotating decorative body may be displayed. The mode in which the main character 1500a has won may be displayed without exposing the unit 3550.

  In addition, in this example, the player is notified that a big hit will be in the middle of the battle effect, control of the big hit game state is started, and the continuation of the battle effect is executed while the big hit game state is being executed to display the effect result. In this way, if the start time of the big hit game state that is originally started after executing all the battle effects is shortened, the fluctuation time of the battle effect executed before the start of the big hit game state is shortened, and per unit time The number of times the variable display of special symbols is reduced is suppressed. Specifically, in this example, a period of 58 seconds to 87 seconds (depending on the operation timing of the upper plate production button 257) is set as the period required to execute all the productions of the battle production short. However, the variation time corresponding to the period of performing the effect executed before the start of the big hit game state is 12 seconds, and after the variation pattern of the battle effect short is selected and the second special symbol is variably displayed, When 12 seconds have passed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol and control of the big hit game state is started. Then, most of the effects of the battle effect short (in this example, 46 seconds to 75 seconds, but may be half or more of the entire period) is executed during the big hit game state, the big hit game state of While the effect period of the battle effect short executed before control is 12 seconds, the effect period of the battle effect short executed during the big hit game state is 46 seconds to 75 seconds (operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257). It depends on).

  In this way, of all the effect periods required for execution of the battle effect short, the period executed during the big hit game state (the period executed as the big hit effect) is the period executed before the start of the big hit game state (variable time The time required for the variable display can be reduced by making it longer than), and it is possible to prevent the number of times the variable display of the special symbol per unit time is reduced. As described above, in the jackpot gaming state, after the special winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower winning opening 2005) is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower An opening / closing pattern (round) is closed a plurality of times (4 in this example) when the upper prize hole sensor 2552 or the lower prize hole sensor 2354 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the big prize hole 2005). Since it is executed once or 16 times), a certain period or more is always required from the start to the end of the jackpot gaming state. Then, a part of all the effects of the battle effect short circuit is synchronized with the variable display of the variable display effect (the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol)) before the start of the big hit game state, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The effect period of the battle effect short, which is executed as the variable display effect before the start of the big hit game state, as well as the remaining effect is executed as a big hit effect after the start of the big hit game state. The variation time of the battle effect short is set to be relatively shorter than the effect period of the battle effect short executed as the big hit effect after the start of the big hit game state. As a result, the player only operates the handle lever 504 to win the game ball at the special winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower winning opening 2005), and the battle occurs during the big hit game state. All the productions of the battle production short are variably displayed while executing some productions of the production production short and allowing the production of the battle production short before the end of the big hit game state without being finished halfway The variation time of the battle effect short can be shortened by 46 seconds to 75 seconds compared to the case where it is executed during the variation display of the second special symbol as an effect, so the variation display of the special symbol (the second special symbol in this case) is started. It is possible to shorten the period from the end to the jackpot gaming state, the fluctuation display time of the special symbol per unit time by shortening the fluctuation time There for possible to prevent the reduction may increase the execution opportunities jackpot determination process. Even if the time required for variable display is reduced, the battle effect can be executed for a long period of time from the start of variable display to the execution of the big hit game state, so the battle can be performed without simplifying the effect contents. It is possible to execute the effect and reduce the variation time, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the simplification of the effect content.

  Further, in the above-described example, after the confirmation that a big hit is confirmed, the effect (button effect) requesting the button operation is executed, and the bottom plate rear rotation decoration is performed based on the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 within the effective period. The body unit 3550 is moved from the retracted position, which is invisible from the player side, to the appearance position, which is visible from the player side. In other words, the player is notified in advance that the big hit has been confirmed, and that if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the valid period, the back and rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 will appear without fail. The button performance is being executed while grasping it. Normally, the button effect is executed before the result of the variable display is fixed, and when the result of the variable display is out of alignment, the back plate is rotated backward even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the effective period. The decoration unit 3550 is set so as to be less likely to appear from the retracted position to the appearance position, and when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the upper plate production button 257 is operated within the valid period, the back plate is displayed. The lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is set to have a high possibility of appearing from the retracted position to the appearance position.

  Further, as described above, the jackpot probability at the time of low probability is set to 1/400, and the jackpot probability at the time of high probability is set to 1/40. Therefore, most of the variable display executed have the display result deviated. Therefore, even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated when the button effect is executed, it is unlikely that the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 appears from the retracted position to the appearance position. In this way, when the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is not appeared from the retracted position to the appearance position even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated when the button effect is executed, the player feels stress, Further, even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, there is a low possibility that the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 will appear from the retracted position to the appearance position. It was

  In this example, when the button effect is executed and the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the effective period after it is determined that the big hit is hit as described above, the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is always moved from the retracted position. Since the player performs the button effect in a state that the player knows that it will appear at the appearance position in advance, the plate effect to dissipate the stress accumulated in the button effect executed before the big hit is confirmed The button 257 can be operated. In addition, since it is decided that a big hit is reached, the upper plate effect button 257 can be operated to cause the back and lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 to appear, so that a superior feeling can be obtained. It is possible to increase the joy of being a big hit.

  Next, referring to FIG. 170, FIG. 171 (A) to FIG. 171 (D), FIG. 171 (E ′), FIG. 172, and FIG. 173 regarding the battle effect executed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect long. explain. Since the effect executed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect long includes the same effect as the effect executed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect short, the battle effect short is applied to the overlapping portion. Will be read as the battle effect long, and only the parts different from the effect of the battle effect short will be described below.

  171 (A) to 171 (D) by the peripheral control MPU based on the reception of the determination result command and the fluctuation pattern command (in this case, the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect long). After executing, the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is gradually brightened to make only the enemy character 1500b stand out (FIG. 171 (E ′)), and an attack is performed by the enemy character 1500b. Note that, as shown in FIG. 170, the attack by the enemy character 1500b is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol.

  The received determination result notification command indicates a big hit (in this example, 4R certainty variation big hit, 16R certainty variation big hit) which continues the high-probability time-saving state, and the variation pattern command instructs execution of the variation pattern of the battle effect long. In this case, the peripheral control MPU displays a mode in which the main character 1500a avoids the attack of the enemy character 1500b (FIG. 173 (F ')), and the left / middle display is reduced in the lower left part of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The player is notified that the right decorative pattern will be a big hit by being stopped and displayed in a big hit mode (big hit pattern) and displaying "attack avoidance! Big hit confirmation!" (Fig. 173 (G ')). After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (F) to 172 (I) are executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 170, the variation time of the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the main control MPU is almost the same as the variation time of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The big special symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device at the timing in the middle of the battle effect that the main character 1500a avoids the attack of the enemy character 1500b, and the big special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. Based on the stop display, the main control MPU starts opening control of the special winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower winning opening 2005).

  On the other hand, the received judgment result notification command indicates a big hit (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent accuracy big hit) that ends the missed state or the high-probability time-saving state, and the fluctuation pattern command executes the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect long. When the command for determination is given, if the peripheral control MPU displays a mode in which the main character 1500a is attacked by the enemy character 1500b (FIG. 173 (F ″)), and if the received determination result notification command is incorrect. The left, middle, and right decorative designs that are reduced and displayed in the lower left part of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are stopped and displayed in a detached manner (in this case, the reach detached design), and the received determination result notification command has a high probability time saving state. If it is a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent accuracy big hit in this example), the lower left part of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 Notifying the player that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are reduced in size are stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit and displayed as "defeat ..." to end the gap or the high probability time saving state (Figure 173 (G ″)). After that, if the received determination result notification command is out of alignment, returning to FIG. 171 (A), the mode in which the main character 1500a is moving is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the received determination result notification command is high probability time saving. If it is a big hit to end the state (4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit), the big hit game state is notified and control of the big hit game state is executed, and then the process returns to FIG. The mode in which the character 1500a is moving is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500.

  Note that a period of 78 seconds to 107 seconds (depending on the operation timing of the upper plate production button 257) is set as a period required to execute all the productions of the battle production long that are executed in the case of a big hit. However, the variation time corresponding to the period of performing the effect executed before the start of the big hit game state is 32 seconds, and after the variation pattern of the battle effect long is selected and the second special symbol is variably displayed, When 32 seconds have passed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol and control of the big hit game state is started. And most of the effects of the battle effect long (in this example, it is 46 seconds to 75 seconds, but it is sufficient if it is half or more of the entire period) are executed during the big hit game state, and in the big hit game state. The production period of the battle production long executed before the control is 32 seconds, while the production period of the battle production long executed during the big hit game state is 46 seconds to 75 seconds (operation timing of the upper plate production button 257). It depends on).

  In this way, even when performing a battle production that has a longer production period than the battle production short, a period that is executed during the big hit game state among all the production periods required to execute the battle production long (executed as a big hit production. The time required for variable display is reduced by making the period) that is executed before the start of the big hit game state (variation time), and the number of times the variable display of special symbols per unit time is reduced. Can be suppressed. That is, a part of all the effects of the battle effect long, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in synchronization with the variable display of the variable display effect (the special symbol (the second special symbol in this case)) before the start of the big hit game state. The effect period of the battle effect long that is executed as a variable display effect before the start of the big hit game state, as well as the remaining effect is executed as a big hit effect after the start of the big hit game state. The variation time of the battle effect long is set to be relatively shorter than the effect period of the battle effect long executed as the big hit effect after the big hit game state is started. As a result, the player only operates the handle lever 504 to win the game ball at the special winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower winning opening 2005), and the battle occurs during the big hit game state. Perform some production of production long, and perform all production of battle production long to the end without finishing all production of battle production long. Compared to the case of executing during display, the variation time of the battle effect long is shortened by 46 seconds to 75 seconds and the variation display of the special symbol (the second special symbol in this case) is started, and then the jackpot gaming state is ended. It is possible to shorten the period until, and because the variation time is shortened, it is possible to prevent the number of variations in the display of special symbols per unit time from being reduced. It can increase the sense of execution opportunities. Even if the time required for variable display is reduced, the battle effect can be executed for a long period of time from the start of variable display to the execution of the big hit game state, so the battle can be performed without simplifying the effect contents. It is possible to execute the effect and reduce the variation time, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the simplification of the effect content.

  Further, 65 seconds is required as a period for executing all the effects of the battle effect long, which is executed when a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent accuracy big hit in this example) that ends the outlier or the high probability time saving state is finished. It is set. In other words, the variation time of the battle effect long executed in the case of a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit in this example) that ends the outlier or the high probability time saving state is set to 65 seconds. In addition, after displaying the mode in which the main character 1500a receives the battle effect long by avoiding the attack of the enemy character 1500b, the main character 1500a is revived and the enemy character 1500b is defeated to achieve a big hit. In this case, when the main character 1500a is revived, the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the big hit symbols of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Then, after the control of the jackpot gaming state is started, the effect of defeating the enemy character 1500b (for example, the effect of FIGS. 172 (F) to 172 (I)) may be executed. In this case, the production period executed before the start of the big hit game state may be longer than the production period executed during the big hit game state, but even in this case, at least all Since the effect period can be shortened compared to the case where the effect is executed before the start of the big hit game state, it is possible to prevent the number of times the variable display of special symbols per unit time is reduced.

  Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as the gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this and is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. Alternatively, in this case as well, the same operational effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, in the above example, what is performed during the high-probability time saving state is shown, but the effect period is shortened compared to the case where all the effects executed in association with the variable display are executed before the start of the big hit gaming state. The control is not limited to the high-probability time-saving state, but is not limited to the high-probability non-time saving state (so-called normal state), low-probability time-saving state (so-called time-saving state), high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state. It may be executed by any one of (so-called probability change state) or any combination (may be all). Further, when the control for shortening the effect period is executed in a state other than the high-probability time saving state, the appearance frequency or the big hit expectation degree of the effect may be different for each game state. For example, in the non-time saving state (high-probability non-time saving state, low probability non-time saving state), the appearance frequency is lower than in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state), and the jackpot expectation is lower than in the time saving state. By increasing the selection ratio of the long version of the battle production (battle production long) in the non-time saving state and increasing the selection rate of the short version of the battle production (battle production short) in the time saving state when it is a big hit. In the time saving state, the effect of shortening the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (the second special symbol in this case) to the end of the jackpot gaming state may be enhanced than in the non-time saving state.

  Further, as described above, in the variation pattern that is a big hit that continues the high probability time saving state among the battle effect short and the battle effect long, the button effect is executed during the big hit game state, but at the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257. Accordingly, the effect contents of the big hit effect executed after the end of the battle effect may be different. For example, when the button effect is executed, it is set as the valid period of the upper plate effect button 257 until a predetermined round (eg, 3 rounds) of the big hit game state is completed, and the upper plate is increased in an early round (eg, until 2 rounds are completed). When the dish effect button 257 is operated, a series of big hit effects (such as moving images) that are completed until the remaining rounds of the big hit game state are executed are executed, and the upper plate effect is performed in a slower round (for example, 3 rounds). When the button 257 is operated, the same big effect may be executed, but when the remaining rounds of the big hit game state are executed, a series of big hit effects may be terminated halfway. In this way, when the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is late, the big hit effect ends halfway, so that the upper plate effect button 257 can be operated at an earlier timing.

  Further, regardless of the above-mentioned operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257, the common big hit effect is executed, but according to the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257, the big hit effect is executed until it is completed or is ended halfway. It is not limited to that which is different, and different effects may be executed according to the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257. For example, when the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is early, the player can enjoy it. On the other hand, when the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is delayed, the effect which makes the player uncomfortable is displayed by operating the upper plate effect button 257 at an earlier timing while displaying the illusionary effect. The timing at which the upper plate production button 257 is operated (round, elapsed time, until the upper plate production button 257 is operated) It is executed as a big hit production by changing the type of big hit production executed after the end of the battle production according to the winning opening (the number of game balls entering the upper big winning opening 2006 or the lower big winning opening 2005). It is also possible to complete the battle effect by operating the upper plate effect button 257 at the timing determined by the player himself while considering the type of effect. In this way, by making the subsequent development different according to the timing at which the upper plate production button 257 is operated, the player is made to think about the timing at which the upper plate production button 257 is operated and the game in the jackpot gaming state is enjoyed. Since it is possible to do, it is possible to execute a more attractive effect than the conventional big hit effect that is executed in the big hit game state.

  Further, the mode of the battle effect may be changed according to the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257, for example, the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 (round, elapsed time, until the upper plate effect button 257 is operated. The faster or slower the number of game balls entered into the special winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower winning opening 2005) is, the effect display (for example, the back) when the rotating decorative body unit 3550 appears underneath When the flame is displayed around the lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550, the size and color of the flame may be flashy. The earlier the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is, the flasher the effect display when the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 is made to appear allows the upper plate effect button 257 to be operated at an earlier timing. As the operation timing of the button 257 is delayed, the effect display when the rear-bottom rearward rotating decorative body unit 3550 is made to appear is flashy, so that the upper plate effect button 257 can be operated at a later timing. Thus, by appropriately setting the effect, it is possible to guide the player to operate the upper plate effect button 257 at a predetermined timing.

  In addition, depending on the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening (upper special winning opening 2006 or lower special winning opening 2005) until the upper opening producing button 257 is operated as the operation timing of the upper opening producing button 257, If you want to change the mode of production (either or both of battle production and jackpot production), the big winning a prize mouth (upper big prize) in all jackpot gaming states executed after the control of the high probability time saving state is started. You may make it change according to the number of the game balls which entered into the mouth 2006 or the lower special winning opening 2005). In this case, the more the number of big hit game states executed in the high-probability time saving state, the more the form of the effect can be made different. Therefore, depending on the form of the effect executed according to the number of the big hit game states, the player Can give a sense of superiority and satisfaction, and can further enhance the joy of being a big hit.

  Further, in the above-described example, when the button effect is executed and the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the effective period, the effective period ends at that time and the back-and-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is operated a predetermined number of times (book). Although it is configured to appear only once in the example, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the rotating decorative body unit 3550 appears under the back side, it does not end the valid period, and if it is within the valid period, The rotating decorative body unit 3550 may be made to appear by operating the upper plate effect button 257 again after the rotating decorative body unit 3550 has retracted, or a predetermined round in the jackpot gaming state (all rounds). Or, if the upper plate production button 257 is operated in a specific round (for example, until the end of 10 rounds or an odd number of rounds), the decoration is rotated behind the bottom. The unit 3550 may be made to appear.This makes it possible to further enhance the joy of becoming a big hit, and makes the big hit by the appearance of the lower back and rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 by operating the upper plate production button 257. You can give a sense of superiority by appealing to others.

  Further, in the above example, the configuration is such that the battle production (battle production short, battle production long) can be executed not only when it is a big hit, but also when it is a big hit, but it is a big hit during a high probability time saving state. The variation pattern of the battle effect may be executed only in that case, and the battle effect may not be executed in the case of the deviation pattern. With such a configuration, when the battle effect is executed, it is always a big hit, so that the effect can be paid attention to at the same time as the timing of starting the big hit game state control and the kind of big hit (4R normal You can also pay attention to big hits, 4R latent big hits, 4R certainty big hits, 16R certainty big hits).

  In addition, during the high-probability time saving state, the determination result notification command instructs the big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent accuracy big hit) to end the high probability time saving state, and the battle pattern (battle effect short, battle effect) by the variation pattern command. When the variation pattern of (long) is instructed, the control of the big hit game state is started after the end of the battle effect, but in the 4R big hit game state executed in this case, compared to the 16R big hit game state. Since the period required from the start of the jackpot gaming state to the end is short, even if the battle effect is executed during the variable display of the second special symbol as the variable display effect until the end, the special symbol (this If the special symbol (in this case) from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol until the end of the 16 jackpot gaming state It can shorten the period until the end of the 4 jackpot gaming state from the start of variable display of the second special symbol).

[9. Game contents]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176. FIG. 174 is a front view of the game board in which the front component member and the front unit are cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction within the game area. Further, FIG. 175 (a) is a front view showing an enlarged right part in the game area in FIG. 174, and FIG. Is. Further, FIG. 176 is an explanatory view showing the vicinity of the upper special winning opening in FIG. 174 in an enlarged manner.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, it is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 which divides the game area 5a into left and right depending on the hitting strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and can be driven stronger as it is rotated in the clockwise direction.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls serve as obstacle nails. By abutting, the downflow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates by abutting the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  According to the turning angle of the handle lever 504, the ball launching device 680 hits the game ball with a driving strength less than a predetermined driving strength, and thus the game ball is driven to the upper part of the center character 2500. Of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the front part enters the left side in front view from the highest part. Then, the game ball that has entered on the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role object 2500 is on the left side of the center role product 2500 while the game ball is in contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). Will flow down. Then, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center character 2500, the game ball of the center character 2500 passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the left end of the stage 2530 from a warp outlet 2522 opening in the frame.

  The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 roll back and forth on the stage 2530, and move back and forth to form side guide grooves 2532 formed on both sides in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. When it is released from the front side, it flows down the area above the starting opening unit 2100 below the stage 2530 in the game area 5a. As a result, the game ball may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged forward from the central guiding groove 2531 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a of the stage 2530, the starting opening unit 2100 opened immediately below the central guiding groove 2531. The first start port 2002 of 1 is accepted with a high probability. When the game balls are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board and the payout control board.

  By the way, when the game ball flowing down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, a plurality of obstacle nails, the first shelf 2201a of the side unit 2200, or the like causes the game to be performed below the center character 2500. There is a possibility of being guided toward the center in the left-right direction within the area 5a and being received by the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, or the like arranged on the downstream side. When the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board and the payout control board.

  In addition, the game ball that has flowed to the left side of the center character 2500 does not flow down to the attacker unit 2300 side due to the lower side of the center character 2500 that extends between the starting opening unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300. It cannot be accepted into the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, the lower special winning opening 2005, etc. of the attacker unit 2300. The starting opening unit 2100 is provided below the first starting opening 2002 with a horizontally long rectangular fake portion 2105a similar to the lower winning opening door member 2352 for opening and closing the lower winning opening 2005 in the attacker unit 2300. Therefore, it is possible to make an illusion that there is a special winning opening below the first starting opening like a conventional pachinko machine.

  On the other hand, according to the turning angle of the handle lever 504, the ball launching device 680 is driven with a driving force that is equal to or higher than a predetermined driving force, and is thus struck in the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. The game ball enters (drives in) to the right of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. Then, the game ball that has entered on the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 passes from the upper right entrance to the upper game space 2541 and the right passage 2542 and from the lower right exit 2543. It is discharged directly above the gate portion 2003 in the attacker unit 2300. As a result, the game ball that has been hit (right hit) so as to flow down the right side of the center accessory 2500 will pass through the gate portion 2003 with an extremely high probability. Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 flows down on the shelf member 2303 through the front of the second starting port 2004, rolls on the shelf member 2303 to the left in front view, and then the front surface of the shelf member 2303. It is released downward from the left edge of the eye. The game ball released from the shelf member 2303 passes in front of the lower special winning opening 2005 and flows down to the lower right rail 1005, and rolls on the lower right rail 1005 to the left in front view to play from the outlet 1111. It is discharged to the outside of the area 5a.

  When the game ball discharged from the lower right exit 2543 flows down on the left side of the gate portion 2003 when viewed from the front, the second winning opening 2004 via the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 and the guiding portion 2302b of the starting opening front member 2302. Or, there is a possibility that the prize will be accepted in the special winning opening 2005. On the other hand, when the game ball flows down on the right side of the gate portion 2003 when viewed from the front, the game ball flows down onto the lower right rail 1005 and is discharged from the out port 1111 without being accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, or the like. It

  Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 when the lower special winning opening 2005 is open, the lower special winning opening 2005 is highly likely to be accepted.

  When a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2305, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board, and when the result of the ordinary draw is "normal win", the second starting door member 2323 is selected. For a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 3 seconds), the vehicle moves forward to open the second starting port 2004. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the front of the second starting opening 2004 at the timing when the second starting opening door member 2323 is advanced and is in the open state, the flow direction is changed to the rear by the second starting opening door member 2323. Then, it is received in the second starting port 2004. When the game balls are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board and the payout control board.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game balls passing through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 1 to 10 seconds, which is also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5.

  Further, if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the result of the normal lottery is suggested, the suggestion of the result of the normal lottery cannot be started. The start of suggesting the result is held until the suggestion of the result of the ordinary drawing is completed. Further, the maximum number of holding of the ordinary lottery result is up to four, and if the number is more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player on the main control board (for example, “big hit”, “medium”). A special lottery result is generated in which a lottery, a "small win", a "probability change", a "time reduction win", etc.) are generated. Then, the result of the selected special lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 5 to 360 seconds). The special lottery results that are selected by receiving the game balls in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "15R big hit", " Probability change (probability change) ”,“ time reduction (time reduction) ”,“ probability change time reduction ”,“ probability change time reduction non-effective ”, etc.

  In the case where the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game balls into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are the special lottery results that cause the advantageous gaming state. , Either the lower special prize opening door member 2352 of the attacker unit 2300 or the upper special prize opening door member 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern according to the result of the special lottery selected, A game ball can be accepted into the winning opening 2005 or the special winning opening 2006. When the lower special winning opening 2005 or the upper special winning opening 2006 is in an open state and a game ball is received in the lower special winning opening 2005 or the upper special winning opening 2006, the main control board and the payout board provide a predetermined number from the payout device 830 (For example, 10 or 13) game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the lower special winning opening door member 2352 or the upper large winning opening door member 2550 is opening / closing in a predetermined pattern, the lower large winning opening 2005 or the upper large winning opening 2006 receives a game ball, so that many The game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the lower special winning opening door member 2352 or the upper special winning opening door member 2550 is opened for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The open / close pattern that closes in a state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the lower special winning opening door member 2352 or the upper special winning opening door member 2550 has been opened, or When any one of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls to the special winning opening 2005 or the upper special winning opening 2006 is satisfied, the lower special winning opening door member 2352 or the upper large winning opening door member 2550. The open / close pattern for closing (open / close pattern is called one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, the "2R jackpot" is repeated for 2 rounds, the "15R jackpot" is repeated for 15 rounds, and an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In the case of "big hit", change the probability that special lottery results such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game ("probability change"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. (“Short-time winning”) There is a “hit”.

[Holding memory related to acceptance of game balls into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004]
In the present embodiment, a random number value is acquired in order to execute the special lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and the variable display based on the acquired random number value is started. During the period, when the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the fluctuation cannot be started, so the random number value is held until the previously executed fluctuation display is completed. . The number of reserved random number values to be reserved is up to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for those exceeding the upper limit, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002. Even if the game ball is received in the mouth 2004, it is discarded without acquiring the random number value.

[Send command to specify number of holdings to peripheral control board]
As described above, the main control MPU, when the number of reserves of the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, that is, the first starting port shown in FIG. 157. When the value of the first special reserve number counter by step S43 of the passage process is incremented by 1, as well as when one reserve memory of the first special symbol is consumed, that is, in the first special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 160 When the value of the first special holding number counter in step S103 is subtracted by 1, in the storage process (step S20) of FIG. 155 (b), a command instructing the holding number of the first special symbol (first holding number designation command) 0-4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board.

  In addition, when the number of reserves of the second special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004, that is, when 1 is added in step S53 of FIG. 158, and the retention of the second special symbol. When digesting one memory, that is, in the second special symbol normal processing not shown and described because it is the same algorithm as the first special symbol normal processing, the value of the second special reserved number counter is subtracted 1 In this case, the storage process (step S20) sets a command (second reserved number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the reserved number of the second special symbol and transmits it to the peripheral control board.

[Reception of command in peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU controls the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the lamps / LEDs, the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. based on the command received from the main control board in the 16 ms steady process (see FIG. 167). Execute the process.

[Command analysis processing]
That is, the peripheral control MPU executes the processing of steps S601 to S606 shown as an example of the 16 ms steady processing of FIG. 168 every 16 ms. For example, in the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board is analyzed.

[Production control processing]
In the effect control process of step S602, based on the analysis result of the command, as an example, as the process of step S137, a lottery result (type of big hit, out of reach, out of order is indicated (stop of the first special symbol). (It may indicate the aspect of the symbol)) The determination result notification command transmitted according to each lottery result so that it is transmitted to the peripheral control board, and the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process). In step S149, the control processing relating to the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the second variation pattern setting processing).

  The peripheral control MPU controls the display of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed and left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle) The display is stopped in the order of the decorative designs (the left, middle, and right decorative designs may be displayed in sync with the same design in a variable manner and may be stopped at the same time).

  Further, even when the reception of the first hold number designation commands 0 to 4 and the second hold number designation commands 0 to 4 is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601), in the effect control process of step S602, On the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, a control process for displaying the first reserved number related to the first special symbol and the second reserved number related to the second special symbol is executed.

[Display of decorative pattern in central liquid crystal display device 1500]
Next, an example regarding a display mode in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 will be described. FIG. 177 is a diagram showing an example of the hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in the embodiment. Here, an example of the display mode of the pending storage will be described in the middle of the progress of the effect of one variation of the decorative symbol drawn on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 by the player sitting directly opposite the gaming machine 1. .

  The "1 variation" means that the first special symbol display (not shown) of the function display unit 1400 shown in the front view of the game board 5 in FIG. From the start of variation of the first special lottery result selected by lottery as the first special symbol to the stop display, or the second special symbol indicator (not shown) of the function display unit 1400 to the second starting opening 2004. The second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball is started to change and stop displayed as the second special symbol, and the effect drawn on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is also the first special symbol or It is performed according to the time when the second special symbol is variably displayed.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present example, in the normal gaming state, that is, in the left-handed state, the gaming ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the second starting opening door member 2323 is driven. I don't know. Therefore, in the left-handed state, no winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 occurs, and only winning of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 2002 occurs. However, unless there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol, only the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is executed, and the big hit related to the first special symbol (4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit) 4R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit) will occur. Therefore, in the following, a case where there is a reserved storage of the first special symbol will be mainly described.

  The first special lottery result selected by receiving the game balls into the first starting port 2002 is controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board on the basis of a command from the main control board, so that the result is shown in FIG. ), In the upper part of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the variable display of the decorative design 1600a on the left side, the decorative design 1600b on the center, and the decorative design 1600c on the right side is started, and the predetermined time has passed. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c is stopped, and the player can recognize the first special lottery result (winning judgment result).

  In FIG. 177 (A), as an example of the changing decorative design, the left decorative design 1600a and the right decorative design 1600c are stopped and displayed in the same design on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and only the middle decorative design 1600b is changed. There is shown an example in which the reach state is generated by the decorative pattern by adopting the display mode. In FIG. 177 (A), as an example, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed as the design “7”, and only the middle decorative design 1600b is changing.

[Display of pending storage in central liquid crystal display device 1500]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 177 (A), on the lower left side of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 which is visible to the player, a first reserved number display area 1510 (first starting opening) relating to the first special symbol. 2002) is set, and the second reserved number display area 1580 (related to the second starting port 2004) related to the second special symbol is set on the lower right side of the display panel.

  In FIG. 177 (A), in the first hold number display area 1510, two hold images 1521 and 1522 indicating that the first special symbol is held corresponding to the hold number of the lottery result are displayed, It is shown that the first holding number of the lottery result for the special symbol is “2”. Further, in the second hold number display area 1580, a hold image indicating that the second special symbol is held in correspondence with the second hold number of the lottery result is not displayed, and the second special symbol is selected by lottery. It is shown that there is no pending number of results.

  In addition, the display of the 1st reservation number in the 1st reservation number display area 1510 about the 1st special symbol is the 1st reservation memory, the 2nd reservation memory, and the 3rd reservation memory from the left toward the center. The reserved images 1521 to 1524 are displayed like the fourth reserved storage. Further, the display of the number of holdings in the second holding number display area 1580 of the second number of holdings for the second special symbol, the first holding memory, the second holding memory, the third from the center toward the right The reserved image is displayed like the reserved memory and the fourth reserved memory.

  Further, in this example, the reserved images 1521 to 1524 indicating that they are stored on hold can take a plurality of display modes. For example, there are a plurality of types of display modes such as a mode in which the shape of the image is the same and the display color is different, a mode in which the display color of the image is the same and the shape is different, and a mode in which both the shape and the display color of the image are different. obtain.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved images 1521 to 1524 indicating that the first special symbol is stored in a reserved manner are displayed in a circular shape, and the display color of the reserved images 1521 to 1524 changes to a plurality of colors. It is supposed to do.

  In FIG. 177 (A), the reserved image 1521 and the reserved image 1522 for the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory for the first special symbol are a normal display mode of the reserved memory, for example, a circular display color. It is displayed in “blue” (first reserved image) and is visible to the player.

  Next, in FIG. 177 (B), the peripheral control MPU determines that the stop display command received from the main control board is specified by the command analysis processing in step S601, and the changing middle decoration pattern 1600b is the pattern “ 5 "is stopped and displayed, as a result, the left decorative design is" 7 ", the middle decorative design is" 5 "and the right decorative design is stopped and displayed as" 7 ", and the variation stop result of the decorative design is" reach out of reach ". It is indicated that the player has been informed that it is ".

  Next, in FIG. 177 (C), the peripheral control MPU identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board in the command analysis processing of step S601, and accordingly, the central liquid crystal It is shown that the design variation of the left decorative design 1600a, the middle decorative design 1600b, and the right decorative design 1600c is started on the display panel of the display device 1500. Hereinafter, this is called digestion of reserved memory.

  The peripheral control MPU identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board in the command analysis processing of step S601, and accordingly, the left decorative pattern is displayed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The symbol variation of 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c is started.

  Then, after that, the peripheral control MPU analyzes that the first reserved number designation command “1” transmitted from the main control board has been received, by the command analysis processing (step S601), and in response to this, , The first reserved memory is exhausted for the first special symbol, and the reserved image 1521 displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and as the second reserved memory for the first special symbol in FIG. 180 (A). The displayed reserved image 1522 becomes a new first reserved memory and is moved and displayed as a reserved image 1521 (circular display color “blue”), and the first reserved number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is It becomes "1".

[Hold change effect]
FIG. 178 is a diagram showing an example of the hold change effect using the hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In FIG. 178 (A), it is analyzed by the command analysis processing (step S601) that the first hold number designation command “2” transmitted from the main control board is analyzed while the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c are changing. After that, the reception of the first hold number designation command “3” transmitted from the main control board indicates that the command analysis processing (step S601) is analyzed.

  In response to this, in the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in FIG. 178 (A), the second special hold is newly added to the right of the reserved image 1521 displayed as the first reserved memory for the first special symbol. The reserved image 1522 (a circular shape and a display color “blue”) is displayed as a memory, and a third reserved memory is newly reserved on the right side of the reserved image 1522 displayed as the second reserved memory. An image 1523 (circular display color “blue”) is displayed, which indicates that the first pending number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is “3”.

  Next, in FIG. 178 (B), it is analyzed by the command analysis processing (step S601) that the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board is received while the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c are changing. Accordingly, for the first special symbol, a fourth reserved memory is newly provided on the right side of the reserved image 1523 displayed as the third reserved memory, and the reserved image 1524 (display color in a circular shape is displayed. "Blue") is displayed, and the first withdrawal number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is "4", indicating that the reserved memory number has reached the upper limit for the first special symbol. In the following description, the first hold number display area 1510 will be simply referred to as the hold number display area 1510.

[Hold change effect using upper plate effect button 257 and an on-hold image representing an on-hold memory]
In the conventional gaming machine that performs the pending notice effect, the probability of a big hit is kept low in a normal gaming state, and the probability of a reach is not so high. Therefore, the player has a low chance of seeing the pending notice production. In other words, it can be said that the probability that the pending notice production is performed is low.

  Further, there is also a system in which a suspension notice is given on condition that the operation button is operated. Hereinafter, since the effect contents are changed by the player operating such an effect form, it is referred to as "participatory effect". However, due to the low probability of holding notice production being performed, some players are not blessed with the opportunity to operate the operation buttons provided for production effectively, making them dissatisfied and reducing the interest of the game. There was a risk that it would end up.

  Therefore, the embodiment described below relates to an invention relating to a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game by expanding the opportunity to participate in the participatory production.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU that controls the effect control has a predetermined first number of lottery results for the first special symbol (for example, the upper limit may be “4”, or a number smaller than that). For example, it may be “3” or “2”), and a lottery is performed on the condition that the hold change effect is performed. That is, in this example, whether or not the hold change effect is performed on condition that the reception of the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601). The lottery (which is called lottery for holding change effect) is performed.

  When it is decided to perform the hold change effect by the lottery of the hold change effect, the player's operation on the upper plate effect button 257 (FIG. 22, FIG. 31) is validated, and the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed. Each time the effect button pressing sensor 258 (FIG. 38) is detected, the hold change effect of changing the display color of the hold image representing the hold storage is performed.

[Hold change effect screen]
In the hold change effect of this example, the display color of the hold image to be finally displayed (referred to as the final display color) is determined based on the timing of the start winning. FIG. 178 (C) shows an example of the hold change effect screen displayed on the display panel of central liquid crystal display device 1500 when it is determined to perform the hold change effect.

  As shown in FIG. 178 (C), the left, middle, and right decorative designs are reduced in the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 to perform variable display. Furthermore, the characters "When the button is pressed, the on-hold color will change!" Are displayed in the approximate center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the operation of the plate effect button 257 (FIG. 22, FIG. 31) is performed. It suggests that the game is valid and prompts the player to operate a button.

  It should be noted that, although it is possible to arbitrarily set how long the effective period for which the operation on the above-mentioned upper plate effect button 257 (FIG. 22, FIG. 31) is valid, it is possible to transmit from the main control board as an example. It can be set until the received next control command is analyzed by the command analysis process (step S601).

  The control command may be, for example, one of a stop display command, a jackpot start command, a judgment result notification command, a first hold number designation command, or a combination of a plurality of these control commands. You can In this example, for easier understanding of the explanation, it is assumed that the next stop display command transmitted from the main control board is received until the command analysis processing (step S601) is analyzed.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram showing an example of the hold change effect using the hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, which is performed subsequent to FIG. 178 (C). In FIG. 179 (A), as a result of the player's operation on the upper plate effect button 257 (first time) in response to the suggestion of the button operation to the player, the fourth hold in FIG. 179 (C). It is shown that the display color of the reserved image 1524 (circular display color “blue”) that has been stored and displayed in the normal display mode has changed to “green”.

  Although not clearly shown in FIG. 178 (C) and FIG. 179, during the hold change effect, the display color of the hold image of the hold storage which is the target for the button operation by the player changes each time. The final display color of the hold image in the hold storage is predetermined when the hold change effect is determined. In the specific example shown, it is assumed that the final display color of the target reserved image in the reserved storage is determined to be “red”. Then, the display color of the hold image of the target hold storage is displayed in the hold number display area 1510 with the final display color determined as a result.

  Note that, in FIG. 179 (A), subsequently, in the substantial center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the characters "Press the button to change the hold color!" Are displayed, and the upper plate effect button 257 is displayed. It is suggested that the operation to is effective and also prompts the player to operate the button.

  Next, in FIG. 179 (B), as a result of the player operating the upper plate effect button 257 (second time) in response to the suggestion of the button operation to the player, in FIG. 179 (A), It is shown that the display color of the hold image 1524 displayed as the hold image 1524 (circular display color “green”) has changed to “yellow” as the fourth hold storage.

  Note that, here, of the left, middle, and right decorative designs that are reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the left decorative design is stopped and displayed at the design “3”, and The decorative pattern on the right continues to be variably displayed.

  Note that, in FIG. 179 (B), subsequently, the characters "When the button is pressed, the held color changes!" Are displayed substantially in the center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the upper plate effect button 257 is displayed. It is suggested that the operation to is effective and also prompts the player to operate the button.

  Next, in FIG. 179 (C), as a result of the player operating the upper plate effect button 257 (third time) in response to the suggestion of the button operation to the player, in FIG. 179 (B), It is shown that the display color of the hold image 1524 displayed as the hold image 1524 (circular display color “yellow”) has changed to “rainbow” as the fourth hold storage.

  Note that, here, of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol “3”, and Only the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern continues to be variably displayed. Further, it is shown that the reach is generated by the stop symbol "3" of the left and right decorative symbols.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an example of the hold change effect using the hold number display on the display panel of central liquid crystal display device 1500, which is performed subsequent to FIG. 179 (C). In FIG. 180 (A), in response to the stop display command received from the main control board being specified by the command analysis processing of step S601 by the peripheral control MPU, the changing middle decoration pattern 1600b is the pattern “4”. The reduced display of the left, middle, and right decorative designs in the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is canceled, and the original position and size of the center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are eliminated. Is displayed again, and as a result, the left decorative design is "3", the middle decorative design is design "4" and the right decorative design is stopped and displayed as design "3", and the variation stop result of the decorative design is "reach out". Indicates that the player has been notified.

  Further, in FIG. 180 (A), in response to the stop display command being specified in the command analysis processing of step S601, from the display mode of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, “When the button is pressed, the reserved color is displayed. The word "Changing!" Has disappeared, suggesting that the operation on the plate effect button 257 is no longer valid (the effective period for validating the operation on the plate effect button 257 has ended). It is shown that

  In this way, the hold change effect is performed on condition that the hold number instructed by the control command (first hold number designation command “4”) has reached a predetermined number (eg, 4) set in advance. It has become. Therefore, the player is given a wide range of opportunities to perform the pending change effect. Then, each time the operation input device (upper plate effect button 257) is operated during execution of the hold change effect, the target hold memory displayed in the hold number display area 1510 (4 in this example). The display color of the reserved image 1524 of the (second reserved memory) changes. Therefore, during the hold change effect, the player is given an opportunity to operate the operation input device not only once but a plurality of times. Moreover, each time the operation input device is operated, the display color of the reserved image in the target reserved storage changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunities to participate in the holding production participation type production are expanded, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

[Relation between digestion of reserved memory and reserved image]
FIGS. 180 (B) to 180 (C) show how the pending storage is being consumed. First, FIG. 180 (B) shows that after the number of the reserved memories is four in FIG. 180 (A), the two reserved memories are consumed.

  The peripheral control MPU identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board in the command analysis processing of step S601, and accordingly, the left decorative pattern is displayed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The symbol variation of 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c is started.

  Then, after this, the peripheral control MPU analyzes that the first hold number designation command “3” transmitted from the main control board has been received, by the command analysis processing (step S601), and in response to this, , The first reserved memory is digested for the first special symbol, and the reserved image 1521 displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and the second to fourth of the first special symbol in FIG. 180 (A) The reserved images 1522 (display color “blue”), 1523 (display color “blue”), and 1524 display color “rainbow” that were displayed as the reserved memory become the new first to third reserved memories and are the reserved images. 1521 (circular display color "blue"), reserved image 1522 (circular display color "blue"), reserved image 1523 (circular display color "rainbow") are displayed and moved, and the first special symbol is displayed. The first pending the number of lottery result is "3".

  Then, the peripheral control MPU, in response to the stop display command received from the main control board is specified in the command analysis process of step S601, the changing middle decoration pattern 1600b is a pattern "omission, but deviating pattern". It is stopped and displayed, and as a result, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed with a combination of the detached designs, and the player is informed that the variation stop result of the decorative design is "displaced". And

  Next, the peripheral control MPU identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board by the command analysis processing in step S601, and accordingly, in the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The design variation of the left decorative design 1600a, the middle decorative design 1600b, and the right decorative design 1600c is started.

  Then, after that, the peripheral control MPU analyzes that the first reserved number designation command “2” transmitted from the main control board has been received, by the command analysis processing (step S601), and in response to this, , The first reserved memory is digested for the first special symbol, and the reserved image 1521 (display color “blue”) displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and the first special symbol in FIG. 180 (A). 1523 (display color “blue”) and 1524 (display color “rainbow”) that were displayed as the second to third hold storages of the above, become new first and second hold storages and hold images 1521 ( The circular display color “blue”) and the reserved image 1522 (circular display color “rainbow”) are moved and displayed, and the first reserved number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is “2”. FIG. 180 (B) shows the result of the above progress process.

  Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU, in response to the stop display command received from the main control board is specified in the command analysis processing of step S601, the changing middle decoration pattern 1600b is the symbol "omitted, but the symbol is missing. ”Is displayed as a stop, and as a result, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed with a combination of the detached designs, and the player is informed that the variation stop result of the decorative design is“ displaced ”. I will.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board by the command analysis processing in step S601, and accordingly, in the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The design variation of the left decorative design 1600a, the middle decorative design 1600b, and the right decorative design 1600c is started.

  Then, after that, the peripheral control MPU analyzes that the first reserved number designation command “1” transmitted from the main control board has been received, by the command analysis processing (step S601), and in response to this, , The first reserved memory is exhausted for the first special symbol, and the reserved image 1521 (display color “blue”) displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and the first special symbol in FIG. 180 (B). 180223 (display color "rainbow") that was displayed as the second reserved memory for No. 2 becomes the new first reserved memory in FIG. 180C, and is the reserved image 1521 (circular display color "red"). Is displayed as, and the first holding number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is "1".

  In this way, in this example, the display color of the reserved image in the target reserved memory in the above example is changed to "rainbow" by the player's operation of the upper plate effect button 257 during the pending change effect, The final display color of the target reserved image in the reserved storage is predetermined when it is determined to perform the pending change effect.

  The effect that the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is developed is closely related to the reach variation state of the lottery symbols displayed on the display panel and the jackpot notification state, and the player's interest and attention. The degree is very high.

  Therefore, even after the hold change effect is finished, in other words, even after the valid period of the plate effect button 257 is finished, the first hold number display area 1510 is accompanied by 1 when the hold storage is exhausted. The display color of the hold image (the hold image with the display color changed), which is the target of sequentially moving the display position toward the third hold storage, is kept unchanged. Therefore, when the player progresses the game, consideration is given not to reduce the interest of the game without being influenced by the effect information provided from the display panel to be disadvantageous.

  In the specific example shown in the figure, when the reserved image of the target reserved storage is displayed as the first reserved storage in the reserved number display area 1510, the final display color is changed to a predetermined final display color “red”. The reserved image of the reserved storage that is the target is displayed. For this reason, the player who intends to change the color of the reserved image by operating it is given a surprise and a surprise such as "Ah ...? Why is it changing to red?". Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  FIG. 181 is a time schematically showing the pending change effect of this example, the change in the display color of the target pending image, and the display color of the target pending image whose display position is changed as the pending storage is exhausted. It is a chart.

  As shown in FIG. 181, the variation time of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display by the main control MPU and the variation time of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are substantially equal to each other. I am doing it. Also, during the fluctuation of the first special symbol, due to the game ball winning the first starting port 2002, the value of the first special pending number counter of the main control MPU is updated to "4", the main control The first reserve number designation command “4” is output from the board.

  Whether or not the peripheral control MPU performs the hold change effect on condition that the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601). As a result of carrying out the lottery of the hold change effect, it is decided to perform the hold change effect in the lottery of the hold change effect, and in this example, the fourth hold memory is set as the hold memory of the effect target, and the player selects the hold change effect. The operation (referred to as button operation) on the dish effect button 257 is valid. In addition, as the fourth reserved memory determined as the effect target, a reserved image 1524 of a normal display color (circular display color “blue”), which is described as “blue 4” in the figure, is displayed. There is.

  In the hold change effect of this example, the display color of the hold image to be finally displayed (referred to as the final display color) is determined based on the timing of the start winning, and as an example, the effect target It is assumed that the final display color of the hold image is set to "red".

  In FIG. 181, as a result of the first button operation performed by the player during the symbol change, the display of the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved memory determined as the effect target, which is described as “green 4”. The color has changed to "green". After that, as a result of the second button operation performed by the player, the display color of the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved memory determined as the effect target, which is described as "yellow 4", becomes "yellow". Is changing. After that, as a result of the third button operation performed by the player, the display color of the reserved image 1524, which is described as "rainbow 4" and is determined as the effect-targeted fourth reserved memory, is "rainbow". Has changed to.

  After that, the stop display command is output from the main control board based on the fact that the variation of the first special symbol is stopped. The peripheral control MPU stops the variation of the decorative symbol on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in response to the stop display command being specified by the command analysis processing in step S601. At the same time, it is indicated that the button operation is no longer valid (the valid period in which the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is valid has ended).

  After this, the main control MPU, along with the exhaustion of the number of holding the first special symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, in FIG. 181, each variation of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol of the first special symbol indicator. The display is being made three times. A first hold number designation command 3 (hereinafter, simply referred to as hold number designation command 3) is output as the first hold storage is exhausted, and accordingly, the hold image display position in the hold number display area 1510 is displayed. Is performed, and the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved memory determined as the effect target is shifted to the reserved image as the third reserved memory described as “rainbow 3” without changing the display color. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, the first reserved number designation command 2 (hereinafter, simply referred to as reserved number designation command 2) is output as the reserved storage is exhausted for the second time, and accordingly, the reserved image is displayed in the reserved number display area 1510. The reserved image 1524, which is the third reserved memory determined as the effect target after the display position is shifted, is the second reserved memory that is described as “rainbow 2” without changing the display color. It is shifted and displayed.

  Further, with the completion of the third hold storage, the first hold number designation command 1 (hereinafter, simply referred to as hold number designation command 1) is output, and accordingly, the hold image is displayed in the hold number display area 1510. The display position is shifted, and the reserved image 1524 as the second reserved memory that is determined as the effect target is changed to the final display color that is determined as the first reserved memory described as "red 1". It is shifted and displayed on the reserved image of.

[Each process related to pending storage by peripheral control MPU]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing, as each process of the effect control process of step S602 of FIG. 168, each process executed by the peripheral control MPU in relation to the pending storage. In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU sequentially executes the number-of-holds designation command process (step A100), the pending change effect determination process (step A200), the pending change effect process (step A300), and the reserved image shift process (step A400). To do. The substantial execution conditions in each process are as described below.

  When it is specified that the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S601 in the 16 ms steady process shown in FIG. 168 is the first hold number designation command (hereinafter, simply referred to as the hold number designation command), In the effect control process of step S602, the hold number designation command process of step A100 is executed.

  In the processing for specifying the number of holdings in step A100, when it is determined that the number of holding storages has reached a predetermined number (for example, “4” in this example) as the execution condition of the holding change effect for changing the holding image. In the step A200, the hold change effect determination process is substantially executed.

  The hold change effect determination process of step A200 is substantially executed, and when it is determined to perform the hold change effect, the hold change effect process of step A300 is substantially executed. In step A100, when it is determined that the display position of the held image needs to be shifted by detecting that the number of held images is decreased by 1, the held image shift process is substantially executed.

[Reserved number specification command processing]
The number-of-holds designation command processing is executed when the command analyzed by the command analysis in step S601 is identified as the number-of-holds designation command. It is transmitted from the main control board. The hold number designation command is a control command that is output when the hold number (memory number) managed by the main control board changes, and is a command for specifying the hold number.
Hold number specification command "0" that specifies the hold number "0 (none)",
Hold number specification command "1" to specify the hold number "1",
Hold number specification command "2" to specify the hold number "2",
Hold number specification command "3" to specify the hold number "3",
Hold number specification command "4" to specify the hold number "4" (upper limit number),
There are five types.

  183 to 184 are flowcharts showing a subroutine of the number-of-holding designation command processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the number-of-holds designation command, the number-of-holds designated by the number-of-holds designation command analyzed by the command analysis in step S601 is “0” (hereinafter, simply referred to as the designated number of reserves). ) Is determined (step A110).

  When the peripheral control MPU determines in step A110 that the designated number of reservations is "0", the peripheral control MPU sets the value 0 to the first number-of-holds counter for storing the number of reservations (step A111). ), The first to fourth reserved image storage areas set in the built-in RAM (not shown) are cleared (step A112), the reserved number designation command processing subroutine is exited, and the routine returns to the effect control processing routine.

  FIG. 188 is a diagram showing each table, storage area, and processing operation required for the peripheral control MPU to perform each processing related to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 188 (D), the built-in RAM is provided with a first reserved image storage area to a fourth reserved image storage area corresponding to the values 1 to 4 in the first reserved number counter. ..

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step A110 that the designated number of holdings is not "0", the peripheral control MPU proceeds to step A113 and determines whether or not the designated number of holdings is "4" ( It is determined whether or not a predetermined number has been reached (step A113). In this example, the value of the number of holdings is determined to perform the holding change effect with the holding image on condition that the value of the number of holdings reaches a predetermined number. In this example, the predetermined number is described as "4", but the predetermined number is not limited to this. The predetermined number may be a smaller number such as "3" or "2".

  When the peripheral control MPU determines in step A113 that the designated number of reservations is “4”, the peripheral control MPU sets the value 4 to the first number of reservations counter for storing the number of reservations (step A114). ), The reserved image (circular shape) is set at the fourth position in the reserved image storage area (step A115), the display color of the reserved image is set to normal (in this example, “blue”) (step A116), and the reserved The execution flag of the change effect determination process is set (step A117), and the subroutine for the reserved number designation command process is exited to return to the effect control process routine.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step A113 that the designated number of reservations is not "4", the process proceeds to step A113. In this case, the designated number of holdings is any one of "1", "2", and "3". In step A114, the peripheral control MPU compares the designated number of holdings with the value of the first holding number counter (step A120).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the comparison result is an increase of "+1" (step A121). When it is determined that the comparison result is an increase of “+1”, for example, when the designated hold number is “3” and the value of the first hold number counter is 2, the hold number is stored. The value is incremented by 1 in the first pending number counter (step A122), and the pending image (circular shape) is set in the pending image storage area (see FIG. 188 (D)) corresponding to the value in the first pending number counter (step A123). ), The display color of the reserved image is set to normal (“blue” in this example) (step A124), the subroutine for the reserved number designation command process is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A121 that the comparison result is not increased by “+1”, for example, the designated number of holdings is “3” and the value of the first holding number counter is 4, or For example, when the designated number of holdings is “2” and the value of the first holding number counter is 3, the comparison result is “−1”.

  The peripheral control MPU determines NO in step A121, decrements the value of the first holding number counter for storing the holding number by -1 (step A126), and sets the shift flag for executing the holding image shift process described later. 1 (execution) is set (step A127), and the process returns from the holding number designation command processing subroutine to the effect control processing routine.

[Hold change effect determination process]
FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the hold change effect determination process executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the hold change effect determination process, it first determines whether or not the execution flag is set (step A130). The execution flag is set in step A117 of the processing for designating the number of holding commands described above.

  In step A130, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if the determination in step A130 is NO, the peripheral control MPU executes the subroutine for the hold change effect determination process without performing substantial processing. Exit and return to the routine for effect control processing.

  In step A130, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is set, that is, when it determines YES in step A130, the peripheral control MPU acquires a hold change effect random number (for example, 0 to 99) (step A131), referring to the value of the acquired random number for hold change effect and the acquired hold change effect determination table (step A132), it is determined whether or not the hold change effect is performed (step A133).

  FIG. 188 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the distribution ratio of the hold change effect determination table stored in the ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 188 (A), in this example, it is determined that the hold change effect is performed at a distribution ratio of 70%. For the remaining distribution ratio of 30%, another effect (an effect other than the hold change effect) is performed.

  In step A133, if the peripheral control MPU determines not to perform the hold change effect, that is, if it determines NO in step A133, the process proceeds to step A140 to clear the execution flag of the hold change effect determination process (step S133). A140), exits the subroutine of the pending change effect determination process, and returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, the substantial pending change effect process described below is not executed.

  In step A133, if the peripheral control MPU determines to perform the hold change effect, that is, if it determines YES in step A133, the process proceeds to step A134 and sets the execution flag of the hold change effect process (step A134). .. As a result, execution of the hold change effect process is determined.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU acquires a final display color random number (for example, 0 to 6) (step A135), refers to the acquired value of the final display color determination random number and the final display color determination table, and determines the final display color. Is determined (step A136), and the determined final display color reserved image is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step A137).

  FIG. 188 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the final display color determination table stored in the ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 188 (B), if the value of the acquired final display color determination random number is “0”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “blue”, and if the value is “1”, the reserved image is determined. Final display color is determined to be "yellow", if it is "2", the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be "green", and if it is "3", the final display color of the retained image is determined to be "orange". If it is "4", the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be "purple", if it is "5", the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be "red", and if it is "6", the reserved image is determined. The final display color of is determined to be "rainbow".

  Next, the peripheral control MPU sets "1 (stored)" in the storage flag indicating that the final display color has been stored (step A138), and indicates what number of the hold image the hold change effect target is. The display location counter value is set to the number representing the display location, "4" in this example (step A139), and the process proceeds to step A140, where the execution flag for the hold change effect determination process is cleared (step A140), and the hold change effect is set. The subroutine of the determination process is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, the hold change effect process is executed.

[Hold change effect processing]
FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the hold change effect process executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the suspension change effect process, first, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the execution flag is set (step A150). The execution flag is set in step A134 of the pending change effect determination process described above.

  In step A150, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if the determination in step A150 is NO, the peripheral control MPU exits the subroutine for the hold change effect process without performing substantial processing. And returns to the routine of the effect control process. In this case, the hold change effect is not substantially performed.

  In step A150, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is set, that is, when it determines YES in step A150, whether or not there is a button operation (whether the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed) or not. It is determined (step A151). That is, the state in which the execution flag is set is a state in which the player's operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is valid.

  In step A151, when the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a button operation, that is, when it determines YES in step A151, it acquires a random number for operation (for example, 0 to 6) (step A152) and acquires it. By referring to the value of the random number for operation and the display color selection table during operation (step A153), the display color is determined (step A154), and the reserved image of the determined display color is displayed as the fourth reserved image shown in FIG. 188 (D). The image is stored in the image storage area (step A155), and the process proceeds to step A156.

  FIG. 188 (C) is a diagram showing an example of the operation-time display color selection table stored in the ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 188 (C), if the value of the acquired operation random number is “0”, the display color of the hold image is determined to be “rainbow”, and if the value is “1”, the display color of the hold image is It is determined to be "yellow", the display color of the reserved image is determined to be "green" if it is "2", the final display color of the retained image is determined to be "orange" if it is "3", and is determined to be "4". If there is, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be "purple", if it is "5", the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be "green", and if it is "6", the final display color of the reserved image is " "Rainbow" is decided.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step A151 that there is no button operation, that is, when it determines NO in step A151, the peripheral control MPU directly proceeds to step A156 without performing the processing in steps A152 to A155. move on.

  Upon advancing to step A156, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a stop display command has been received (step A156). That is, the peripheral control MPU determines that the stop display command is received when the command analyzed in the command analysis in step S601 identifies the stop display command.

  In step A156, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the stop display command is received, that is, if it determines YES in step A156, it clears the execution flag of the hold change effect process (step A157), The process of the hold change effect process is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, the subsequent pending change effect is not performed. Further, in this example, the state in which the player's operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is valid is ended.

  In step A156, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the stop display command has not been received, that is, if step A156 is NO, the peripheral control MPU does not perform the process of step A157, and executes the subroutine for the hold change effect process. The routine returns to the effect control process. In this case, since the execution flag has been set, the suspension change effect process subroutine is subsequently executed. Therefore, step A152 to step A155 are executed each time the button is operated. Therefore, the display color of the reserved image changes.

  In this way, the hold change effect is performed on condition that the hold number instructed by the control command (first hold number designation command “4”) has reached a predetermined number (eg, 4) set in advance. It has become. Therefore, the player is given a wide range of opportunities to perform the pending change effect. Then, each time the operation input device (upper plate effect button 257) is operated during the execution of the hold change effect, the display color of the effect target hold image 1524 displayed in the hold number display area 1510 is changed. Change. Therefore, during the hold change effect, the player is given an opportunity to operate the operation input device not only once but a plurality of times. Moreover, each time the operation input device is operated, the display color of the effect-holding image changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunity to participate in the participatory type effect by the hold change effect is expanded, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

[Holding image shift processing]
FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the reserved image shift process executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the reserved image shift processing, first, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the shift flag is set (step A160). The shift flag is set in step A127 of the above-described holding number designation command processing.

  In step A160, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the shift flag is not set, that is, if the determination in step A160 is NO, the peripheral control MPU exits the reserved image shift processing subroutine without performing substantial processing. And returns to the routine of the effect control process. In this case, the display position of the reserved image is not substantially shifted (moved to the left by one).

  In step A160, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the shift flag is set, that is, when it determines YES in step A160, it stores the second to fourth reserved image storage areas in FIG. 188 (D). The reserved images are copied to copy areas 1 to 3 (not shown), respectively (step A161), the first to fourth reserved image storage areas are cleared (step A162), and copy areas 1 to 3 (not shown). Each of the reserved images respectively copied to is stored in the first to third reserved image storage areas (step A163). See FIG. 188 (E).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the storage flag is set (step A164). The storage flag is set in step A138 of the pending change effect determination process described above.

  In step A164, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the storage flag is not set, that is, if step A164 is determined to be NO, the reserved image shift processing is performed without performing the processing of steps A165 to A169. The subroutine of (3) is returned to the effect control processing routine. In this case, substantially only the display position of the reserved image is shifted (moved to the left by one).

  On the other hand, in step A164, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the storage flag is set, that is, when it determines YES in step A164, it indicates that the hold change effect has been performed in this case. The peripheral control MPU decrements the value of the display location counter by -1 (step A165), proceeds to step A166, and determines whether the value of the display location counter is "1 (position at which the reserved image is displayed in the final display color)". The determination is made (step A166). By the processing in step A165, the display position of the reserved image that is the effect target is updated.

  In step A166, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the value of the display location counter is not “1”, that is, when step A166 determines NO, the peripheral control MPU performs each processing of step A167 to step A169. Instead, the process returns from the reserved image shift process subroutine to the effect control process routine. In this case, again, substantially only the display position of the reserved image is shifted (moved to the left by one).

  On the other hand, in step A166, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the value of the display location counter is “1”, that is, when step A166 determines YES, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps A167 to A169. To do. That is, in the first reserved image storage area, the reserved image of the final display color previously determined and stored is stored (step A167), the storage flag is cleared (step A168), and "0" is set in the display location counter. It sets (step A169), exits the reserved image shift processing subroutine, and returns to the effect control processing routine.

  The display of the reserved image on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is performed by outputting the image data in the information output process of step S605 of FIG. 168.

  As is clear from the above description, even if the player does not perform the button operation even once, the reserved image [normal display color “blue”] targeted for the effect is the first. When the display position is reached, the held image is displayed in the final display color previously determined and stored, and the display color changes.

  Therefore, even after the hold change effect is finished, in other words, even after the valid period of the plate effect button 257 is finished, the first hold number display area 1510 is accompanied by 1 when the hold storage is exhausted. The holding color (holding image whose display color has been changed), which is an effect target whose display position is sequentially moved toward the third holding memory, is kept unchanged. Therefore, when the player progresses the game, consideration is given not to reduce the interest of the game without being influenced by the effect information provided from the display panel to be disadvantageous.

  In a specific example shown in the figure, when the effect-target reserved image is displayed as the first reserved memory in the reserved number display area 1510, it is changed to a predetermined final display color, for example, “red”. The reserved image that is the effect target is displayed. For this reason, the player who intends to change the color of the reserved image by operating it is given a surprise and a surprise such as "Ah ...? Why is it changing to red?". Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Although the embodiment relating to the hold change effect has been described above, the hold image may be changed to a display color different from a normal display color, for example, “blue”, and the hold image may be displayed in the final display color at the final display position. How a player receives it is entirely up to the player's imagination.

  In the present embodiment, the condition for changing the display color of the reserved image is that the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the determination of the main control MPU is not limited to the pre-reading of the holding condition caused by the winning at the starting opening, such as a big hit, a long reach, or the like.

  In the above embodiment, when the stop display command is received as the end of the valid period of the button operation, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a big hit start command, a determination result notification command, a first hold number designation command. , Or any of the above. For example, when the big hit start command is received as the end of the valid period of the button operation, then, until the big hit game is started, the button operation becomes effective over the multiple variable display of the decorative pattern, and the pending image The display color will change.

  Therefore, during the hold change effect, the opportunity for the player to operate the operation input device is given not only to the variable display with one decorative design but also to the variable display with multiple decorative designs. .. Moreover, each time the operation input device is operated, the display color of the effect-holding image changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunity to participate in the participatory type effect by the hold change effect is expanded, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

[First starting opening passage processing including pre-reading determination processing]
FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the first starting opening passage processing (second embodiment) executed by the main control MPU of the main control board in place of the first starting opening passage processing of FIG. 157. When the main control MPU starts the first starting opening passage process, first, the counter value by the first special reserved number counter is acquired from the main control built-in RAM, and the reserved number of the first special symbol is based on this counter value. It is determined whether the maximum value (upper limit value) is "4" (step S200).

  In step S200, if it is determined that the counter value (the number of first special symbols reserved) by the first special reservation number counter is not the maximum value, that is, if it is determined to be YES in step S200, the first In order to newly hold the variable display control of the special symbol, each processing of the following steps S201 to S206 will be performed.

  When the main control MPU proceeds to step S201, the main control MPU acquires various random number values from various random number counters (step S201). The random number values acquired in step S201 are the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number.

  Next, the main control MPU counts up (+1) the value of the first special pending number counter by 1 (step S202). Next, each random number acquired in step S201 is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S203).

  When the process of step S203 is completed, the process proceeds to a prefetch determination process (described later) (step S204), and the prefetch determination using the first special random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number among the random numbers acquired in step S201. Execute the process. In the pre-reading determination process, a start winning command that reflects information such as a big hit determination, a reach determination, and a deviation is set. When the pre-reading determination process is completed, the main control MPU proceeds to step S205.

  Here, the pre-reading determination process is a dedicated determination process for determining the pre-reading effect at the time of winning the start mouth, but the same process as the big hit determination process and the variation pattern process executed at the start of variation based on the hold. You may judge by doing.

  In step S205, it is determined whether or not the pre-read command (start prize command in this case) transmittable condition is satisfied (step S205). The determination process in step S205 is because there is a condition that prohibits the pre-read command from being transmitted from the main board (main control board) to the sub-board (peripheral control board). For example, if the second special symbol is a priority change, for the time saving game state, it is not permitted to transmit a prefetch command for the first special symbol.

  If it is determined in step S205 that the pre-read command (start prize command in this case) can be transmitted, that is, if step S205 is YES, the start prize command including the pre-read determination result is set ( Step S206), exits the subroutine of the first starting opening passage processing (second embodiment) and returns to the main routine of the special symbol process processing.

  Here, the start winning command including the pre-reading determination result may be a command indicating only the pre-reading determination result, or a command integrated with information other than the pre-reading determination result (for example, a command indicating the number of reserved balls). You may send it. By integrating the prefetch information and other information, it is possible to reduce the number of times information is unnecessarily transmitted as command transmission.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S200, if it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the upper limit value, the variable display control of the first special symbols is not newly suspended. That is, step S200 is determined to be NO, without executing the processes of steps S201 to S206, the subroutine of the first starting opening passage process (second embodiment) is exited and the process returns to the main routine of the special symbol process process. To do.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S205, if it is determined that the condition for transmission of the prefetch command (start prize command in this case) is not satisfied, that is, if step S205 is NO, the process of step S206 is executed. Without, that is, without transmitting the start winning command, the process is passed through the subroutine of the first starting opening passage process (second embodiment) and returns to this routine of the special symbol process process.

[Second starting opening passage processing including pre-reading determination processing]
FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the second starting opening passage processing (second embodiment) executed by the main control MPU of the main control board instead of the second starting opening passage processing of FIG. 158. When the main control MPU starts the second starting port passing process, first, the counter value by the second special holding number counter is acquired from the main control internal RAM, and the holding number of the second special symbol is based on this counter value. It is determined whether the maximum value (upper limit value) is "4" (step S220).

  In step S220, if it is determined that the counter value by the second special holding number counter (holding number of the second special symbol) is not the maximum value, that is, if it is determined to be YES in step S220, the second In order to newly hold the variable display control of the special symbol, each processing of the following steps S222 to S226 will be performed.

  When the main control MPU proceeds to step S221, it acquires the values of various random numbers from various random number counters (step S221). The random number values acquired in step S221 are the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number.

  The random number acquired here may be a dedicated random number related to the second starting port or a random number that is also used as the first starting port. The dual use can reduce the processes and circuits related to the generation of these random numbers.

  Next, the main control MPU counts up (+1) the value of the second special pending number counter by 1 (step S222). Next, each random number acquired in step S221 is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM (step S223).

  When the process of step S223 is completed, the process then proceeds to the prefetch determination process (described later) (step S224), and the prefetch determination using the second special random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number among the random numbers acquired in step S221. Execute the process. In the pre-reading determination process, a start winning command that reflects information such as a big hit determination, a reach determination, and a deviation is set. After completing the prefetch determination processing, the main control MPU proceeds to step S225.

  Here, the pre-reading determination process is a dedicated determination process for determining the pre-reading effect at the time of winning the starting mouth, but the same pre-reading process is performed for the first starting mouth and the second starting mouth described above. May be. Alternatively, the determination may be performed by executing the same processing as the big hit determination processing and the variation pattern processing performed at the start of variation based on the hold.

  In step S225, it is determined whether or not the pre-read command (start prize command in this case) transmission condition is satisfied (step S225). The determination process in step S225 is because there is a condition that prohibits the pre-read command from being transmitted from the main board (main control board) to the sub-board (peripheral control board).

  If it is determined in step S225 that the pre-read command (in this case, the start winning command) can be transmitted, that is, if YES is determined in step S225, the start winning command including the pre-read determination result is set ( Step S226), exits the subroutine of the second starting port passage process (second embodiment) and returns to the main routine of the special symbol process process.

  In this example, the pre-reading command (start winning command) for the second starting port has the same contents as the first starting port. The pre-reading command for the first starting opening and the pre-reading command for the second starting opening may be commands having the same content, or may be commands that can be identified by the first starting opening and the second starting opening.

  When the first start opening and the second start opening are common pre-reading commands, the receiving sub-side does not need to distinguish the pre-reading commands between the first and second pre-reading commands. Therefore, the judgment becomes easy.

  The start winning command set in steps S206 and S226 is transmitted to the peripheral control board in the special symbol command control process of step S16 of FIG. 155 (b).

  On the other hand, in the process of step S221, when it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is the upper limit value, the variable display control of the second special symbols is not newly suspended. That is, step S220 is determined to be NO, without executing the processes of steps S221 to S226, the routine of the special symbol process process is returned through the subroutine of the second starting port passing process (second embodiment). To do.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S225, if it is determined that the condition for transmission of the prefetch command (start winning command in this case) is not satisfied, that is, if it is determined NO in step S225, the process of step S226 is executed. Without, that is, without transmitting the start winning command, it exits the subroutine of the second starting opening passage processing (second embodiment) and returns to this routine of the special symbol process processing.

[Read-ahead judgment process]
FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the prefetch determination processing executed by the main control MPU. When the pre-reading determination processing is started, the main control MPU first executes the big hit determination processing (step S210). The big hit determination process (see FIG. 161) has been described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

  By the execution of the jackpot determination process, if the first special random number obtained in step S201 or the second special random number obtained in step S221 is a value belonging to the jackpot, the jackpot flag is set and the first special random number is set. When the random number or the second special random number is a value that does not belong to the big hit, that is, when the reach random number obtained in step S201 or the reach random number obtained in step S221 belongs to a value that causes the reach, the reach is reached. Flag is set.

  FIG. 192 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used at the time of a big hit set in the main control unit, and FIG. 192 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used at the time of a miss reach. In addition, FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table used at the time of deviation.

  It should be noted that, as shown in FIGS. 192 and 193, the values are biased for each rate variation pattern of the determination value of the variation random number and each pseudo continuous number. For example, in the table at the time of a big hit, the distribution ratio is higher as the super B having a higher expectation and the number of pseudo-repetitions is larger, and the distribution ratio is lower as the expectation is lower as in normal.

  For example, the fluctuation patterns 11 to 13 are set as judgment values (61 to 104) indicating that 44 kinds of fluctuation random numbers out of 105 kinds of fluctuation random numbers execute super pseudo B three times or more, Fluctuation pattern 1 to fluctuation pattern 3 are set as determination values (0 to 14) indicating that 15 types of fluctuation random numbers execute normal.

  In addition, in the table at the time of reach lose, conversely to the big hit, the higher the expectation, the higher the super B or the number of pseudo-repetitions, the lower the distribution rate, and the lower the expectation, such as normal, the higher the distribution rate. I have to.

  For example, the fluctuation patterns 22 to 26 are set as the determination values (86 to 104) indicating that 19 kinds of fluctuation random numbers out of 105 kinds of fluctuation random numbers execute the super B, and fluctuation patterns 14 to 16 are set. Is set as a determination value (0 to 53) indicating that 54 types of variable random numbers execute normal.

  As shown in FIG. 193, in the out-of-phase variation pattern table, 40 types of variation random numbers out of 105 types of variation random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 39) indicating that the variation pattern 27 without pseudo-linking is executed. , 30 kinds of fluctuation random numbers are set as judgment values (40 to 69) indicating that the fluctuation pattern 28 is executed once in a pseudo series, and 20 kinds of fluctuation random numbers execute the fluctuation pattern 29 twice in a pseudo series. Is set as a determination value (70 to 89) indicating 5 types, and 5 types of variation random numbers are set as determination values (90 to 94) indicating that the variation pattern 30 of pseudo continuous 4 times is executed, and 10 types of variation random numbers are set. It is set as a determination value (95 to 104) indicating that the variation pattern 31 is executed three times in a pseudo series.

  After finishing the jackpot determination process, the main control MPU proceeds to step S211 and determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S211). If the big hit flag is set (YES in step S211), the big hit variation pattern table is selected (step S212), the big hit flag is reset (step S213), and the process proceeds to step S218.

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S211 (NO in step S211), it is determined whether or not the reach flag is set (step S214). If the reach flag is set in step S214 (YES in step S214), the variation pattern table at the time of reach is selected (step S215), the reach flag is reset (step S216), and the process proceeds to step S218.

  When it is determined in step S214 that the reach flag has not been set (NO in step S214), that is, neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag has been set, and the normal deviation occurs (reach effect is not executed). In this case, the variation pattern table at the time of deviation is selected (step S217) and the process proceeds to step S218. .

  When the main control MPU proceeds to step S218, the main control MPU selects a variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number acquired in step S201 or step S221, and issues a start winning command corresponding to the variation pattern type. The determination is made (step S218), and the subroutine of the pre-reading determination process is exited and the process returns to the original starting port passage process routine of the return destination. As described above, the start winning command including the information on the variation pattern such as whether or not it is a big hit and whether or not to reach is determined.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the design random number (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation patterns set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is varied. It is stored in the form of being associated with each random number.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of jackpot and at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. Has been done.

  For example, in the variation pattern table at the time of a big hit, 15 types of variation random numbers out of 105 types of variation random numbers are set as a determination value (0 to 14) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 36 types of variation random numbers. Is set as a judgment value (15 to 50) indicating that one of the super reach A effects with low jackpot expectations is to be executed, and 54 kinds of variable random numbers execute any of the super reach B effects with high jackpot expectations. It is set as a determination value (51 to 104) indicating that

  It should be noted that the super reach B effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect and the super reach A effect, and for a player who desires the occurrence of the big hit game state, the jackpot game state when the super reach B effect is executed. Players' expectations for the game are increasing.

  Further, in the reach variation pattern table, 54 types of variation random numbers out of 105 types of variation random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 53) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 32 types of variation random numbers. Is set as a judgment value (54 to 85) indicating that one of the super reach A effects with low jackpot expectations is to be executed, and 19 kinds of variable random numbers execute any of the super reach B effects with high jackpot expectations. It is set as a determination value (86 to 104) indicating that

  The fluctuation pattern table (big hit, reach, normal loss) may be shared by the first starting opening (special figure 1) and the second starting opening (special figure 2), or may be selected at different ratios. It is also possible to provide a fluctuation pattern table set to. In the case of sharing, the special pattern 1 and the special diagram 2 do not need to be provided with the variation pattern table, so that the storage capacity can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to make the special patterns 1 and 2 common in the process of selecting the variation pattern.

  On the other hand, when the special pattern 1 and the special pattern 2 are provided with the fluctuation pattern tables, it is possible to draw the fluctuation patterns at different ratios, or to provide the fluctuation patterns dedicated to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. become. Rather than making the variation pattern tables for all (big hits, reach, normal loss) non-common, only some variation pattern tables (for example, variation pattern table for normal loss) may be different.

[Pseudo continuous fluctuation of decorative pattern]
It should be noted that, for example, some of the normal variation effects that are out of the above-described super reach (A) and (B) include variation patterns of pseudo-relational variation display. The pseudo-relation is displayed during the production corresponding to the one-time winning / judgment determination, that is, on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device display device 1500, the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is started and stopped. Until then, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable display and a stop display a plurality of times, and is an effect that gives the player an illusion as if a plurality of hit determinations were executed in one change.

  For example, in the example of the variation pattern in which the pseudo-repeating is performed three times, the start of the variable display is the start of the first variation, and the first temporary variation is performed and then the first variation is performed again. At the time of temporary stop, a combination of temporary stop symbols is temporarily stopped. Then, in the pseudo continuous variation pattern, for example, the temporary stop and re-variation are performed the number of times set in the variation pattern, the second temporary stop is performed, and then the second re-variation is performed. After the third temporary stop is performed, the third re-variation (last re-variation) is performed, and at the end of the last re-variation, in the central liquid crystal display device 1500, as the final stop symbol (confirmed stop symbol) , The combination of big hit symbols, or the combination of outlying symbols is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the case of the variation pattern that reaches, the reach symbol is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 at the time of the last re-variation to enter the reach state, and the reach effect is performed. The reach may be established at the first temporary stop. In this case, the re-fluctuation is not finalized Re-fluctating the symbols after this time

  Furthermore, regarding the result at the time of temporary stop, you may temporarily stop as a chance eye with a special stop symbol that does not appear at the time of fixed stop, in any or all of the left, right, middle symbols, It is also possible to temporarily stop the symbols dedicated to the pseudo-relation that do not appear in the fixed stop.

[Preliminary effect due to pseudo-variation due to decorative pattern]
FIG. 194 is a time chart that schematically shows the pseudo-reciprocal fluctuation due to the decorative pattern and the notice effect accompanying the pseudo-reciprocal fluctuation. In addition, in FIG. 194, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation is performed three times is shown as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 194, the peripheral control MPU identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board in the command analysis processing of step S601, and accordingly, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is identified. On the display panel, the pattern variation of the left decorative design 1600a, the middle decorative design 1600b, and the right decorative design 1600c is started. For example, see FIG. 178 (B).

  In the peripheral control MPU, it is determined that the pseudo continuous fluctuation is performed three times based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command. In addition, it is determined that a notice effect is performed for each re-variation during the pseudo-variation. After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, after entering a pseudo continuous fluctuation and after the first temporary stop (for example, after the left decorative design 1600a, the middle decorative design 1600b and the right decorative design 1600c stop at the temporary stop design) The first re-variation is performed. It is shown that the notice effect (notice 1) is being performed along with the first change. The notice effect will be described later.

  After this, after the second temporary stop by the left decorative design 1600a, the middle decorative design 1600b and the right decorative design 1600c is performed, the second change is performed again. It is shown that the notice effect (notice 2) is being performed along with the second change.

  Furthermore, after this, after the third temporary stop by the left decorative design 1600a, the middle decorative design 1600b and the right decorative design 1600c, the third re-variation (the last re-variation) is performed. It is shown that the notice effect (notice 3) is being performed along with the third change.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU stops the variation in response to the stop display command received from the main control board being specified by the command analysis processing in step S601. For example, as shown in FIG. 180 (A), the changing middle decoration pattern 1600b is stopped and displayed at the design "4", and the left, middle, and right decoration patterns in the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are displayed. The reduced display is canceled and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is displayed by returning to the original center position and size on the display panel. As a result, the left decorative design is "3", the middle decorative design is design "4" and The right decorative design is stopped and displayed with the design “3”, which indicates that the player has been notified that the variation stop result of the decorative design is “out of reach”. It is also shown that this also ends the notice production.

[Specific example of notice production]
FIG. 195 is a diagram showing a specific example of the notice effect. FIG. 195 shows an example of the notice effect using the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the notice effect is performed in accordance with the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation is performed three times as described above with reference to FIG. 194. The display examples of 1, notice 2 and notice 3 are shown. In addition, the notice effect of this example is implemented by a character display, a voice, or a "serif" expressed by both a character display and a voice.

  Note that the notice effect is not limited to “serif”, and the lamp / LED, the sound (speakers 130, 222, 262, etc.), the movable accessory (for example, the front movable operation unit 2560, the front movable operation unit). 2570, the back upper movable effect unit 3100, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200, the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back lower rear movable effect unit 3500, the back four corner movable effect unit 3600, etc. are appropriately used. ), The display by the central liquid crystal display device 1500 may be performed by any one of the rendering devices, and is not limited to the rendering by each rendering device alone, and a plurality of lamps and voices, lamps and voices and movable accessory objects, and the like. It may be a combination of the production devices.

  As shown in FIG. 195 (A), when the notice effect is executed, the left, middle, and right decorative designs are reduced in the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 to perform the variable display (first time). Pseudo-variation). In addition, for example, a character "What is it?" Is displayed in the approximate center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 as "notice 1" and the line of PTN2, and the player is informed by the notice. Is shown.

  It should be noted that, as will be described later, the notice production of the present embodiment notifies the player of the degree of reliability suggesting that there is a possibility of a big hit by a notice. Further, seven types of notices, PTN1 to PTN7, are prepared in the notice effect of the present example. Further, PTN1 has the lowest reliability, and PTN7 has the highest reliability, and PTN7 has the highest reliability.

  As shown in FIG. 195 (B), for example, the words “Take me home?” Are displayed in the approximate center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, such as “PTN4 lines” as “notice 2”. It is displayed, and it is shown that this is a suggestion to the player by advance notice.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of fluctuations such as pseudo-variation fluctuations are performed, and the reliability of the suggested warning is not lowered when the warning presentation effect is performed over the plurality of fluctuations (so-called fall does not occur. Like). As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game of the player from decreasing in the course of the game.

  In the illustrated example, the reliability of the dialogue of PTN4, which is the second notice effect, is higher than the reliability of the dialogue of PTN2, which is the first notice effect. Note that, here, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are reduced and variable display is executed (second pseudo-continuous variation).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 195 (C), for example, "Warning ♪ Waku Waku ♪" is written in the substantial center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 as "Notice 3", PTN6 lines. The characters are displayed, and it is shown that this is a suggestion given to the player by advance notice.

  In the illustrated example, the reliability of the dialogue of PTN6, which is the third notice production, is exceptionally higher than the reliability of the dialogue of PTN4, which is the second notice production. Therefore, it depends on the player, but it reminds me that the big hit is approaching.

  Note that, here, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are reduced and variable display is executed (third pseudo-continuous variation).

[Determination of announcement (serif) in announcement production]
FIG. 196 is a diagram showing a high or low degree of reliability of a notice (serif) in the notice production, and a notice lottery distribution table used for determining the notice (line) in the notice production.

[Reliability of notice in notice production]
As described above, seven types of PTN1 to PTN7 are prepared as the lines suggested in the notice presentation of this example. Further, the high degree of reliability suggested by the serif PTN of the notice production is the lowest in PTN1, the highest in the ascending order by the number attached, and the highest in PTN7. FIG. 196 shows that the reliability of the serif PTN is “PTN1 <PTN2 <PTN3 <PTN4 <PTN5 <PTN6 <PTN7”.

[Preliminary lottery distribution table]
In the present embodiment, the advance notice to be displayed for each change in the advance notice effect is stored in the peripheral control ROM (not shown, hereinafter simply referred to as ROM) and the obtained value of the random number for advance notice determination obtained by lottery. It is decided based on the lottery distribution table. As shown in FIG. 196, in the advance notice lottery distribution table, a different type of advance notice production speech PTN is set depending on the type of the variation pattern.

  For example, in the variation patterns 1 to 8, the advance notice lottery table 1 is selected. When the advance notice lottery table 1 is selected, five types of lines PTN1 to PTN5 can be selected. Further, for example, in the variation patterns 9 to 22, the advance notice lottery table 2 is selected. When the advance notice lottery table 2 is selected, seven types of dialogue PTN1 to dialogue PTN7 can be selected.

[Distribution of notice selected by notice lottery sort table]
In the notice lottery distribution table shown in FIG. 196, for example, when the change pattern is the change pattern 1, the notice lottery table 1 is selected. If the acquired value (hereinafter, referred to as an acquired value) of the random number for preliminary announcement acquired by lottery is in the range of 0 to 200, "PNT1" is selected and determined as the notification, and if the acquired value is in the range of 201 to 400. , "PNT2" is selected and decided as the notice, and if the acquired value is in the range of 401 to 600, "PNT3" is selected and decided as the notice, and if the acquired value is in the range of 601 to 800, "PNT4" is used as the notice. Is selected and determined, and if the acquired value is in the range of 801 to 1000, “PNT5” is selected and determined as a notice.

  Further, in the case of the variation pattern 22, the notice lottery table 2 is selected. If the acquired value is in the range of 0 to 100, "PNT1" is selected and decided as the notice, and if the acquired value is in the range of 101 to 200, "PNT2" is selected and decided as the notice and the acquired value is 201 to 300. "PNT3" is selected and decided as a notice when the range is, and "PNT4" is selected and decided as a notice when the obtained value is in the range of 301 to 400, and when the obtained value is in the range of 401 to 600, If “PNT5” is selected and decided as the notice and the acquired value is in the range of 601-800, “PNT6” is selected and decided as the notice, and if the acquired value is in the range of 801-1000, “PNT7” is decided as the notice. The choice is made.

  The allocation of acquired values set in the advance notice lottery distribution table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 196, and the distribution ratio of acquired values may be reduced as the reliability of the advance notice increases. Further, the distribution ratio of the intermediate reliability (PTN4) may be increased and the distribution ratio of the acquired values on both sides (PTN1 and PTN7) may be lowered. By increasing the distribution ratio in the middle of the reliability, it is possible to easily select the intermediate value of the reliability and prevent both ends of the reliability from being selected. As described above, by using the notice lottery table in which the distribution rates of the acquired values are different, the notice lottery with various variations becomes possible.

  Although FIG. 196 shows that one advance notice lottery table is selected for one variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of advance notice lottery tables may be selectable with one variation pattern. The selection method may be switched based on a method based on a random number or a predetermined game state such as a game state.

[Number of pseudo runs]
Further, in this example, whether or not to perform the pseudo-relation is determined depending on the type of the variation pattern, and when it is determined to perform the pseudo-repetition, the number of times of the pseudo-repetition is determined. When it is determined that the pseudo-repeating is performed, the number of times the pseudo-repeating is determined is determined in the range of 1 to a maximum of 5. Note that, depending on the number of pseudo runs, they are represented as pseudo run 1, pseudo run 2, pseudo run 3, pseudo run 4, and pseudo run 5.

[Prevention of deterioration of the reliability of the notice in the notice production]
In the present embodiment, a plurality of fluctuations such as pseudo-variation fluctuations are performed, and the reliability of the suggested warning is not lowered when the notice presentation is performed over the plurality of fluctuations (so-called fall does not occur. Is taken into consideration.

  Therefore, in this example, in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, based on the acquired value of the preliminary announcement determination random number acquired by the first lottery, the upper limit value of the preliminary announcement random number to be the next lottery target is switched. There is.

[Example of value obtained from random number for determining advance notice]
In the case where the pseudo-relation 3 is determined first, it is separately determined whether or not the notice effect is executed for each variation of the pseudo-relationship, and the aspect of the notice effect is determined only when it is determined that the notice effect is executed. In order to do so, random numbers for schedule determination are drawn three times. In the advance notice lottery distribution table of FIG. 196, for example, when the variation pattern is the variation pattern 22, it is assumed that the total number of random numbers for schedule determination is 1001 (0 to 1000).

  First, in the final, that is, in the third line of the pseudo announcement, the random number is drawn within the range of 0 to 1000, and if the acquired value is 700, the third notice is set to the line PTN6.

  Next, when the upper limit of the random number for advance notice determination that is the target of the lottery is switched based on the acquired value 700, in this case, the upper limit of the acquisition range of the random number for advance notice determination in the PTN 6 is switched to 800. In the second pseudo-serif announcement, random number lottery is performed in the range of the announcement determination random number from 0 to 800, and if the acquired value is 350, the second announcement is determined to be the dialogue PTN4.

  Next, when the upper limit of the random number for advance notice determination that is the target of one lottery is switched based on the acquired value 350, in this case, it is switched to 400 which is the upper limit of the acquisition range of the random number for advance notice determination in PTN4. As a result, in the first pseudo announcement of the dialogue, random number lottery is performed in the range of the announcement determination random number from 0 to 400, and if the acquired value is 150, the first announcement is determined to be the dialogue PTN2.

  Then, the determined lottery results of the three notice effects are stored in the notice data storage area set in the RAM (not shown). In this case, the first notice is stored in the notice data storage area 1 in the dialog PTN2, the second notice is stored in the notice data storage area 2 in the notice PTN4, and the third notice is written in the notice data storage area 3 in the dialogue PTN6. Memorized in.

[Random number for advance notice]
The random number for advance notice determination used in the above-described lottery is a so-called ring counter in which the value is cyclically updated (for example, the value is incremented by +1) within the range of 0 to an upper limit value (for example, 1000). In this example, the peripheral control MPU is configured by a software counter that performs control processing (for example, the random number update processing of step S606 of FIG. 168). Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a random counter that randomly updates a predetermined range, or a counter that is updated as hardware.

Further, in this example, in order to realize the random number lottery described above, seven random number counters are provided in correspondence with the random numbers for advance notice determination having different upper limit values, corresponding to the provision of seven types of advance notice by distribution. Is provided. As shown in FIG. 201 (A),
The value of the random number counter 1 is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to the upper limit value (= 1000),
The value of the random number counter 2 is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to the upper limit value (= 800),
The value of the random number counter 3 is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to the upper limit value (= 600),
The value of the random number counter 4 is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to the upper limit value (= 400),
The value of the random number counter 5 is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to the upper limit value (= 300),
The value of the random number counter 6 is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to the upper limit value (= 200),
The value of the random number counter 7 is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to the upper limit value (= 100).

  It should be noted that, as described above, the random number for advance notice determination is not limited to a plurality of random number counters having different upper limit values, and one random number counter may be used. In that case, the upper limit value of the random number counter needs to be appropriately changed as the upper limit value of the random number for advance notice determination is changed.

  When the upper limit value of the random number counter is changed, the current value indicated by the random number counter may exceed the upper limit value. In that case, if the random number counter is generated by software, it is necessary to correct it to a value that does not exceed the upper limit value by calculation or the like. Various methods can be considered for the calculation. For example, when the random number counter sets a new upper limit value and a value exceeding the upper limit value is set, the upper limit value is subtracted from the set value. However, the subtracted value may be set as the initial position of a new random number counter.

[Each process related to notice production by peripheral control MPU]
FIG. 197 (A) is a flowchart showing, as each process of the effect control process of step S602 of FIG. 168, each process related to the determination of the notice effect by the peripheral control MPU. In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU sequentially executes the notice effect determination process (step A450) and the notice effect process (step A500). The substantial execution conditions in each process are as described below.

  When it is specified that the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S601 in the 16 ms steady process shown in FIG. 168 is a variation pattern command, the notice effect determination process of step A450 is performed in the effect control process of step S602. Substantially executed.

  The notice effect determination process of step A450 is substantially executed, and when it is determined to perform the notice effect, the notice effect determined in the notice effect process of step A500 is executed.

[Preliminary effect determination process 1]
In the notice effect determination process 1 (first example) described below, when the main control MPU transmitting the variation pattern determines the variation pattern, the variation time of the variation and information on whether or not to perform pseudo-linking. If it is decided to perform pseudo-repeating, information on the number of times of pseudo-repeating is set to be distinguishable in the variation pattern command. When it is determined to perform the pseudo-repeating, the number of times of the pseudo-repeating to be determined is determined in the range of 1 to 5 at the maximum. It should be noted that, depending on the number of times of pseudo run, the pseudo run 1, the pseudo run 2, the pseudo run 3, the pseudo run 4, and the pseudo run 5 are provided.

  FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the notice effect determination process 1 executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the preliminary control determination process 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is to execute pseudo-link (step A200).

  When it is determined in step A200 that the variation pattern does not execute the pseudo-relation, that is, when step A200 is determined to be NO, the process proceeds to step A207, another production is selected (step A207), and Without executing the preliminary announcement effect determination processing 1, the subroutine of the announcement effect determination processing 1 is exited and the process returns to the effect control processing routine.

  In step A200, the peripheral control MPU sets an execution flag of the notice effect process when it determines that the variation pattern is to execute pseudo-link, that is, when it determines YES in step A200 (step S200). A201).

  Next, the number of pseudo runs is specified by the variation pattern (step A202), and the number of pseudo runs is stored in the revariation number storage area CN1 set in the RAM (not shown) (step A203). The pseudo timing in time is set in the timer (step A204). The timer value set in the timer is decreased by one by a timer subtraction process (not shown) until the value becomes 0 every predetermined period (for example, every 2 ms).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU copies the number of pseudo runs stored in the re-change count storage area CN1 to the storage counter CN2 (step A205). Here, the storage counter CN2 is a counter whose value can be in the range of 1 to 5, and as shown in FIG. 201 (B), is used to specify the advance notice data storage area corresponding to the value. It is a counter. For example, when the number of pseudo-repetitions is 3, the value of the storage counter CN2 is “3”, and when the number of pseudo-repetitions is 5, the value of the storage counter CN2 is, for example. Becomes "5".

  The peripheral control MPU proceeds to step A206 after step A205 to execute the notice determination process (step A206). When the notice determination process is exited, the peripheral control MPU exits the subroutine of the notice effect determination process 1 and returns to the effect control process routine.

[Preliminary decision processing]
FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the notice determination process executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the advance notice determination process, first, the peripheral control MPU identifies the reference portion of the advance notice lottery distribution table shown in FIG. 196 by the type of the variation pattern (step A230). Here, the reference part of the advance notice lottery distribution table means a distribution division shown in a tabular form in a horizontally arranged line in the advance notice lottery table selected corresponding to the type of the variation pattern.

  For example, when the type of the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern 22, the advance notice lottery table 2 is selected as shown in FIG. 196. The sorting classification in the advance notice lottery table 2 is a range of 0 to 100, a range of 101 to 200, a range of 201 to 300, a range of 301 to 400, a range of 401 to 600, a range of 601 to 800, and a range of 801 to 1000. , And 7 categories.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU acquires a preliminary announcement determination random number (step A231). In this case, since it is the first time, the random number counter 1 whose upper limit value shown in FIG. 201 (A) is set to “1000” is the target, and the value is acquired (simply referred to as the acquired value).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU determines the type of advance notice based on the acquired value and the specified reference unit (step A232). For example, when the acquired value is "750", the type of notice (serif) to be determined is "PTN6". Next, the notice data of the determined type is stored in the notice data storage area corresponding to the value of the storage counter CN2 (step A233).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 201 (B), if the value of the storage counter CN2 is “3”, the advance notice data “PTN6” is stored in the advance notice data storage area of the third change. If the value of the storage counter CN2 is "5", the advance notice data "PTN6" is stored in the advance notice data storage area of the fifth re-change.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU changes to the random number for advance notice determination having the upper limit value corresponding to the acquired value acquired in step A231 (step A234). For example, when the above-mentioned acquired value is “750”, the random number counter 2 shown in FIG. 201 (A) is set to the value (800) which is the upper limit value of the acquired range in the specified reference part. The target is changed. Next, in response to storing one piece of advance notice data, the value of the storage counter CN2 is decremented by 1 (step A235), the process proceeds to step A236, and the value of the storage counter CN2 becomes "0 (storage completion)". It is determined whether or not it has become (step A236).

  If it is determined in step A236 that the value of the storage counter CN2 is not “0 (storage completion)”, that is, if step A236 is determined to be NO, the process returns to step A231 to change the target random number. The counter 2 obtains a random number for advance notice determination (step A231). The above processing routine is repeated until the value of the storage counter CN2 becomes "0".

  When the value of the storage counter CN2 is “2”, an example will be described. If the value obtained in step A231 is 350, the second notice data is determined to be “PTN4”, and the notice data “PTN4” is reset. The change is stored in the second notice data storage area.

  Then, in step A234, based on the acquired value 350, the random number counter 4 shown in FIG. 201 (A), which is the target of one-time lottery, is set to the value (400) which is the upper limit value of the acquired range. The target is changed. In step A235, the value of the storage counter CN2 becomes “1”, and after the step A236 is determined to be NO, the process returns to step A231, and the target-changed random number counter 4 obtains the preliminary announcement determination random number.

  If the value obtained in step A231 is 150, the first notice data is determined to be "PTN2", and the notice data "PTN2" is stored in the re-change first notice data storage area. Then, in step A234, the target is changed to the random number counter 6 shown in FIG. 201 (A), which is the lottery target, based on the acquired value 150, so that the value becomes the upper limit value (200) of the acquisition range. However, in step A235, the value of the storage counter CN2 becomes "0", and if step A236 is determined to be YES and the advance notice determination process is exited, the subroutine of the advance notice effect determination process 1 is exited and the effect control process routine is executed. Return to.

  As a result, “previous notice 6”, “previous notice 4”, and “previous notice 2” are stored as the advance notice data in the advance notice data storage area in the order of the third change, the second change, and the first change. Each time the above-mentioned random number lottery is performed, there is a possibility that the same sorting category as the previous one may be rarely generated, but the upper limit value of the random number for advance notice determination is usually small. Therefore, the determined advance notice data is determined from the one having the highest reliability to the low reliability, and the advance notice data is stored in the advance notice data storage area in the order of the third, second, and first re-changes. When it is determined in step A236 that the value of the storage counter CN2 is “0”, the subroutine of the advance notice determination process is exited, and further, the subroutine of the advance notice effect determination process 1 is exited and the effect control process is performed. Return to the routine. In this way, the advance notice stored in the advance notice data storage area has a degree of reliability equal to or higher than that of the advance notice that appears as the re-variation progresses, so that the decrease in reliability is prevented.

[Advance notice processing]
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the notice effect process executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the notice effect process, first, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the execution flag is set (step A210). The execution flag is set in step A201 of the notice effect determination process 1 described above.

  In step A210, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if the determination in step A210 is NO, the peripheral control MPU exits the notice effect process subroutine without performing substantial processing. It returns to the routine of production control processing. In this case, the notice production is not substantially performed.

  In step A210, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is set, that is, if it determines YES in step A210, it determines whether it is the advance notice timing (step A211).

  In step A211, if the peripheral control MPU determines that it is not the advance notice timing, that is, if step A211 determines NO, the peripheral control MPU exits the advance notice effect process subroutine and performs the effect control process without performing substantial processing. Return to routine. In this case, the notice production is not substantially performed.

  In step A211, if the peripheral control MPU determines that it is the advance notice timing, that is, if step A211 determines YES, the value of the storage counter CN2 is incremented by 1 (step A212), and the value of the storage counter CN2 is increased. The advance notice data stored in the advance notice data storage area corresponding to is transferred to the output area (step A213), and the process proceeds to step A214. The value of the storage counter CN2 is determined to be "0" in step A236 of the advance notice determination processing of FIG. 199.

  In this case, at the time of the first re-change, "PTN2" of the first notice data corresponding to the value "1" of the storage counter CN2 is transferred to the output area.

  When the peripheral control MPU proceeds to step A214, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the value of the storage counter CN2 has reached the value of the revariation number storage area CN1 (the number of times of pseudo-repeating) (step A214). If it is determined in step A214 that the value of the storage counter CN2 has not reached the value of the re-change count storage area CN1 (the number of pseudo runs), that is, if step A214 is determined to be NO, the advance notice effect is produced. The process subroutine is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

  Note that the display of the advance notice data transferred to the output area in step A213 on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 outputs image data (in this case, “PN2”) in the information output process of step S605 of FIG. 168. It will be realized.

  Hereinafter, with the execution flag being set, the value of the storage counter CN2 is maintained until the value of the storage counter CN2 reaches the value of the re-variation number storage area CN1 (the number of pseudo runs) at each advance notice timing. The advance notice data stored in the advance notice data storage area corresponding to is transferred to the output area. Therefore, in the case of pseudo-link 3, the notice data "PTN4" is transferred to the output area at the second re-variation, and the notice data "PTN6" is then output at the third re-variation. Transferred to the area.

  Then, in step A214, it is determined that the value of the storage counter CN2 has reached the value of the revariation number storage area CN1 (the number of pseudo runs), that is, it is determined YES in step A214, and the revariation number is stored. The area CN1 is set to 0 (step A215), the storage counter CN2 is set to 0 (step A216), the notice effect process execution flag is cleared (step A217), and the notice effect process subroutine is exited. Return to the processing routine. It should be noted that the notice effect ends when the execution flag of the notice effect process is cleared.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while making a plurality of fluctuations such as the pseudo continuous fluctuation, when making a notice that suggests the reliability over the plurality of variations, the reliability of the suggested notice does not decrease. (So-called, so as not to cause a fall). As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game of the player from decreasing in the course of the game.

[Second embodiment of notice production]
In the above-described embodiment, when the main control MPU that transmits the fluctuation pattern determines the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation, information on whether to perform pseudo-coupling, and whether to perform pseudo-coupling are determined. If it is present, the information on the number of pseudo runs is set so as to be distinguishable in the variation pattern command. However, when the variation pattern command output from the main control board to the peripheral control board specifies only the variation time, the advance notice is made according to the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command. It may be determined whether or not to perform.

  For example, when the notice production is performed when the variation time of the variation is short (for example, less than 20 seconds), the variation display of the variation ends immediately, so that the notice production cannot be performed within the time and the interest in the game is increased. May decrease. In this embodiment, the notice effect is performed when the variation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined variation time (20 seconds or more in this example). The type of the fluctuation pattern is identifiable, and the type of the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern 22 shown in FIG. 196.

[Preliminary effect determination process 2]
FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the notice effect determination process 2 (second embodiment) executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the notice production determination process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is equal to or longer than the predetermined time at which the pseudo-link can be executed. (Step A240).

  If it is determined in step A240 that the variation time is not longer than or equal to the predetermined time at which the pseudo-relation can be executed, that is, if step A240 is determined to be NO, substantial notice effect determination process 2 is not performed. Then, the subroutine of the notice effect determination process 2 is returned to the routine of the effect control process.

  In step A240, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the variation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time at which the pseudo-link can be executed, that is, when it determines YES in step A240, the notice effect random number (for example, 0 to 99) is acquired (step A241), the value of the obtained random number for advance notice effect and the advance notice effect determination table are referred to (step A242), and it is determined whether or not to perform advance notice effect (step A243).

  FIG. 201C is a diagram showing an example of a distribution rate of the notice effect determination table stored in the ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 201 (C), in the present example, it is determined that the notice effect is performed at a proportion of 70%. For the remaining distribution ratio of 30%, another effect (an effect other than the notice effect) is performed.

  In step A243, if the peripheral control MPU determines not to perform the notice effect, that is, if NO in step A243, the peripheral control MPU performs the notice effect determination process 2 without performing the notice effect determination process 2. The subroutine is exited to return to the effect control processing routine. In this case, the substantial notice effect process described later is not executed.

  In step A243, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the notice effect is to be performed, that is, if it determines YES in step A243, the process proceeds to step A244, and sets the execution flag of the notice effect process (step A244). As a result, execution of the notice production process is determined.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU acquires a pseudo-repetition number random number (for example, 0 to 4) (step A245), and refers to the value of the acquired pseudo-repetition number random number and the number of times determination table to determine the number of times of the pseudo reconnection. (Step A246), the determined number of times of pseudo-repeating is stored in the re-variation number storage area CN1 of the RAM (step A247).

  FIG. 201 (D) is a diagram showing an example of the number-of-times determination table stored in the ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 201 (D), if the value of the acquired pseudo-repetition number determining random number is “0”, the number of pseudo-repetitions is determined to be “1 time, pseudo-repetition 1”, and the acquired pseudo-repetition number is determined. If the value of the random number for use is "1", the number of pseudo runs is determined as "2 times, pseudo run 2", and if the value of the acquired random number for determining the number of pseudo runs is "2", the number of pseudo runs is If the value of the acquired pseudo-repetition number determining random number is “3”, the number of pseudo-repetitions is determined to be “4 times, pseudo-repetition 4”, and the acquired pseudo-repetition is determined. If the value of the random number for determining the number of times is “4”, the number of pseudo runs is determined to be “5 times, pseudo run 5”.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU sets the timing of pseudo-relation in the variable time in the timer (step A248). The timer value set in the timer is decreased by one by a timer subtraction process (not shown) until the value becomes 0 every predetermined period (for example, every 2 ms).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU copies the number of pseudo runs stored in the re-change number storage area CN1 to the storage counter CN2 (step A249). Here, the storage counter CN2 is a counter whose value can be in the range of 1 to 5, and as shown in FIG. 201 (B), is used to specify the advance notice data storage area corresponding to the value. It is a counter. For example, when the number of pseudo-repetitions is 3, the value of the storage counter CN2 is “3”, and when the number of pseudo-repetitions is 5, the value of the storage counter CN2 is, for example. Becomes "5".

  The peripheral control MPU proceeds to step A250 after step A249 to execute the notice determination process (step A250). When the notice determination process is completed, the peripheral control MPU exits the subroutine of the notice production determination process 2 and returns to the routine of the production control process. Note that the advance notice determination process is as shown in FIG. 199 described above. Further, the notice effect process is also as shown in FIG.

[Modified example of advance notice determination processing]
The notice production determination process 1 and the notice production determination process 2 described above are based on the peripheral control MPU specifying the variation pattern in the command analysis process of step S601, and determine to perform the notice production in accordance with the pseudo-link. , Before the pseudo-relation is started, the random number (0 to 1000) for predicting the announcement is used to indicate each re-variation of the pseudo-relation, and the acquired value of the random number for determining the announcement is used each time the announcement is determined. By changing the upper limit value, the reliability of each notice that is sequentially suggested is determined so as not to decrease.

[Third embodiment relating to notice production]
For example, in the case of the pseudo-run 3, the above-mentioned notice production determination process 1 and notice production determination process 2 predetermine the first notice, the second notice, and the third notice before the pseudo-relation starts. ing. In the third embodiment described below, a suggested notice (reliability) is determined every time each re-variation of the pseudo run is performed. For example, in the case of the pseudo-ream 3, the first notice is determined, for example, at the first temporary stop of the pseudo ream, and the second notice is, for example, at the second temporary stop of the pseudo ream. The third advance notice is determined, for example, at the third temporary stop of the pseudo-relation.

[Second Embodiment of Each Process Related to Notice Production by Peripheral Control MPU]
FIG. 197 (B) is a flowchart showing each process executed by the peripheral control MPU in relation to the pseudo continuous fluctuation as each process as the second embodiment of the effect control process of step S602 of FIG. 168. The peripheral control MPU sequentially executes the notice production determination process 3 (step A550), the notice determination process 2 (step A560), and the notice production process 2 (step A570) in the production control process. The substantial execution conditions in each process are as described below.

  When it is specified that the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S601 in the 16 ms steady process shown in FIG. 168 is a variation pattern command, the notice control determination process 3 of step A550 in the effect control process of step S602. Is substantially executed.

  The notice production determination process 3 of step A550 is substantially executed, and when the notice production is determined to be performed, the notice production process 2 of step A560 is substantially executed.

  Similarly, the notice effect determination process 3 of step A550 is substantially executed, and when it is determined to perform the notice effect, the notice effect process 2 of step A570 is substantially executed.

  Further, in the first and second embodiments described above, the advance-decision-determining random number counter to be used is seven random number counters 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 201 (A). .. On the other hand, the notice determination random number counter used in the third embodiment is different in that only the random number counter 1 shown in FIG. 201 (A) is used.

[Random number update process]
FIG. 197 (C) is a flowchart showing a process executed by the peripheral control MPU in relation to updating the random number for advance notice determination as one process of the random number updating process of step S606 of FIG. 168 in the third embodiment. . In this process, the peripheral control MPU increments the value of the announcement determination random number by 1 (increments the value of the random number counter by 1) (step A300).

  Next, it is determined whether the updated random number value exceeds the upper limit value (1000 in this case) (step A301). If it is determined that the updated random number value does not exceed the upper limit value (1000 in this case), that is, if step A301 is NO, the process is exited.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A301 that the updated random number value exceeds the upper limit value (1000 in this case), that is, if YES is determined in step A301, the lower limit value storage area of the RAM (not shown) The lower limit value stored in is set to the value of the random number for advance notice determination (the lower limit value is set to the value of the random number counter) (step A302). Then, the process is exited.

  As an example, when the lower limit value stored in the lower limit value storage area is “301”, considering that the random number update process is executed every 16 ms, the value of the preliminary announcement determination random number (random number counter 1) is the upper limit. If the value is exceeded, in step A302, the value is changed so as to be cyclically updated within the range of the lower limit value (= 301) to the upper limit value (= 1000).

[Preliminary effect determination process 3]
FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the notice effect determination process 3 (third embodiment) executed by the peripheral control MPU in the third embodiment. When the peripheral control MPU starts the notice production determination process 3, first, it determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is equal to or longer than a predetermined time at which the pseudo-link can be executed. (Step A260).

  If it is determined in step A260 that the variation time is not longer than or equal to the predetermined time for enabling pseudo-linking, that is, if step A260 is determined to be NO, substantial notice effect determination process 3 is not performed. The process of the notice effect determination process 3 is returned to the effect control process routine.

  In step A260, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the variation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time for enabling the pseudo-link, that is, when it determines YES in step A260, the notice effect random number (for example, 0 to 99) is acquired (step A261), the acquired value of the random number for advance notice effect and the advance notice effect determination table are referred to (step A262), and it is determined whether or not to perform advance notice effect (step A263).

  FIG. 201C is a diagram showing an example of a distribution rate of the notice effect determination table stored in the ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 201 (C), in the present example, it is determined that the notice effect is performed at a proportion of 70%. For the remaining distribution ratio of 30%, another effect (an effect other than the notice effect) is performed.

  In step A263, if the peripheral control MPU determines not to perform the notice effect, that is, if the step A263 is NO, the peripheral control MPU does not perform the notice effect determination process 3 substantially, and the notice effect determination process 3 is performed. The subroutine is exited to return to the effect control processing routine. In this case, the substantial notice effect process described later is not executed.

  In step A263, if the peripheral control MPU determines to perform the notice effect, that is, if it determines YES in step A263, the process proceeds to step A264 and sets the execution flag of the notice effect process 2 (step A264). As a result, execution of the notice production process 2 is determined.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU acquires a pseudo-repetition number random number (for example, 0 to 4) (step A265) and refers to the acquired value of the pseudo-repetition number random number and the frequency determination table to determine the frequency of the pseudo-repetition. (Step A266) The determined number of times of pseudo-repeating is stored in the re-change number storage area CN1 of the RAM (step A267).

  FIG. 201 (D) is a diagram showing an example of the number-of-times determination table stored in the ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 201 (D), if the value of the acquired pseudo-repetition number determining random number is “0”, the number of pseudo-repetitions is determined to be “1 time, pseudo-repetition 1”, and the acquired pseudo-repetition number is determined. If the value of the random number for use is "1", the number of pseudo runs is determined as "2 times, pseudo run 2", and if the value of the acquired random number for determining the number of pseudo runs is "2", the number of pseudo runs is If the value of the acquired pseudo-repetition number determining random number is “3”, the number of pseudo-repetitions is determined to be “4 times, pseudo-repetition 4”, and the acquired pseudo-repetition is determined. If the value of the random number for determining the number of times is “4”, the number of pseudo runs is determined to be “5 times, pseudo run 5”.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU sets the timing of pseudo link in the variable time in the timer (step A268). The timer value set in the timer is decreased by one by a timer subtraction process (not shown) until the value becomes 0 every predetermined period (for example, every 2 ms).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU sets 0 (default value) to the memory counter CN2 (step A269). Here, the storage counter CN2 is a counter whose value can take a range of 1 to 5. For example, when the number of pseudo-repetitions is 3, the value of the storage counter CN2 is "1" to "3". After finishing step A269, the peripheral control MPU exits the subroutine of the notice effect determination process 3 and returns to the effect control process routine.

[Preliminary decision processing 2]
FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of advance notice determination processing 2 executed by the peripheral control MPU in the third embodiment. When starting the notice determination process 2, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether or not the execution flag related to the notice effect process 2 is set (step A270). The execution flag related to the notice effect process 2 is set in step A264 of the notice effect determination process 3 described above.

  In step A270, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if the determination in step A270 is NO, the peripheral control MPU exits the subroutine of the advance notice determination processing 2 without performing substantial processing. And returns to the routine of the effect control process. In this case, the notice is not substantially decided.

  In step A270, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is set, that is, when it determines YES in step A270, it determines whether it is the advance notice determination timing (step A271). Note that the timing of the advance notice determination can be set arbitrarily as long as it is the degree of pseudo-repetition, but in the present example, it is the temporary stop before the re-change of the decorative symbol.

  In step A271, if the peripheral control MPU determines that it is not the advance notice determination timing, that is, if step A271 is NO, the peripheral control MPU exits the advance notice determination process 2 subroutine without performing substantial processing, and effects control is performed. Return to the processing routine. In this case, the notice is not substantially decided.

  In step A271, if the peripheral control MPU determines that it is the advance notice determination timing, that is, if it determines YES in step A271, the process proceeds to step A272. The peripheral control MPU identifies the reference portion of the advance notice lottery distribution table shown in FIG. 196 by the type of variation pattern (step A272). Here, the reference part of the advance notice lottery distribution table means a distribution division shown in a tabular form in a horizontally arranged line in the advance notice lottery table selected corresponding to the type of the variation pattern.

  For example, when the type of the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern 22, the advance notice lottery table 2 is selected as shown in FIG. 196. The sorting classification in the advance notice lottery table 2 is a range of 0 to 100, a range of 101 to 200, a range of 201 to 300, a range of 301 to 400, a range of 401 to 600, a range of 601 to 800, and a range of 801 to 1000. , And 7 categories. Hereinafter, it is assumed that the type of the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern 22.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU acquires a preliminary announcement determination random number (step A273). In this case, since it is the first time, the random number counter 1 whose upper limit value shown in FIG. 201 (A) is set to “1000” (by default, the value is updated from 0 to 1000, and the value is incremented by +1 and then updated. The range of 0 to 1000, which is a value that is returned to 0 at the time of execution, is targeted, and the value is acquired (simply referred to as an acquired value). In this case, since it is the first time, the value of 0 to 1000 is the acquisition range for the advance notice determination.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU determines the type of advance notice based on the acquired value and the specified reference unit (step A274). For example, when the acquired value is “150”, the type of notice (serif) to be determined is “PTN2”. Next, the notice data of the determined type is transferred to the output area (step A275). In this case, the first notice data “PN2” is transferred to the output area.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU stores the lower limit value corresponding to the acquired value acquired in step A275 in the lower limit value storage area (step A276). For example, when the above-mentioned acquired value is “150”, the lower limit value “101” shown in FIG. 196 is the lower limit so that the value (101) is the lower limit value of the acquired range in the specified reference part. It is stored in the value storage area. Then, the process goes out of the subroutine of the notice determination process 2 and returns to the effect control process routine. As a result, the advance notice suggested at the first re-variation of the pseudo-relation is determined to be "PTN2" and transferred to the output area.

[Changing the lower limit of random numbers]
When the acquired value acquired in step A273 is “150”, the value of the random number for prior notice determination (random number counter 1) updated in step A300 of FIG. 197 (C) is always a value larger than “150”. Become. Considering that the value of the lower limit value storage area is changed to “101” by step A276 and the random number updating process is executed every 16 ms, the value of the preliminary announcement determination random number (random number counter 1) exceeds the upper limit value. Since the lower limit value (= 101) is changed at this time, the value is changed so as to be cyclically updated within the range of the lower limit value (= 101) to the upper limit value (= 1000).

  In addition, in the third embodiment, the lower limit value of the random number for advance notice determination is changed, but the upper limit value of the random number for advance notice determination may be changed even when the advance notice is drawn for each change. It is possible. In that case, the reliability of the notice shown in FIG. 196 is set reversely. That is, PTN1 is maximum and PN7 is minimum in order of reliability.

  Alternatively, the notices assigned to the notice lottery sorting table are reversed. In the case of the variation pattern 22, the advance notice lottery table 2 is selected in the same manner, but if the acquired value is in the range of 0 to 100, “PNT7” is selected and determined as the advance notice, and the acquired value is 101 to 200. "PNT6" is selected and decided as a notice when the range is, and "PNT5" is selected and decided as a notice when the acquired value is in the range of 201 to 300, and when the obtained value is in the range of 301 to 400, If "PNT4" is selected and decided as the notice and the acquired value is in the range of 401 to 600, "PNT3" is selected and decided as the notice and if the acquired value is in the range of 601 to 800, "PNT2" is decided as the notice. If the selected value is selected and the obtained value is in the range of 801 to 1000, “PNT1” is selected and determined as a notice.

[Advance notice processing 2]
FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the notice effect process 2 executed by the peripheral control MPU in the third embodiment. When starting the notice effect process 2, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether or not an execution flag related to the notice effect process 2 is set (step A280). The execution flag related to the notice effect process 2 is set in step A264 of the notice effect determination process 3 described above.

  In step A280, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if step A280 determines NO, the peripheral control MPU exits the subroutine of the notice effect process 2 without performing substantial processing. And returns to the routine of the effect control process. In this case, the notice production is not substantially performed.

  In step A280, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is set, that is, when it determines YES in step A280, it determines whether it is the advance notice timing (step A281).

  In step A281, when the peripheral control MPU determines that it is not the advance notice timing, that is, when it determines NO in step A281, the peripheral control MPU exits the advance notice effect process subroutine and performs the effect control process without performing substantial processing. Return to routine. In this case, the notice production is not substantially performed.

  In step A281, when the peripheral control MPU determines that it is the advance notice timing, that is, when it determines YES in step A281, it outputs the advance notice data transferred to the output area (step A282) and sets the advance notice data to 1 The value of the memory counter CN2 is incremented by 1 in response to the output (step A283), and the process proceeds to step A284. The value of the storage counter CN2 is set to "0" in step A269 of the notice effect determination process 3 in FIG.

  In this case, "PTN2" is output from the output area at the first re-change. Also, the display of the advance notice data output in step A282 on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is performed by outputting image data (in this case, "PN2") by the information output processing in step S605 of FIG. 168. Will be realized.

  When the peripheral control MPU proceeds to step A284, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the value of the storage counter CN2 has reached the value of the revariation number storage area CN1 (the number of pseudo-repetitions) (step A284). When it is determined in step A284 that the value of the storage counter CN2 has not reached the value of the re-variation number storage area CN1 (the number of times of pseudo-repeating), that is, when it is determined NO in step A284, the advance notice effect is produced. The process 2 subroutine is exited and the effect control process routine is returned to.

  Hereinafter, in a state where the execution flag related to the notice effect process 2 is set, each process of step A272 to step A276 in the notice determination process 2 of FIG. 204 is executed every time the notice determination timing comes. Therefore, the random number for advance notice determination acquired in step A273 is to be acquired with a value within the range of the lower limit value (= 101) to the upper limit value (= 1000).

  If the acquired value of the preliminary announcement determination random number acquired in step A273 is "350", the second preliminary announcement data is determined to be "PTN4", and the preliminary announcement data "PTN4" is transferred to the output area. It should be noted that the notice to be decided will be a notice with the same or higher reliability as the number of re-variations progresses. If the acquired value acquired in step A273 is "350", the lower limit value is changed to "301" in step A276.

  Further, in a state where the execution flag related to the notice effect process 2 is set, each process of step A282-step A283 in the notice determination process 2 of FIG. 205 and the determination process of step A284 are executed at each notice timing. It The determination process of step A284 is determined to be NO until the value of the storage counter CN2 matches the number of times stored in the re-change count storage area (the number of pseudo runs). Therefore, at each advance notice timing, the advance notice data in the output area is output until the value of the storage counter CN2 reaches the value of the revariation number storage area CN1 (the number of pseudo runs). Therefore, in the case of the pseudo-relationship 3, the notice data "PTN4" is output from the output area at the time of the second re-change thereafter, and displayed as image data in the information output process.

  Further, after that, when the third notice determination process 2 is executed, the notice determination random number acquired in step A273 is a value within the range of the lower limit value (= 301) to the upper limit value (= 1000). When the acquired value of the random number for advance notice determination acquired in step A273 is "750", the advance notice data for the third time is determined to be "PTN6", and the advance notice data "PTN6" is transferred to the output area. When the acquired value acquired in step A273 is "750", the lower limit value is changed to "601" in step A276.

  Further, thereafter, when the third notice effect process 2 is executed, “PTN6” is output from the output area in step A282. Also, the display of the advance notice data output in step A282 on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is performed by outputting image data (in this case, "PN6") by the information output processing in step S605 of FIG. 168. Will be realized.

  Then, in step A283, the value of the storage counter CN2 is incremented by 1, so that the value of the storage counter CN2 reaches the value of the re-variation number storage area CN1 (the number of pseudo runs) (3 in this case). That is, step A284 is determined to be YES, 0 is set in the re-change count storage area CN1 (step A285), 0 is set in the storage counter CN2 (step A286), and the lower limit storage area is 0 (default value of lower limit value) "is set and returned (step A287), the execution flag of the notice effect process is cleared (step A288), the subroutine of the notice effect process is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

  It should be noted that when the execution flag of the notice effect process 2 is cleared, the notice effect ends. Further, since the execution flag of the notice effect process 2 is cleared, the notice determination process 2 of FIG. 204 is also not executed.

  As described above, in the pseudo pattern 3 of the variation pattern 22, the notice “PTN2” is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 at the first re-variation, and the notice “PTN4” is displayed at the center liquid crystal display on the second re-variation. It is displayed on the device 1500, and the notice "PTN6" is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 at the third re-change.

  Note that FIG. 197 (D) is a diagram showing, in a tabular form, an example of the history of the update range of the random number for advance notice determination when the pseudo sequence 3 is performed in the variation pattern 22 in the third embodiment. The range of the lower limit value (= 0) to the upper limit value (= 1000) of the random number for random number determination (random number counter 1) for the first time is the target of the acquired value, and the first acquired value is “150”. In response to this, the lower limit value is changed to “101”, and the range of the lower limit value (= 101) to the upper limit value (= 1000) of the second random number for preliminary announcement determination (random number counter 1) is the target of the acquired value, The second acquired value was "350". In response to this, the lower limit value is changed to “301”, and the range of the lower limit value (= 301) to the upper limit value (= 1000) of the third random number for preliminary announcement determination (random number counter 1) is the target of the acquired value, The third acquired value was “750”. In response to this, the lower limit value is changed to "601". Since the random number lottery is up to three times, the lower limit value is returned to “0 (default value)” (step A287 in FIG. 205).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of fluctuations such as a pseudo continuous fluctuation are performed and a warning indicating the reliability over a plurality of fluctuations is performed, the reliability of the notification determined and determined by the random number lottery. It is designed so that the frequency does not decrease (so-called, so-called fall does not occur). As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game of the player from decreasing in the course of the game.

  According to the gaming machine according to the embodiment, the notice lottery information stored in the notice lottery table 1 or 2 based on the predetermined information corresponding to the number of times the notice is executed over a plurality of variations of the decorative pattern. The notice effect mode to be executed is selected, and the selected notice effect mode is determined as a notice corresponding to each number of times. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a large number of tables for determining the form of the notice effect in the stage effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of variable effects, and the development man-hour is not burdened. Further, the notices determined in correspondence with the number of times are sequentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a variety of effects, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, when the notice corresponding to the number of times is determined, the notice production mode is determined so that the notice production mode executed after the number of times does not become less reliable than the notice production mode executed after the number of times. To do. Therefore, the reliability does not decrease in the preliminary presentation that suggests the reliability. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the notice is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 as the notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice effect is not limited to the display but depends on the light emission, the sound, or the movement of the movable accessory. It may be a production.

[Look ahead notice production]
In the above-described embodiment, the deterioration of the reliability of the effect content that is sequentially suggested in the advance notice effect is prevented along with the re-variation of the pseudo-relation, but the pre-reading notice is used instead of the pseudo-relation. It is also possible to apply to production.

  The look-ahead notice effect is a notice effect that is executed from the change display prior to the start of the change display subject to the notice. That is, it may be possible to prevent deterioration of the reliability in the form of a notice effect that is sequentially suggested in time series over a plurality of symbol variations in the state of executing the look-ahead notice effect.

[Other]
The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board is directly controlled to suggest the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) is to turn on and off a plurality of LEDs repeatedly for a predetermined time, and then turn them on. The result of the special lottery is suggested by the combination of the LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the central liquid crystal display device 1500, based on the control signal from the main control board, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the result of the special lottery on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is variably displayed by varying each symbol row in a state where three symbol rows each including a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the decorative symbols of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the result of the special lottery is other than “miss”, after the three symbol rows are stopped and each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image indicating the result of the special lottery is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small-hit game, a big-hit game, etc.) corresponding to the selected special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 (the pattern row fluctuates and the final image is confirmed). (Time until is displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

  Further, on the peripheral control board, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the front movable production unit 2560 and the front movable production are performed in accordance with the special lottery result selected by the lottery. The unit 2570, the back upper movable production unit 3100, the back lower front movable production unit 3200, the back right movable production unit 3300, the back left movable production unit 3400, the back lower rear production production unit 3500, the back four corner movable production unit 3600, and the like. The movable effect is appropriately used to perform the movable effect, which can entertain the player also by the movable effect, and can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball can be accepted into the upper special winning opening 2006, the back right rotation decorative body 3310 of the back right movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is rotated. When the third decorative surface 3310c is directed forward (front), the rear outlet 2554 of the rear guideway 2553 through which the game balls received in the upper special winning opening 2006 circulate and the back right ball inlet 3320 coincide. Is set (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the game ball is received in the upper special winning opening 2006, it enters the rear right ball entrance 3320 from the rear outlet 2554 of the rear guideway 2553, and the ball guide member arranged in the rear right effect space 3321. By 3322, it flows down while rotating in a spiral multiple times (here, eight times) around the axis extending vertically in the back right effect space 3321 (see FIG. 175 (a)).

  As a result, the game ball received in the upper prize hole 2006 can be made to flow in a spiral shape in the back right effect space 3321, so that the player can visually recognize the game ball received in the upper prize hole 2006. It is possible to increase the expectation for paying out the game balls by receiving the game balls to the upper prize hole 2006, and to entertain the player with the game balls spirally flowing down. Can be suppressed. Further, since the ball guiding member 3322 is arranged adjacent to the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the game ball flows down the ball guiding member 3322 to the player who is paying attention to the effect image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. You can easily recognize what you are doing. Although the sphere guiding member 3322 is arranged so as to be adjacent to the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in this example, the sphere guiding member 3322 is arranged so that a part or all of the sphere guiding member 3322 overlaps with the central liquid crystal display device 1500. You may make it easy to recognize that the game ball is flowing down the guide member 3322. Further, in this case, it is possible to prevent the visual effect image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 from being obstructed by forming the ball guiding member 3322 with a transparent member whose back is visible.

  In addition, when the upper special winning opening 2006 is in the open state, in the case of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 except for the third decorative surface 3310c, the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guideway 2553 has the first decorative surface 3310a. And because it is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the second decorative surface 3310b, the game ball received in the upper prize hole 2006 enters the escape passage 2555 branched near the rear end of the rear guideway 2553 and escapes. It is discharged downward through the passage 2555. As a result, when the upper special winning opening 2006 can be accepted, an effect using the back right effect space 3321 of the back right movable effect unit 3300 or an effect not using the back right effect space 3321 is performed. It is possible to present various variations to the player and entertain them. Further, for some reason, even if the back right rotation decorative body 3310 cannot direct the third decorative surface 3310c to the front, the game ball received in the upper special winning opening 2006 is stuck in the rear guideway 2553. Therefore, the game can be continued without any problem.

[10. Fast digestion of jackpot games]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined number of rounds of the big hit game can be digested in a shorter time than a conventional game machine in which a special winning opening is arranged near the lower end of the game area 5a. The details will be described below.

  As described above, the ball launching device 680 hits the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a with a driving strength equal to or higher than a predetermined driving strength, so that the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 is hit. The game ball that has entered the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface comes into contact with the stop 1006 and its momentum is weakened, and then enters the upper game space 2541 from the upper right entrance.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 176, the upper right entrance extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that is abutted against the stop 1006 and weakened in its force rolls by the upper right entrance. The moving direction is restricted and it will fall directly below.

  Then, in a state where the upper special winning opening 2006 is opened, the upper end of the upper special winning opening door member 2550 is made higher than the lower end, so that the game ball abutting on the upper special winning opening door member 2550 is raised with an extremely high probability. Not only is it received in the special winning opening 2006, but the upper special winning opening door member 2550 is rotated so that the upper end of the upper special winning opening door member 2550 is located on the right side in front view rather than the upper right entrance.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since no obstacle nail is planted in the upper game space 2541, the game ball falling from the upper right entrance abuts the upper special winning opening door member 2550 with an extremely high probability. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 and is dropped from the upper right entrance with the upper special winning opening 2006 open is extremely There is a high probability that the prize will be accepted into the upper prize winning opening 2006.

  In this way, since the upper prize hole 2006 is arranged near the upper right end of the game area 5a, it is driven into the game area 5a more than the conventional gaming machine in which the big prize hole is arranged near the lower end of the game area 5a. The moving distance until the game ball is received in the upper prize hole 2006 is shortened, and the game ball that has entered the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 is extremely short. Since there is a high probability that the ball will be accepted into the upper special winning opening 2006, it is possible to shorten the period from when the ball launching device 680 hits the game ball in the game area 5a to when the game ball is received in the upper special winning opening 2006. This makes it possible to complete a predetermined number of rounds of a big hit game in a shorter time than a conventional gaming machine having a big winning opening near the lower end of the game area 5a.

  In addition, the game ball hit by the ball launching device 680 with a driving strength equal to or higher than a predetermined driving strength by arranging the upper prize hole 2006 near the upper right end portion of the game area 5a is hit by the hitting portion 1006. Since it is configured so that it can roll along the inside of the outer rail 1001 and enter the upper special winning opening 2006 without coming into contact with an obstacle such as an obstacle nail until it comes into contact, the game ball that is hit is always It becomes possible to roll at a certain speed or more, and at least the period from when the ball launching device 680 hits the game ball into the game area 5a until the game ball abuts on the hitting portion 1006 can be shortened. That is, the ball launching device 680 has a game area as compared with a case where the game ball is hit with a hitting strength less than a predetermined hitting strength so that the ball can enter the upper special winning opening 2006. It is possible to shorten the period from the hitting of the game ball into 5a to the acceptance of the game ball in the upper special winning opening 2006.

  In other words, the upper special winning opening 2006 is arranged near the upper left end of the game area 5a, and when the game ball is hit by the ball launching device 680 with a driving force less than a predetermined driving force, the game ball is As compared with the case where it is possible to enter the upper prize hole 2006, the upper prize hole 2006 is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right end of the game area 5a, and the ball launching device 680 has a predetermined driving force or more. When the game ball is driven with the driving strength of, the game ball can be entered into the upper prize hole 2006, so that the rolling speed of the game ball becomes faster, and thus the ball launching device 680. It is possible to shorten the period from when the player hits the game ball in the game area 5a to when the game ball is received at the upper prize hole 2006, and it is possible to digest a predetermined number of rounds of the jackpot game in a short time. ..

  In addition, since the ball launching device 680 is designed to hit a game ball one by one every about 0.6 seconds, the time required to hit, for example, 10 game balls is 6 seconds. In addition, as described above, the game ball that has been driven by the ball launching device 680 with a driving force that is equal to or higher than a predetermined driving force should come into contact with obstacles such as obstacle nails until it comes into contact with the stopper 1006. Since it rolls along the inner side of the outer rail 1001, the game ball is struck by the ball launching device 680 with a driving strength equal to or higher than a predetermined driving strength and enters the game area 5a, and then the first prize. It takes a very short time (about 1 second) to be accepted in the mouth 2006.

  That is, the period from the opening of the upper prize opening door member 2550 in one round in the big hit game to the receipt of 10 game balls in the upper prize opening 2006 is about half that of the conventional game machine. The period is about 7 to 8 seconds, and the interval period between rounds (the period from closing the special winning opening 2006 to opening it again) is shorter than that of the conventional gaming machine (about 2.0 seconds). Since it is about 0.6 seconds, if it is a 15 round big hit game, it will be completed in about 113.4 seconds to 128.4 seconds.

  In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the period required for a big hit game can be shortened compared to the conventional gaming machine, it is executed per unit time on the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device. The number of executions of the variable display (variable display count) of the possible symbols (first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device, second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display device) The number of games can be increased more than that of a gaming machine, and the chance of big hits can be increased, which can prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. In addition, since the execution period of the big hit game executed by the conventional gaming machine can be shortened to about half, the big hit game itself can be made interesting, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game ball received in the upper prize hole 2006 enters the rear right ball entrance 3320 from the rear outlet 2554 of the rear guideway 2553, and the rear right effect space By the ball guiding member 3322 arranged in 3321, it flows down while rotating in the back right effect space 3321 a plurality of times (here, eight times) in a spiral around an axis extending vertically (see FIG. 175 (a)). ). The game sphere flowing down the ball guide member 3322 is fragmentally visible to the player as shown in FIG. 175 (a). It takes about 2 seconds until the game ball flowing down the ball guide member 3322 is discharged from the discharge port 3303a of the lower back right base 3303 and becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize. As described above, the period from when the game ball is driven by the ball launching device 680 with a driving strength equal to or higher than the predetermined driving strength and enters the game area 5a until it is received in the upper prize hole 2006 is 1 Since it is about a second, the period from the hitting of the game ball by the ball launching device 680 to the acceptance of the upper prize hole 2006 from the time when the game ball is accepted by the upper prize hole 2006 to the lower back right base 3303 Is shorter than the period until it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it after being discharged from the discharge port 3303a.

  In this way, not only the rolling of the game ball in the game area 5a that the player pays attention to, but also the gaming ball received in the upper special winning opening 2006, which is not usually noted, is complicatedly rolled and discharged. It is possible to draw attention to the player by prolonging the period until it is reached, and to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment level of the game by effectively using the game balls that have become so-called dead balls as a result of being accepted by the upper prize hole 2006. be able to. In addition, since the period from the hitting of the game ball by the ball launching device 680 to the acceptance of the upper prize hole 2006 is short, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the hit game ball, and the hitting of the game ball is smooth. Although it may be uncertain whether or not it is being done, by striking the game ball received in the upper prize hole 2006 intricately and prolonging the period until it is discharged, the game ball is smoothly driven. It is possible to reassure the player that he / she is aware of this. In addition, the period from when the game ball is hit by the ball launching device 680 until it is received at the upper special winning opening 2006, after the game ball is received at the upper special winning opening 2006, the discharge port 3303a of the lower back right base 3303a. It is possible to direct the player's attention to the game ball received in the upper special winning opening 2006 by making the time shorter than the period from the time when it is discharged from the player until it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

[11. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is hit in the game area 5a to change the game state, the back drive motor of the back movable production unit 3100 according to the changed game state. 3103 rotates. When the back drive motor 3103 rotates, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 attached to the unit base 3101 rotate together with the back drive motor 3103. When the first transmission member 3107 rotates to enter the first specific rotation range from one end of the first specific rotation range, the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 is transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117. The first transmitted member 3117 rotates. When the first transmitted member 3117 rotates, the first movable base 3116 is opposite to the tip end opposite to the base end which is one of both ends of the first movable range extending in the direction parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. That is, it slides from the retracted position at the upper end toward the first appearance position below. Since the back decorative body 3152 is attached to the first movable base 3116 via the second movable base 3119, the back decorative body 3152 may move downward as the first movable base 3116 slides. Becomes After that, the first transmission member 3107 rotates and reaches the range end on the opposite side of the first specific rotation range, and at the same time, the first movable base 3116 reaches the tip on the opposite side of the first movable range, that is, the descending end. Then, when the first transmission member 3107 further moves out of the first specific rotation range, the first movable base 3116 becomes in a state in which the movement is stopped at the lower end. Although the second transmission member 3108 is rotating even while the first transmission member 3107 is rotating, the second transmission member 3108 is not within the second specific rotation range, so the second transmission member 3108 is not. Therefore, the second movable base 3119 cannot be slid relative to the first movable base 3116.

  A second movable base drive member 3124, to which the rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted, is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116. Since the second movable base drive member 3124 is slidably attached to the rotation link member 3123 in the extending direction (second direction) of the second transmission guide portion 3123d, when the first movable base 3116 slides, The rotary link member 3123 and the second movable base drive member 3124 rotate respectively so that the second direction becomes parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, and the second movable base drive member 3124 moves to the rotary link member 3123. On the other hand, it slides relatively in the second direction. At this time, when the second movable base drive member 3124 rotates, the second movable base 3119 slides with respect to the first movable base 3116 by the amount of rotation of the second movable base drive member 3124, and the back decorative body 3152 is removed. The second movable base 3119 is slightly moved in the moving direction, but when the second direction is parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, the rotation of the second movable base drive member 3124 is stopped, and the first movable base 3116 is stopped. The movement of the back decoration 3152 with respect to the movable base 3116 is also stopped. Since the moving direction of the second movable base 3119 is the same vertical direction as the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, even if the second movable base 3119 slightly slides due to the rotation of the second movable base driving member 3124, Without being noticed by the player, the back decorative body 3152 can be moved in a comfortable manner. In the initial state, when the second direction is parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, the rotation link member 3123 and the second movable base drive member 3124 do not rotate and the second movable base 3116 does not rotate. 3119 does not slide relatively.

  Subsequently, the rotation of the back drive motor 3103 causes the first transmission member 3107 to move away from the first specific rotation range, and the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 further rotate, so that the second transmission member 3108 becomes When entering the second specific rotation range from one end of the second specific rotation range, the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted to the second transmitted member 3122 and the second transmitted member 3122 starts rotating. To do. When the second transmitted member 3122 rotates, the rotation link member 3123 moves to the second transmitted member 3122 via the portion slidably attached in the extending direction (first direction) of the first transmission guide portion 3122e. Will be revolved around. When the rotary link member 3123 revolves, the extending direction of the second direction tends to rotate. Then, when the direction of the second direction (rotational link member 3123) is about to rotate, the reaction force from the portion where the second movable base drive member 3124 is slidably attached in the second direction is reduced so that the rotation link is reduced. The second movable base drive member 3124 is rotated while the member 3123 slides along the first direction and the second direction, respectively, and the rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is changed to the second transmitted member 3122 and the rotation link. It can be transmitted to the second movable base drive member 3124 via the member 3123.

  By transmitting the rotation to the second movable base drive member 3124, the second movable base 3119 is moved from the base end (upper end) which is one of both ends of the second movable range to the first movable base 3116. It slides in the same downward direction as the moving direction of the first base 3116 toward the opposite tip (lower end) side. As a result, the back decorative body 3152 attached to the second movable base 3119 also moves downward together with the second movable base 3119. After that, the second transmission member 3108 rotates to reach the range end on the opposite side of the second specific rotation range, and at the same time, the second movable base 3119 moves to the tip (second appearance position) on the opposite side of the second movable range. When it reaches and further the second transmission member 3108 rotates and moves away from the second specific rotation range, the second movable base 3119 is in a state in which the movement is stopped at the tip of the second movable range.

  When the second movable base 3119 slides with respect to the first movable base 3116, the ornament rotating gear 3120 rotatably attached to the second movable base 3119 is attached to the first movable base 3116. The member 3115 moves while rotating along the rack gear 3115a. Since the back decoration 3152 is attached to the decoration rotating gear 3120, when the second movable base 3119 is slid, the back decoration 3152 moves downward together with the second movable base 3119 while rotating. Becomes

  In this state, by rotating the back drive motor 3103 in the reverse direction, the second movable base 3119 and the first movable base 3116, that is, the back decorative body 3152 are moved to the initial state. Can be returned to.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 can be separately moved, so that the back decorative body 3152 can be moved in two steps. Thus, the back decoration 3152 can be made to perform complicated movements. Further, as the movable effect of the back decoration 3152, only the first movable base 3116 can be moved, or the second movable base 3119 can be moved after the first movable base 3116 is moved, so that various movable effect patterns can be obtained. Since it can be realized, it is possible to prevent the user from getting tired of the movable effect of the back decorative body 3152, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the second movable base 3119 is slid, the back decorative body 3152 rotates and moves downward together with the second movable base 3119. Therefore, more versatile movement can be given to the back decorative body 3152. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 are slid in the same vertical direction, and the back decorative body 3152 can be moved in the same direction by a longer distance. It is possible to increase the impact of the movable effect by 3152, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the rotation from the first transmission member 3107 is first transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117, and then the first movable base 3116 is moved by the first transmitted member 3117. It is possible to amplify the circumference of the first specific rotation range of the member 3107 by the first transmitted member 3117, and to further increase the first movable range of the first movable base 3116 from the retracted position to the first appearance position. Thus, the back-side decorative body 3152 that moves greatly can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the back side decorative body 3152 can be made to perform complicated movements with only one back side driving motor 3103, for example, another drive motor for moving the second moving base 3119 to the first moving base 3116 should be provided. The number of drive motors can be reduced and the load related to the control of the movable effect can be reduced as compared with the case where the first movable base 3116 is not required to be provided with the drive motor. The load (weight) acting on the one movable base 3116 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the first movable base 3116 with a drive motor for the second movable base 3119, it is possible to make the back decorative body 3152 larger (heavier) by the weight of the drive motor. Since the back decoration 3152 makes complicated movements, the impact on the player can be increased, and the large back decoration 3152 makes two-stage complicated movements, which gives the player something to do. It is possible to think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as the gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this and is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. Alternatively, in this case as well, the same operational effect as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1500 Central liquid crystal display 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3010a Opening 3100 Back movable production unit 3101 Unit base 3103 Back Upper drive motor (drive motor)
3104 Drive gear 3105 1st driven gear 3106 2nd driven gear 3107 1st transmission member 3107a 1st transmission gear 3107b 1st transmission pin 3107c 1st locking protrusion 3107d 1st notch 3108 2nd transmission member 3108a 2nd transmission gear 3108b 2nd transmission pin 3108c 2nd locking protrusion 3108d 2nd notch 3115 Rack member 3115a Rack gear (decorative rack gear)
3116 1st movable base 3117 1st transmitted member 3117a 1st substrate part 3117b 1st action pin 3117c 1st transmitted main body part 3117d 1st transmission slit 3117e 1st locking recessed part 3119 2nd movable base 3120 Decorative body rotation gear 3122 2nd Second transmitted member 3122a Second substrate portion 3122b Second transmitted main body portion 3122c Second transmission slit 3122d Second lock recessed portion 3122e First transmission guide portion 3123 Rotation link member 3123a Link main body portion 3123b First transmitted guide portion 3123d Second Transmission guide portion 3124 Second movable base drive member 3124a Second action pin 3124b Drive body portion 3124c Second transmitted guide portion 3125 Shaft member 3150 Back decoration unit (decoration body)
3151 Ornament base 3152 Back decoration (decor)
1510 1st hold number display area 1521 Hold image (first)
1522 Reserved image (second)
1523 Reserved image (3rd)
1524 Reserved image (4th)
1580 Second reservation number display area 1600a Left decorative pattern 1600b Medium decorative pattern 1600c Right decorative pattern

Claims (2)

A gaming machine comprising an outer frame and a main body frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, wherein a game is played using a game ball,
The outer frame is
A lower member that is provided at a lower portion and includes a curtain plate on which the main body frame is mounted in a state where the main body frame is closed with respect to an outer frame;
A hinge member that is provided on the left side of the outer frame and that supports the main body frame in an openable and closable manner,
Have at least
A game ball discharge area for discharging game balls to the rear surface side of the curtain plate, which is formed at a position retracted rearward on the side where the hinge member is provided,
A standing wall portion that is erected horizontally long including the rear of the game ball discharge area,
Equipped with
The game ball discharge area is formed at a position where the whole is retracted rearward from the rear surface of the curtain plate, and is formed on the right side of at least the rotation shaft when the main body frame is opened and closed ,
On the left side of the game ball discharge area and in front of the standing wall portion, the game ball rolling from the front side to the rear side on the hinge member in a state where the main body frame is open to the outer frame. An acceptable flat plate is formed,
Game ball is configured to be guided along the vertical wall portion from said flat portion to the game ball discharge region,
Front wall surface of the portion located behind the said plate of said vertical wall portion, the located rearwardly spaced at least one minute ball game from the main body frame lower end rear surface when the front Stories body frame is closed,
When the body frame is closed, the gaming machine the underside of the body frame, characterized in that so as not located above the entire area of the game balls discharged areas.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the standing wall portion has a bent portion that bends in the front-rear direction in the middle of the horizontal direction.